2017 Hyundai Azera OM

OWNER'S MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of pub-

lication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at
any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may
be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes

descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equip-
ment. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not
apply to your specific vehicle.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE
HYUNDAI WARNING
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. This manual includes information titled as WARN-
Such modifications may adversely affect the per- ING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
formance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and These titles indicate the following:
may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited
warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifica-
tions may also be in violation of regulations estab- WARNING
lished by the U.S. Department of Transportation This indicates that a situation may result in
and other federal or state agencies. harm, serious injury or death to you or other
persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow
the advice provided with the warning.
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELE-

PHONE INSTALLATION CAUTION
This indicates that a situation may result in
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injec- damage to your vehicle or its equipment if
tion and other electronic components. It is possible the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio provided with the caution.
or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you
carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-
tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precau- ✽ NOTICE
tionary measures or special instructions if you This indicates that interesting or helpful informa-
choose to install one of these devices. tion is being provided.
F2
HYUNDAI VEHICLE OWNER PRIVACY POLICY
Your Hyundai vehicle may be equipped with technologies and services that use information collected,
generated, recorded or stored by the vehicle. Hyundai has created a Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy to explain
how these technologies and services collect use and share this information.
You may read our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy on the Hyundaiusa.com website at:
https://www.hyundaiusa.com/owner-privacy-policy.aspx
If you would like to receive a hard copy of our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy, please contact our Customer
Connect Center at:
Hyundai Customer Care

P.O. Box 20850
Fountain Valley, CA 92728
800-633-5151
consumeraffairs@hmausa.com
Hyundai's Customer Connect Center representatives are available Monday through Friday,
between the hours of 5:00 AM and 7:00 PM PST and Saturday and Sunday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM
PST (English).
For Customer Connect Center assistance in Spanish or Korean, representatives are available Monday
through Friday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST.
F3
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people
who drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something
of which we are very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you
read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your
new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized
Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance
that may be required.
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA
CAUTION
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that
do not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the
specifications listed on Page 8-5 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please
leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
Copyright 2016 Hyundai Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in
any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor
America.
F4
Guide to Hyundai Genuine In addition, any damage to or fail-
Parts ure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts
caused by the installation or failure
1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?
of an imitation, counterfeit or used
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the salvage part is not covered by any
same parts used by Hyundai Motor HYUNDAI Warranty.
Company to manufacture vehicles.
They are designed and tested for
the optimum safety, performance, 3. How can you tell if you are pur-
and reliability to our customers. chasing Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts
Logo on the package (see below).
2. Why should you use genuine
parts? Hyundai Genuine Parts are export-
ed packaged with labels written
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are engi-
neered and built to meet rigid man- only in English.
ufacturing requirements. Damage Hyundai Genuine Parts are only
sold through authorized Hyundai A100A03L
caused by using imitation, counter-
feit or used salvage parts is not Dealerships.
covered under the HYUNDAI New
Vehicle Limited Warranty or any
other HYUNDAI warranty.
A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L
F5
Introduction
How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process / 1
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders
Your vehicle at a glance 2

Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment
Safety features of your vehicle 3

Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag
Features of your vehicle

Keys / Door locks / Trunk / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors / 4
Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Multimedia system / Etc.
table of contents Driving your vehicle
Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transaxle / Brake system / Cruise control system / 5
Active ECO system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.
What to do in an emergency 6
Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / TPMS / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.
Maintenance
Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid / 7
Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Light bulbs / Etc.
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 8

Index I
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1

• Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Other fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
• Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders. . 1-7
Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

We want to help you get the greatest Sections: This manual has eight sec- Symbols used in this manual
possible driving pleasure from your tions plus an index. Each section
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can begins with a brief list of contents so
Warnings, cautions and Notices
assist you in many ways. We strong- you can tell at a glance if that section
ly recommend that you read the has the information you want. WARNING
entire manual. In order to minimize You will find various types of safety A WARNING indicates a situa-
the chance of death or injury, you instructions in this manual. These tion in which harm, serious bod-
must read the WARNING and CAU- instructions were prepared to enhance ily injury or death could result if
TION sections in the manual. your personal safety. Carefully read the warning is ignored.
Illustrations complement the words and follow ALL procedures and rec-
in this manual to best explain how to ommendations provided in these
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your instructions. CAUTION
manual, you will learn about fea- A CAUTION indicates a situation
tures, important safety information, in which damage to your vehicle
and driving tips under various road could result if the caution is
conditions. ignored.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a ✽ NOTICE
specific area or subject; it has an A NOTICE indicates interesting or
alphabetical listing of all information helpful information is being provided.
in your manual.
1 2
Introduction
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Symbols used in illustrations Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having a pump WARNING - Refueling
octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87 • Do not "top off" after the noz-
Safety symbol (Research Octane Number 91) or zle automatically shuts off
This symbol means to "Avoid" higher. (Do not use methanol blend- when refueling. Attempts to
or "Do not do anything". ed fuels) force more fuel into the tank
can cause fuel overflow onto
Arrows Your new vehicle is designed to you and the ground causing a
obtain maximum performance with risk of fire.
Indicates the location.
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini- • Always check that the fuel cap
mize exhaust emissions and spark is installed securely to pre-
Indicates the action (pressing, plug fouling. vent fuel spillage in the event
turning, etc.) or outcome of an of an accident.
operation.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than ✽ NOTICE
what has been specified. (Consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
Tighten the cap until it clicks one
details.)
time, otherwise the warning light
“Check Fuel Cap” will illuminate on
the LCD display.
1 3
Introduction
Gasoline containing alcohol and "E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com- Other fuels
methanol prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 Using fuels such as;
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and percent gasoline, and is manufac-
tured exclusively for use in Flexible - Silicone (Si) contained fuel,
ethanol (also known as grain alco-
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compati- - Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and
hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-
taining methanol (also known as ble with your vehicle. Use of “E85” - Other metalic additives contained
wood alcohol) are being marketed will result in poor engine perform- fuels,
along with or instead of leaded or ance and may damage to your vehi- may cause vehicle and engine dam-
unleaded gasoline. cle's engine and fuel system. age or cause plugging, misfiring,
HYUNDAI recommends that cus- poor acceleration, engine stalling,
Do not use gasohol containing more tomers do not use fuel with an
than 10% ethanol, and do not use catalyst melting, abnormal corrosion,
ethanol content exceeding 10 per- life cycle reduction, etc. Also, the
gasoline or gasohol containing any cent.
methanol. Either of these fuels may Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
cause drivability problems and dam- may illuminate.
age to the fuel system, engine con- ✽ NOTICE
trol system and emission control sys- Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty ✽ NOTICE
tem. does not cover damage to the fuel
system or any performance prob- Damage to the fuel system or per-
Discontinue using gasohol of any formance problem caused by the use
kind if drivability problems occur. lems caused by the use of “E85” fuel.
of these fuels may not be covered by
Vehicle damage or drivability prob- your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
lems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1.Gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol.
2.Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3.Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
1 4
Introduction
Gasoline containing MMT Fuel Additives Operation in foreign countries

Some gasoline contains harmful HYUNDAI recommends that you use If you are going to drive your vehicle
manganese-based fuel additives good quality gasolines treated with in another country, be sure to:
such as MMT detergent additives such as TOP • Observe all regulations regarding
(Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese TIER Detergent Gasoline, which registration and insurance.
Tricarbonyl). help prevent deposit formation in the
engine. These gasolines will help the • Determine that acceptable fuel is
HYUNDAI does not recommend the available.
use of gasoline containing MMT. engine run cleaner and enhance per-
formance of the Emission Control
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle System. For more information on
performance and affect your emis- TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline,
sion control system. please go to the website (www.top-
The malfunction indicator lamp on tiergas.com)
the cluster may come on.
For customers who do not use TOP
Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly,
Do not use methanol and have problems starting or the
Fuels containing methanol (wood engine does not run smoothly, addi-
alcohol) should not be used in your tives that you can buy separately
vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce may be added to the gasoline. If
vehicle performance and damage TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not
components of the fuel system, available, one bottle of additive
engine control system and emission added to the fuel tank at every 7,500
control system. miles or 12 months is recommended.
Additives are available from your
✽ NOTICE authorized HYUNDAI dealer along
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty with information on how to use them.
may not cover damage to the fuel Do not mix other additives.
system and any performance prob-
lems that are caused by the use of
fuels containing methanol.
1 5
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS

No special break-in period is needed.
By following a few simple precautions CALIFORNIA PROPO-
for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you SITION 65 WARNING
may add to the performance, econo- Items contained in motor vehi-
my and life of your vehicle. cles or emitted from them are
• Do not race the engine. known to the State of California
• While driving, keep your engine to cause cancer and birth
speed (rpm, or revolutions per defects or reproductive harm.
minute) between 2,000 rpm and These include:
4,000 rpm. • Gasoline and its vapors
• Do not maintain a single speed for • Engine exhaust
long periods of time, either fast or • Used engine oil
slow. Varying engine speed is • Interior passenger compart-
needed to properly break-in the ment components and materi-
engine. als
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer- • Component parts which are
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat subject to heat and wear
properly.
In addition, battery posts, termi-
nals and related accessories
contain lead, lead compounds
and other chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm.
1 6
Introduction
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

This vehicle is equipped with an These data can help provide a bet- To read data recorded by an EDR,
event data recorder (EDR). The ter understanding of the circum- special equipment is required, and
main purpose of an EDR is to stances in which crashes and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
record, in certain crash or near injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are needed. In addition to the vehicle
crash-like situations, such as an recorded by your vehicle only if a manufacturer, other parties, such
air bag deployment or hitting a non-trivial crash situation occurs; as law enforcement, that have the
road obstacle, data that will assist no data are recorded by the EDR special equipment, can read the
in understanding how a vehicle's under normal driving conditions information if they have access to
systems performed. The EDR is and no personal data (e.g., name, the vehicle or the EDR.
designed to record data related to gender, age, and crash location)
vehicle dynamics and safety sys- are recorded. However, other par-
tems for a short period of time, ties, such as law enforcement,
typically 30 seconds or less. The could combine the EDR data with
EDR in this vehicle is designed to the type of personally identifying
record such data as: data routinely acquired during a
• How various systems in your crash investigation.
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was travel-
ing.
1 7
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Exterior overview II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 2
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW I
■ Front view
1. Door handle.........................................4-6
2. Hood ..................................................4-29
3. Side view mirrors...............................4-54
4. Windows ............................................4-25
5. Panorama sunroof .............................4-35
6. Removable towing hook ....................6-22
7. Wiper blade .......................................7-32
8. Tires and wheels ...............................7-37
9. Headlamp ..........................................7-63
10. Fog light...........................................7-63
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OHG015005N
2 2
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW II
■ Rear view
1. Door....................................................4-15
2. Trunk ...................................................4-19
3. Emergency trunk safety release.........4-20
4. Fuel filler lid ........................................4-31
5. Emergency fuel filler lid release .........4-34
6. Rear parking assist system ................4-95
7. Glass antenna ..................................4-145
8. Rear combination lamp ......................7-67
OHG015006N
2 3
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Seat.....................................................3-2
2. Door lock/unlock button ....................4-16
3. Central door lock switch....................4-17
4. Power window switches ....................4-26
5. Power window lock button ................4-28
6. Side view mirrors control switch .......4-54
7. Side view mirrors folding button........4-56
8. Seat adjustment .................................3-4
9. Driver’s position memory system* ....4-40
10. Trunk lid release button or lever......4-19
11. Fuel filler lid release button.............4-31
12. Hood release lever..........................4-29
13. Fuse box .........................................7-52
14. Steering wheel tilt control ...............4-44
15. Steering wheel ................................4-43
16. Instrument panel illumination control
switch ..............................................4-59
17. Active ECO button ..........................5-56
18. Blind spot detection system
button*.............................................5-57
19. ESC OFF button .............................5-30
* : if equipped
OHG015001N
2 4
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Instrument cluster ...............................4-58
2. Horn ....................................................4-45
3. Driver’s front air bag ...........................3-47
4. Light control/Turn signals..................4-102
5. Wiper/Washer ...................................4-107
6. Steering wheel audio control ............4-145
7. Cruise control switch or
Smart cruise control switch*......5-38, 5-42
8. Engine start/stop button........................5-5
9. Navigation/Audio system ..................4-147
10. Hazard warning flasher ............4-100/6-2
11. Climate control system ........4-113, 4-124
12. Shift lever ..........................................5-10
13. Passenger’s front air bag..................3-47
14. Glove box........................................4-137
15. Electronic parking brake (EPB)
switch*...............................................5-19
16. Auto hold control switch* ..................5-25
17. Power outlet ....................................4-140
18. Aux, iPod® and USB .......................4-147
19. Seat warmer or Seat warmer
with air ventilation ......................3-9, 3-10
20. Rear curtain button*........................4-144
21. Rear parking assist system
OFF button* ......................................4-95
22. Cup holder or Ashtray.....................4-139
23. Driver's knee air bag.........................3-47
24. Brake pedal.......................................5-16
* : if equipped OHG016002N
2 5
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-23

2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-23
3. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-24
4. Radiator cap .....................................7-26
5. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-27
6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-28
7. Air cleaner.........................................7-29
8. Positive battery terminal...................7-34
9. Negative battery terminal ................7-34
10. Fuse box .........................................7-53
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OHG010004A
2 6
Safety features of your vehicle
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system . 3-36

• Front seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 • How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
• Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 • Air bag warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 • SRS components and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
• Seat belt restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 • Occupation classification system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 • Driver's and passenger's front air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 • Side impact air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 • Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 3
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 • SRS care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 • Additional safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
- Automatic locking mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 • Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
- Tether Anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
- Lower anchor system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
SEATS
■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type C Driver’s seat
(1) Forward and rearward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height
(4) Lumbar support
(5) Cushion extension*
(6) Driver position memory system*
(7) Seat warmer*/
Seat warmer with air ventilation*
(8) Headrest
Front passenger’s seat

(9) Forward and rearward
(10) Seatback angle
(11) Seat cushion height
(12) Seat warmer*/
Seat warmer with air ventilation*
(13) Headrest
Rear seat
(14) Armrest
(15) Headrest
(16) Seat warmer*
(17) Seat folding
OHG036076N
* : if equipped
3 2
WARNING - Loose objects WARNING WARNING - Driver’s seat

Loose objects in the driver’s Occupants should never sit on To avoid serious injury or death:
foot area could interfere with seat cushions. The passenger's • Never attempt to adjust the
the operation of the foot pedals, hips may slide under the lap seat while the vehicle is mov-
possibly causing an accident. portion of the seat belt during ing. This could result in loss
Do not place anything under the an accident or a sudden stop. of control, and an accident
front seats. Serious or fatal internal injuries causing death, serious injury,
could result because the seat or property damage.
belt cannot operate normally. • Do not allow anything to inter-
WARNING fere with the normal position of
- Driver responsibility for the seatback. Storing items
passengers against a seatback or in any
The driver must advise the pas- other way interfering with prop-
senger to keep the seatback in er locking of a seatback could
an upright position whenever result in serious or fatal injury
the vehicle is in motion. If a seat in a sudden stop or collision.
is reclined during an accident, • In order to avoid unnecessary
the occupant’s hips may slide and perhaps severe air bag
under the lap portion of the seat injuries, always sit as far back
belt applying great force to the as possible from the steering
unprotected abdomen. Serious wheel while maintaining com-
or fatal internal injuries could fortable control of the vehicle.
result. A distance of at least 10 inches
from your chest to the steering
wheel is recommended.
3 3
Front seat
WARNING - Rear Automatic adjustment CAUTION
seatbacks • The power seat is driven by an
The front seat can be adjusted by
Always lock the rear seatback using the control switch located on electric motor. Stop the motor
before driving. Failure to do so the door and outside of the seat operation once the adjust-
could result in passengers or cushion. Before driving, adjust the ment is completed. Excessive
objects being thrown forward seat to the proper position so as to operation may damage the
injuring vehicle occupants. easily control the steering wheel, electrical equipment.
pedals and switches on the instru- • When in operation, the power
ment panel. seat consumes a large
amount of electrical power. To
WARNING - Seat prevent unnecessary charging
adjustment WARNING system drain, do not adjust
• Do not adjust the seat while The power seat is operable with the power seat longer than
wearing seat belts. Moving the the ignition OFF. necessary while the engine is
seat cushion forward may Therefore, children should not running.
cause strong pressure on the never be left unattended in the • Do not operate two or more
abdomen. vehicle. power seat control switches at
• Use extreme caution so that the same time. Doing so may
hands or other objects are not result in power seat motor or
caught in the seat mechanisms electrical component malfunc-
while the seat is moving. tion.
• Use extreme caution when
picking small objects trapped
under the seats or between
the seat and the center con-
sole. Your hands might be cut
or injured by the sharp edges
of the seat mechanism.
3 4
OHG030007 OHG030008 OHG030009

Forward and rearward Seatback angle Seat cushion height
1. Push the control switch forward or 1. Push the upper part of the control 1. Push the front portion of the con-
rearward to move the seat to the switch forward or rearward to move trol switch up to raise or down to
desired position. the seatback to the desired angle. lower the front part of the seat
2. Release the switch once the seat 2. Release the switch once the seat cushion. Push the rear portion of
reaches the desired position. reaches the desired position. the control switch up to raise or
down to lower the rear part of the
seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
3 5
OHG030010 OHG030012 OMG038400

Lumbar support (for driver’s seat) Cushion extension Headrest
1. Press the front portion of the (for driver's seat, if equipped) The driver's and front passenger's
switch to increase support or the 1. Push the switch forward to raise seats are equipped with a headrest
rear portion of the switch to the cushion extension. Push the for the occupant's safety and comfort.
decrease support. switch rearward to lower the cush- The headrest not only provides com-
2. Release the switch once it reach- ion extension. fort for the driver and front passenger,
es the desired position. 2. Release the switch once the cush- but also helps to protect the head and
ion extension reaches the desired neck in the event of a collision.
position.
3 6
For maximum effectiveness in case

of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is similar in
height as the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible.
For this reason, the use of a cushion
that holds the body away from the OHG030016 OHG030014
seatback is not recommended. Forward and rearward adjustment Adjusting the height up and down
The headrest may be adjusted for- To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
WARNING ward to 4 different positions by desired position (1). To lower the
• Do not operate the vehicle pulling the headrest forward to the headrest, push and hold the release
with the headrests removed desired detent. To adjust the head- button (2) on the headrest support
as severe injury to the occu- rest to it’s furthest rearward position, and lower the headrest to the desired
pants may occur in the event pull it fully forward to the farthest position (3).
of an accident. Headrests can position and release it. Adjust the
provide critical neck and head headrest so that it properly supports
support in a crash. the head and neck.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
motion. Driver may lose con-
trol of the vehicle.
3 7
CAUTION
OHG034072 OHG034073
OYFH034205
Removal Reinstall
If you recline the seatback To remove the headrest: To reinstall the headrest:
towards the front with the head 1. Recline the seatback (2) with the 1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
restraint and seat cushion recline switch (1). holes while pressing the release
raised, the head restraint may 2. Raise headrest as far as it can go. button (1).
come in contact with the sunvi- 3. Press the headrest release button 2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
sor or other parts of the vehicle. (3) while pulling the headrest up (4). recline switch (3).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appro-
priate height.
WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed. WARNING
Always make sure the headrest
locks into position after rein-
stalling and adjusting it properly.
3 8
■ Type A During mild weather or under condi-

tions where the operation of the seat CAUTION
warmer is not needed, keep the • When cleaning the seats, do
switches in the "OFF" position. not use an organic solvent
• Each time you press the button, such as paint thinner, ben-
the temperature setting of the seat zene, alcohol or gasoline.
will change as follows : Doing so may damage the sur-
face of the heater or seats.
■ Type A • To prevent overheating of the
OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )
seat warmer, do not place any-
OHG031018A thing on the seats that insu-
■ Type B
→
lates against heat, such as
blankets, cushions or seat
■ Type B covers while the seat warmer
is in operation.
OFF → HIGH ( ) • Do not place heavy or sharp
→
→ objects on seats equipped
LOW ( ) → MIDDLE ( ) with seat warmers. Damage to
the seat warming components
• The seat warmer defaults to the could occur.
OHG036074N OFF position whenever the ignition
Seat warmer switch is turned on.
The seat warmer is provided to warm • With the seat warmer switch in the
the front seats during cold weather. ON position, the heating system in
With the ignition switch in the ON the seat turns off or on automati-
position, push either of the switches cally depending on the seat tem-
to warm the driver's seat or the front perature.
passenger's seat.
3 9
■ Type A When the operation of the air ventila-

WARNING - Seat warmer tion is not needed, keep the switches
burns in the OFF position.
Never allow passengers who • Each time you press the switch,
may not be able to take care of the airflow changes as follows:
themselves to be exposed to
OFF → HIGH ( )
the risk of seat warmer burns.
→
→
These include:
LOW ( ) → MIDDLE ( )
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
OHG031019A
outpatients ■ Type B • When the air ventilation seat is
2. Persons with sensitive skin
turned on, the seat may get cooler
or those that burn easily
after about 5 minutes.
3. Fatigued individuals
• The air ventilation seat defaults to
4. Intoxicated individuals the OFF position whenever the
5. Individuals taking medication ignition switch is turned to the ON
that can cause drowsiness or position.
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
OHG036075N
Air ventilation seat
The air ventilation is provided to cool
the front seats during hot weather by
blowing air through small vent holes
on the surface of the seats and seat-
backs. While the engine is running,
press the rear portion of the switch to
cool the driver's seat or the front pas-
senger's seat.
3 10
CAUTION - Seat damage WARNING

• When cleaning the seats, do For proper operation of the
not use an organic solvent occupant classification system:
such as paint thinner, ben- • Do not place any items cumu-
zene, alcohol or gasoline. latively weighing over 2.2 lbs
Doing so may damage the air (1 kg) in the passenger’s seat-
ventilation seat. back pocket or on the passen-
• Do not place heavy or sharp ger’s seat.
objects on the seat. Those • Do not hang onto the front
things may damage the air passenger seatback.
ventilation seat. OHG030020
• Be careful not to spill liquid Seatback pockets
such as water or beverages on
the seat. If you spill some liquid,
wipe the seat with a dry towel. WARNING - Seatback
Before using the air ventilation pockets
seat, dry the seat completely. Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pocket.
An occupant could contact such
objects in a crash. Heavy objects
in the front passenger seatback
could also interfere with the
occupant sensing system.
3 11
Also adjust the headrest as close to

your head as possible.
For this reason, the use of a cushion
that holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
WARNING
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed
as severe injury to the occu-
ONF039401 pants may occur in the event OHG030021
of an accident. Headrests can
Rear seat provide critical neck and head Adjusting the height up and down
Headrest support in a crash. To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
The rear seat is equipped with head- desired position (1). To lower the
• Do not adjust the headrest headrest, push and hold the release
rests for the occupant's safety and height while the vehicle is in
comfort. button (2) on the headrest support
motion. Driver may lose con- and lower the headrest to the desired
The headrest not only provides com- trol of the vehicle.
fort for passengers, but also helps to position (3).
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is similar in
height as the top of their eyes.
3 12
• Each time you press the button,

the temperature setting of the seat
will change as follows :
OFF → HIGH( ) → LOW( )
→
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
• With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
OHG030022 OHG030028
the seat turns off or on automati-
Removal and reinstallation Seat warmer cally depending on the seat tem-
• To remove the headrest, raise it as The seat warmer is provided to warm perature.
far as it can go then press the the rear seats during cold weather.
release button (1) while pulling With the ignition switch in the ON
upward (2). position, push either of the switches
• To reinstall the headrest, put the to warm the seat.
headrest poles (3) into the holes During mild weather or under condi-
while pressing the release button tions where the operation of the seat
(1). Then adjust it to the appropri- warmer is not needed, keep the
ate height and ensure that it locks switches in the OFF position.
in position.
3 13
CAUTION WARNING - Seat warmer

• When cleaning the seats, do burns
not use an organic solvent Never allow passengers who
such as paint thinner, ben- may not be able to take care of
zene, alcohol or gasoline. themselves to be exposed to
Doing so may damage the sur- the risk of seat warmer burns.
face of the heater or seats. These include:
• To prevent overheating of the 1.Infants, children, elderly or
seat warmer, do not place any- disabled persons, or hospital
thing on the seats that insu- outpatients
lates against heat, such as 2.Persons with sensitive skin or OHG031054A
blankets, cushions or seat those that burn easily Armrest
covers while the seat warmer 3.Fatigued individuals
is in operation. To use the armrest, swing down the
4.Intoxicated individuals armrest to the lowest position (1).
• Do not place heavy or sharp
5.Individuals taking medication
objects on seats equipped
that can cause drowsiness or
with seat warmers. Damage to
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
the seat warming components
cold tablets, etc.)
could occur.
3 14
Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
WARNING
• Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down
seatback while the vehicle is
moving. This is not a proper
OHG041167A OHG030063L
seating position and no seat
Cup holder belts are available for use. To fold down the rear seatback:
To use the cup holder, pull up the This could result in serious 1. Make sure the rear seat belt web-
cover (2). injury or death in case of an bing is in the guide to prevent the
accident or sudden stop. seat belt from being damaged.
• Objects carried on the folded 2. Set the front seatback to the
down seatback should not upright position and if necessary,
extend higher than the top of slide the front seat forward.
the front seatbacks. This 3. Lower the rear headrests to the
could allow cargo to slide for- lowest position.
ward and cause injury or dam-
age during sudden stops.
3 15
5. To use the rear seat, lift and push

the seatback backward. Push back WARNING - Rear seatback
the seatback firmly until it clicks When returning the rear seat-
into place. Make sure the seatback back from a folded to an upright
is locked in place. position, hold the seatback and
6. Return the rear seat belt to the return it slowly. Ensure that the
proper position. seatback is completely locked
into its upright position by
When returning the rear seatbacks to pushing on the top of the seat-
the upright position, remember to back. In an accident or sudden
return the rear shoulder belts to their stop, the unlocked seatback
OHG030061L proper position. could allow cargo to move for-
ward with great force and enter
the passenger compartment,
which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING - Cargo
Do not place heavy objects in
the rear seats, since they can-
not be properly secured and
may hit vehicle occupants in a
OHG030062L frontal collision causing seri-
4. Pull out the seatback folding lever, ous injury or death.
then fold the seat toward the front
of the vehicle.
3 16
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system • Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat. See child WARNING - Twisted
Seat belts are designed to bear upon seat belt
the bony structure of the body, and restraint system section for further
should be worn low across the front discussion. Make sure your seat belt is not
of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and • No modifications or additions twisted when worn. A twisted
shoulders, as applicable; wearing the should be made by the user which seat belt may not properly pro-
lap section of the belt across the will either prevent the seat belt tect you in an accident and
abdominal area must be avoided. adjusting devices from operating to could even cut into your body.
Seat belts should be adjusted as remove slack, or prevent the seat
firmly as possible, consistent with belt assembly from being adjusted
comfort, to provide the protection for to remove slack. WARNING - Seat belt
which they have been designed. buckle
A slack belt will greatly reduce the WARNING - Shoulder belt Do not allow foreign material
protection afforded to the wearer. (gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to
Never wear the shoulder belt obstruct the seat belt buckle.
Care should be taken to avoid con- under your arm or behind your
tamination of the webbing with pol- This may prevent the seat belt
back. An improperly positioned from fastening securely. An
ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic- shoulder belt cannot protect the
ularly battery acid. Cleaning may improperly fastened seat belt
occupant in a crash. can result in serious injury or
safely be carried out using mild soap
and water. The belt should be death.
replaced if webbing becomes frayed, WARNING - Damaged
contaminated or damaged. seat belt
• For maximum restraint system pro-
WARNING
Replace the entire seat belt Always wear both the shoulder
tection, the seat belts must always assembly if any part of the web-
be used whenever the vehicle is portion and lap portion of the
bing or hardware is damaged as lap/shoulder belt.
moving. A properly positioned you can no longer be sure that a
shoulder belt should be positioned damaged seat belt will provide
midway over your shoulder across protection in a crash.
your collarbone.
3 17
Driver's side (1) Front passenger’s side (2)

Conditions Warning Pattern Conditions Warning Pattern
Vehicle Chime- Vehicle
Seat Belt Light-Blink Seat Belt Light-Blink
Speed Sound Speed
Unbuckled - 6 seconds Unbuckled - 6 seconds
Buckled*1 - 6 seconds None Buckled*1 - 6 seconds
Below 3 mph Above 6mph
6 seconds None Unbuckled Continuously
(5 km/h) (10 km/h)
Buckled → 3 mph~ Above 6mph
6 seconds Continuously *2
Unbuckled 6 mph Buckled → (10 km/h)
OHG035029 Above 6 mph 6 sec. on / 24 sec. off Unbuckled Below 6mph
None
Seat belt warning (10 km/h) (11 times) (10 km/h)
As a reminder to the driver and pas- Above 6 mph
*1 The warning light blinks 6 seconds
senger, the seatbelt warning light will (10 km/h) 6 seconds *2
whenever the ignition switch is in
blink and warning chime will sound Unbuckled ↓ ↓ ON position.
as follows: Below 3 mph Stop *3 *2 The seat belt warning light will go
(5 km/h) off if the vehicle speed decreases
below 3 mph (5 km/h). If the vehi-
*1 The warning light blinks 6 seconds cle speed increases above 3 mph
whenever the ignition switch is in (5 km/h), the warning light will blink
ON position. again.
*2 Warning pattern repeats 11 times
with an interval of 24 seconds. If
the driver's seat belt is buckled, the
light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
*3 The light will stop within 6 seconds
and chime will stop immediately.
3 18
• You can find the front passenger's It will also lock if you try to lean for-
seat belt warning light on the cen- ward too quickly.
ter fascia panel. If you are not able to pull out the seat
• Although the front passenger seat belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
is not occupied, the seat belt warn- belt out and release it. Then you will
ing light will blink for 6 seconds. be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
• The seat belt warning light can
blink when a briefcase or purse is
placed on the front passenger
seat.
B180A01NF-1
WARNING
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
Riding in an improper position with emergency locking retractor
adversely affects the front pas-
To fasten your seat belt:
senger's seat belt warning sys-
tem. It is important for the driver To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
to instruct the passenger as to the retractor and insert the metal tab
the proper seating instructions (1) into the buckle (2). There will be
as contained in this manual. an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let
you move around. If there is a sud-
den stop or impact, however, the belt
will lock into position.
3 19
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up

(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button
(2).
Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.
WARNING
- Shoulder belt position
OHG030030 B200A02NF
Never position the shoulder belt
Height adjustment (front seat) across your neck or face. You should place the lap belt portion
You can adjust the height of the Improperly positioned seat as low as possible and snugly across
shoulder belt anchor to one of the 4 belts can cause serious injuries your hips. If the lap belt is located too
positions for maximum comfort and in an accident. high on your waist, it may increase
safety. the chance of injury in the event of a
The height of the adjusting seat belt collision.
should not be too close to your neck. WARNING The arm closest to the seat belt
The shoulder portion should be - Seat belt replacement buckle should be over the belt while
adjusted so that it lies across your the other arm should be under the
Replace your seat belts after belt as shown in the illustration.
chest and midway over your shoulder
being in an accident. Failure to
near the door and not your neck.
replace seat belts after an acci-
To adjust the height of the seat belt dent could leave you with dam-
anchor, lower or raise the height aged seat belts that will not pro-
adjuster into an appropriate position. vide protection in the event of
another collision.
3 20
Seat belts - Front passenger and It automatically adjusts to the proper

rear seat 3-point system with length only after the lap belt portion
combination locking retractor of the seat belt is adjusted manually
To fasten your seat belt: so that it fits snugly around your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended
Combination retractor type seat belts
from the retractor to allow the instal-
are installed in the rear seat posi-
lation of a child restraint system, the
tions to help accommodate the
seat belt operation changes to allow
installation of child restraint systems.
the belt to retract, but not to extend
Although a combination retractor is
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
also installed in the front passenger
Refer to “Using a child restraint sys-
seat position, it is strongly recom-
tem” in this section. OHG030031
mended that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER To convert from the automatic lock- When using the rear center seat belt,
place any infant restraint system in ing feature to the emergency locking the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
the front seat of the vehicle. operation mode, allow the unbuckled must be used.
seat belt to fully retract.
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency lock-
ing retractor seat belt and an auto-
matic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into
the buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).
3 21
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or

if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor will
lock into position. In certain frontal
collisions or side collision, the pre-
tensioner will activate and pull the
seat belt into tighter contact against
the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive ten-
sion on the driver or passenger's
seat belt when the pre-tensioner acti-
B210A01NF-1 OED030300 vates, the load limiter inside the pre-
tensioner will release some of the
To release the seat belt: Pre-tensioner seat belt pressure on the affected seat belt.
The seat belt is released by pressing Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
the release button (1) in the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt
and front passenger's pre-tensioner ✽ NOTICE
seat belts. The purpose of the pre-
should automatically draws back into tensioner is to make sure that the The pre-tensioner will activate not
the retractor. seat belts fit tightly against the occu- only in a frontal collision but also in
If this does not happen, check the pant's body in certain frontal colli- a side collision or rollover, if the
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then sions or side collisions. The pre-ten- vehicle is equipped with a side or
try again. sioner seat belts may be activated in curtain air bag.
crashes where the frontal collision or
side collision is severe enough. WARNING
Do not put anything near the
buckle. Placing objects near the
buckle can adversely affect the
anchor pre-tensioner and may
increase the risk of personal
injury in the event of a collision.
3 22
✽ NOTICE
WARNING • When the pre-tensioner seat belts
To obtain maximum benefit are activated, a loud noise may be
from a pre-tensioner seat belt: heard and fine dust, which may
1. The seat belt must be worn appear to be smoke, may be visible
correctly and adjusted to the in the passenger compartment.
proper position. Please read These are normal operating condi-
and follow all of the important tions and are not hazardous.
information and precautions • Wash all exposed skin areas thor-
about your vehicle’s occupant oughly after an accident in which
safety features – including the pre-tensioner seat belts were
OHG031074A seat belts and air bags – that activated. The fine dust from the
The seat belt pre-tensioner system are provided in this manual. pre-tensioner activation may
consists mainly of the following com- 2. Be sure you and your passen- cause skin irritation and should
ponents. Their locations are shown in gers always wear seat belts not be breathed for prolonged
the illustration: properly. periods.
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
4. Anchor pre-tensioner assembly
Both the driver's and front passen-

ger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated in certain frontal collisions,
side collisions or rollover.
The pre-tensioners will not be acti-
vated if the seat belts are not being
worn at the time of the collision.
3 23
• Because the sensor that activates ✽ NOTICE Seat belt precautions

the SRS air bag is connected with Do not attempt to service or repair
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the the pre-tensioner seat belt system in WARNING
SRS air bag warning light ( ) on any manner. Do not attempt to
the instrument panel will illuminate All occupants of the vehicle
inspect or replace the pre-tensioner must wear their seat belts at all
for approximately 6 seconds after seat belts yourself. This must be
the ignition switch has been turned times. Seat belts and child
done by an authorized HYUNDAI restraints reduce the risk of
to the ON position, and then it dealer.
should turn off. serious or fatal injuries for all
occupants in the event of a col-
• If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not WARNING lision or sudden stop. Without a
working properly, this warning light seat belt, occupants could be
will illuminate even if there is no Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several shifted too close to a deploying
malfunction of the SRS air bag. If air bag, strike the interior struc-
the SRS air bag warning light does minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-ten- ture or be thrown from the vehi-
not illuminate when the ignition cle. Properly worn seat belts
switch is turned ON, or if it remains sioner seat belt mechanism
fires during a collision the pre- greatly reduce these hazards.
illuminated after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds, or if it illu- tensioner becomes hot and can Even with advanced air bags,
minates while the vehicle is being burn you. unbelted occupants can be
driven, please have an authorized severely injured by a deploying
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pre- air bag.
Pre-tensioners are designed to oper-
tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag ate only one time. After activation, Always follow the precautions
system as soon as possible. pre-tensioner seat belts must be about seat belts, air bags and
replaced. If the pre-tensioner seat occupant safety contained in
belt must be replaced, contact an this manual.
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3 24
Infant or small child ✽ NOTICE Larger children

All 50 states have child restraint laws. Small children are best protected Children who are too large for child
You should be aware of the specific from injury in an accident when restraint systems should always
requirements in your state. Child properly restrained in the rear seat occupy the rear seat and use the
and/or infant seats must be properly by a child restraint system that meets available lap/shoulder belts. The lap
placed and installed in the rear seat. the requirements of the Federal portion should be fastened snug on
For more information about the use of Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. the hips and as low as possible.
these restraints, refer to “Child Before buying any child restraint sys- Check if the belt fits periodically. A
restraint system” in this section. tem, make sure that it has a label cer- child's squirming could put the belt
tifying that it meets Federal Motor out of position. Children are given the
Vehicle Safety Standard 213. The most safety in the event of an acci-
WARNING restraint must be appropriate for dent when they are restrained by a
Every person in your vehicle your child's height and weight. proper restraint system in the rear
needs to be properly restrained Check the label on the child restraint seat. If a larger child (over age 12)
at all times, including infants for this information. Refer to “Child must be seated in the front seat, the
and children. Never hold a child restraint system” in this section. child should be securely restrained
in your arms or lap when riding by the available lap/shoulder belt and
in a vehicle. The violent forces the seat should be placed in the rear-
created during a crash will tear most position. Children age 12 and
the child from your arms and under should be restrained securely
throw the child against the inte- in the rear seat. NEVER place a child
rior. Always use a child restraint age 12 and under in the front seat.
appropriate for your child's NEVER place a rear facing child seat
height and weight. in the front seat of a vehicle.
3 25
If the shoulder belt portion slightly Pregnant women Injured person

touches the child’s neck or face, try The use of a seat belt is recom- A seat belt should be used when an
placing the child closer to the center of mended for pregnant women to injured person is being transported.
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still lessen the chance of injury in an When this is necessary, you should
touches their face or neck they need to accident. When a seat belt is used, consult a physician for recommenda-
be returned to a child restraint system. the lap belt portion should be placed tions.
as low and snugly as possible on the
WARNING - Small children hips, not across the abdomen. For One person per belt
specific recommendations, consult a Two people (including children)
Do not allow small children to physician.
ride in the vehicle without an should never attempt to use a single
appropriate child restraint sys- seat belt. This could increase the
tem. If the shoulder belt comes WARNING - Pregnant severity of injuries in case of an acci-
in contact with your child's neck women dent.
or face your child is too small to Pregnant women must never
ride in the vehicle. In a crash the place the lap portion of the seat Do not lie down
seat belt will inflict injury to your belt above or on the abdomen To reduce the chance of injuries in
child's neck, throat and face. where the fetus is located. The the event of an accident and to
force of the seat belt during a achieve maximum effectiveness of
collision will crush the fetus. the restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front
seats should be in an upright posi-
tion when the vehicle is moving. A
seat belt cannot provide proper pro-
tection if the person is lying down in
the rear seat or if the front seat is in
a reclined position.
3 26
Care of seat belts Periodic inspection When to replace seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be All seat belts should be inspected The entire in-use seat belt assembly
disassembled or modified. In addi- periodically for wear or damage of or assemblies should be replaced if
tion, care should be taken to assure any kind. Any damaged parts should the vehicle has been involved in an
that seat belts and belt hardware are be replaced as soon as possible. accident. This should be done even if
not damaged by seat hinges, doors no damage is visible. Additional
or other abuse. Keep belts clean and dry questions concerning seat belt oper-
Seat belts should be kept clean and ation should be directed to an
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Pinched cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
seat belt tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
Make sure that the webbing strong detergents or abrasives
and/or buckle does not get should not be used because they
caught or pinched in the rear may damage and weaken the fabric.
seat when returning the rear
seatback to its upright position.
A caught or pinched webbing/
buckle may become damaged
and could fail during a collision
or sudden stop resulting in seri-
ous injury or death.
3 27
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Children riding in the vehicle should Children could be injured or killed in
sit in the rear seat and must always a crash if their restraints are not WARNING - Hot child
be properly restrained to minimize properly secured. For small children restraint
the risk of injury in an accident, sud- and babies, a child seat or infant seat A child restraint system can
den stop or sudden maneuver. must be used. become very hot if it is left in a
According to accident statistics, chil- Before buying a particular child closed vehicle on a sunny day.
dren are safer when properly restraint system, make sure it fits your Be sure to check the seat cover,
restrained in the rear seats than in car seat, seat belts and your child. buckles and latches before
the front seat. Larger children not in Follow all the instructions provided placing a child in the restraint
a child restraint should use one of by the manufacturer when installing system.
the seat belts provided. the child restraint system.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your state. Child When the child restraint system is
and/or infant safety seats must be WARNING - Restraint not in use, store it in the luggage
properly placed and installed in the location area or fasten it with a seat belt so
rear seat.You must use a commercial- Never install a child or infant that it will not be thrown forward in
ly available child restraint system that seat on the front passenger's case of a sudden stop or an acci-
meets the requirements of the Federal seat. A child riding in the front dent.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards passenger seat can be forceful-
(FMVSS). ly struck by an inflating airbag
Child restraint systems are designed and severely injured or killed.
to be secured in vehicle seats by lap
belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH sys-
tem.
3 28
■ Rearward-facing child restraint system

WARNING - Holding WARNING - Unattended
children Children
Never hold a child in your arms Never leave children unattend-
or lap when riding in a vehicle. ed in a vehicle. The vehicle can
The violent forces created during heat up very quickly, resulting
a crash will tear the child from in serious injuries or death to
your arms and throw the child the child in the vehicle.
against the vehicle’s interior
causing serious injury or death.
CRS09
Always use a child restraint WARNING - Seat belt use ■ Forward-facing child restraint system
system which is appropriate for Do not use one seat belt for two
your child's height and weight. occupants at the same time.
This will eliminate any safety
benefit provided by the seat belt
WARNING to the occupants resulting in
Never use an infant carrier or a serious injury or death.
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback, it may not pro-
vide adequate security in an
accident. OHG031032A
Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, the
use of a child seat or infant seat is
required. This child seat or infant
seat should be of appropriate size for
the child and should be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
3 29
For safety reasons, we recommend

that the child restraint system be WARNING - Child seat
used in the rear seats. installation
Since all passenger seat belts move • Always follow the instructions
freely under normal conditions and provided by the child restraint
only lock under extreme or emer- system manufacturer. Child
gency conditions (emergency locking restraint system manufactur-
mode), you must manually change ers know their products best.
these seat belts to the automatic lock- • Failure to observe this manu-
ing mode to secure a child restraint. al's instructions regarding
If the seat belt does not operate as child restraint system and the
described in this section, have the instructions provided with the E2MS103005
system checked immediately by your child restraint system could Placing a passenger seat belt
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. result in the improper installa- into the automatic locking mode
tion of the child restraint sys-
tem which may reduce the The automatic locking mode will help
protection to your child in a prevent the normal movement of the
crash or a sudden stop. This child in the vehicle from causing the
could increase the chance seat belt to loosen and compromise
and/or severity of injury in an the child restraint system. To secure
accident. a child restraint system, use the fol-
lowing procedure.
• If the vehicle headrest pre-
vents proper installation of a
child seat (as described in the
child seat system manual), the
headrest of the respective
seating position shall be read-
justed or entirely removed.
3 30
OEN036101 OEN036102 OEN036103

To install a child restraint system on 3. Pull the shoulder portion of the 4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of
the outboard or center rear seats, do seat belt all the way out. When the the seat belt to retract and listen for
the following: shoulder portion of the seat belt is an audible “clicking” or “ratcheting”
1. Place the child restraint system on fully extended, it will shift the sound. This indicates that the retrac-
the seat and route the lap/shoulder retractor to the “Automatic Locking” tor is in the “Automatic Locking”
belt around or through the restraint, (child restraint) mode. mode. If no distinct sound is heard,
following the restraint manufactur- repeat steps 3 and 4.
er’s instructions. Be sure the seat
belt webbing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emer-
gency.
3 31
The lap/shoulder belt automatically When the seat belt is allowed to

returns to the “emergency lock mode” retract to its fully stowed position,
whenever the belt is allowed to retract the retractor will automatically
fully. switch from the “Automatic
Therefore, the preceding seven Locking” mode to the emergency
steps must be followed each time a lock mode for normal adult usage.
child restraint is installed.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
OEN036104 to retract fully.
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while WARNING - Auto locking
feeding the shoulder belt back into mode
the retractor. Set the retractor to Automatic
6. Push and pull on the child restraint Locking mode when installing
system to confirm that the seat any child restraint system. If the
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it retractor is not in the Automatic
is not, release the seat belt and Locking mode, the child restraint
repeat steps 2 through 6. can move when your vehicle
turns or stops suddenly, seri-
7. Double check that the retractor is ously injuring or killing the child.
in the “Automatic Locking” mode
by attempting to pull more of the
seat belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot, the retractor is in the
“Automatic Locking” mode.
3 32
WARNING - Tether strap

Never mount more than one
child restraint to a single tether
anchor or to a single lower
anchorage point. The increased
load caused by multiple seats
may cause the tethers or lower
anchorage points to break.
OHG031033A OHG031034A WARNING

Securing a child restraint seat 1. Route the child restraint seat teth- - Child restraint check
with “Tether Anchor” system er strap over the seatback. Check that the child restraint
Child restraint hook holders are locat- For vehicles with adjustable head- system is secure by pushing
ed on the package tray. rests, route the tether strap under and pulling it in different direc-
the headrest and between the tions. Incorrectly fitted child
headrest posts, otherwise route restraints may swing, twist, tip
the tether strap over the top of the or separate causing death or
seatback. serious injury.
For more information about the
use of the headrests, refer to
"Adjusting the height up and down
- Rear seat" in this section.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the appropriate child restraint
hook holder and tighten to secure
the seat.
3 33
WARNING
- Child restraint anchorage
Child restraint anchorages are
Lower Anchor
designed to withstand only Position Indicator
those loads imposed by cor-
rectly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat
belts or harnesses or for attach- Lower Anchor
ing other items or equipment to
the vehicle. OVI039060 OHG030035
Securing a child restraint seat Child restraint symbols are located
with child seat lower anchor sys- on the left and right rear seat backs
tem to indicate the position of the lower
Some child seat manufacturers anchors for child restraints.
make child restraint seats that are
labeled as LATCH or LATCH-com- WARNING - Unused rear
patible child restraint seats. LATCH seatbelts
stands for "Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children". These seats Always fasten the seatbelts
include two rigid or webbing mount- behind the child restraint seat
ed attachments that connect to two when they are not used to
LATCH anchors at specific seating secure the child seat. Failure to
positions in your vehicle. This type of do so may result in child stran-
child restraint seat eliminates the gulation.
need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat in the rear seats.
3 34
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s

WARNING instructions to properly install child WARNING
Do not place anything around restraint seats with LATCH or - LATCH lower anchors
the lower anchors. Also make LATCH-compatible attachments. Never attempt to attach a
sure that the seat belt is not Once you have installed the LATCH LATCH equipped seat in the
caught in the lower anchors. child restraint, assure that the seat is center seating position. LATCH
properly attached to the LATCH and lower anchors are only to be
tether anchors. used with the left and right rear
LATCH anchors have been provided outboard seating positions. You
Also, test the child restraint seat
in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors may damage the anchors or the
before you place the child in it. Tilt
are located in the left and right out- anchors may fail and break in a
the seat from side to side. Also try to
board rear seating positions. Their collision.
tug the seat forward. Check to see if
locations are shown in the illustration.
the anchors hold the seat in place.
There is no LATCH anchor provided
for the center rear seating position. ✽ NOTICE
The LATCH anchors are located WARNING The recommended weight for the
between the seatback and the seat If the child restraint is not LATCH system is under 65 lbs (30
cushion of the rear seat left and right anchored properly, the risk of a kg).
outboard seating positions. When child being seriously injured or How to calculate the child restraint
you install your child's restraint sys- killed in a collision greatly weight :
tem using the LATCH anchors, buck- increases. Child restraint weight =
le the shoulder lap belt, then lock the 65 lbs (30 kg) - Child weight
retractor and pull the belt to remove
the slack in the belt so it lies flat
against the vehicle seat.
3 35
AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side impact air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
(5) Driver’s knee air bag
WARNING - Seat belts

Even in vehicles with air bags,
you and your passengers must
always wear the safety belts pro-
vided in order to minimize the
risk and severity of injury in the
event of a collision or rollover.
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OHG030036
3 36
How does the air bag system • The front air bags will completely This speed of inflation reduces the
operate inflate and deflate in an instant. risk of serious or life-threatening
• Air bags are activated (able to It is virtually impossible for you to injuries in a severe collision and is
inflate if necessary) only when the see the air bags inflate during an thus a necessary part of air bag
ignition switch is changed to the accident. design.
ON or START position. It is much more likely that you will However, air bag inflation can also
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event simply see the deflated air bags cause injuries which can include
of a serious frontal or side collision hanging out of their storage com- facial abrasions, bruises and bro-
in order to help protect the occu- partments after the collision. ken bones because the inflation
pants from serious physical injury. • In addition to inflating in certain side speed also causes the air bags to
• There is no single speed at which collisions, vehicles equipped with a expand with a great deal of force.
the air bags will inflate. rollover sensor, side impact air bags • There are even circumstances
Generally, air bags are designed to and curtain air bags will inflate if the under which contact with the
inflate based upon the severity of a sensing system detects a rollover. steering wheel air bag can cause
collision and its direction. These When a rollover is detected, side fatal injuries, especially if the
two factors determine whether the impact air bags and curtain air bags occupant is positioned exces-
sensors produce an electronic will remain inflated longer to help sively close to the air bag.
deployment/ inflation signal. provide protection from ejection,
• Air bag deployment depends on a especially when used in conjunction
with the seat belts. WARNING - Air bag
number of factors including vehicle inflation
speed, angles of impact and the • In order to help provide protection in
a severe collision, the air bags must Sit as far back as possible from
density and stiffness of the vehi-
inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag the steering wheel while still
cles or objects which your vehicle
inflation is a consequence of the maintaining comfortable control
hits in the collision. The determin-
extremely short time in which a col- of your vehicle. A distance of at
ing factors are not limited to those
lision occurs and the need to inflate least 10" from your chest to the
mentioned above.
the air bag between the occupant steering wheel is recommended.
and the vehicle structures before Failure to do so can result in
the occupant impacts those struc- severe personal injuries or death
tures. caused by a deploying air bag.
3 37
Noise and smoke

When the air bags inflate, they make WARNING - Hot
a loud noise and they leave smoke components
and powder in the air inside of the Do not touch the air bag storage
vehicle. This is normal and is a result area's internal components
of the ignition of the air bag inflator. immediately after airbag infla-
After the air bag inflates, you may tion. The air bag related parts in
feel substantial discomfort in breath- the steering wheel, instrument
ing due to the contact of your chest panel and the roof rails above
with both the seat belt and the air the front and rear doors are
bag, as well as from breathing the very hot. Hot components can
smoke and powder. Open your result in burn injuries. 1JBH3051
doors and/or windows as soon as
Never install a child restraint in
possible after impact in order to the front passenger seat.
reduce discomfort and prevent
prolonged exposure to the smoke Never place a rear-facing child
and powder. restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it could
Though the smoke and powder are impact the rear-facing child restraint,
non-toxic, they may cause irritation causing serious or fatal injury.
to the skin (eyes, nose and throat,
etc). If this is the case, wash and In addition, do not place front-facing
rinse with cold water immediately child restraints in the front passen-
and consult a doctor if the symptom ger’s seat either. If the front passen-
persists. ger air bag inflates, it could cause
serious or fatal injuries to the child.
3 38
WARNING - Air bag

deployment
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or cur-
tain air bags, install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible.
Inflation of the side and/or cur-
tain air bags could cause seri-
ous injury or death to an infant W7-147 OHG034064N
or child.
Air bag warning indicator SRS components and func-
Air bag warning light tions
The purpose of the air bag warning The SRS consists of the following
light in your instrument panel is to components:
alert you of a potential problem with 1. Driver's front air bag module
your air bag - Supplemental 2. Passenger's front air bag module
Restraint System (SRS). 3. Side impact air bag modules
When the ignition switch is turned 4. Curtain air bag modules
ON, the warning light should illumi- 5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
nate for approximately 6 seconds,
then go off. 6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10. Rear side impact sensors
11. Driver’s knee air bag module
3 39
12. Passenger’s front air bag If any of the following conditions ■ Driver’s front air bag (1)
ON/OFF indicator (front passen- occurs, this indicates a malfunction
ger's seat only) of the SRS. Have an authorized
13. Occupant classification system HYUNDAI dealer inspect the air bag
(front passenger’s seat only) system immediately.
14. Driver’s and front passenger’s • The light does not turn on briefly
seat belt buckle sensors when you turn the ignition ON.
15. Anchor pretensioner assembly • The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
The SRSCM continually monitors all cle is in motion.
SRS components while the ignition • The light blinks continuously when OHM039102N
switch is ON to determine if a crash the ignition switch is in ON posi-
impact is severe enough to require The front air bag modules are locat-
tion. ed both in the center of the steering
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner
seat belt deployment. wheel, in the front passenger's panel
above the glove box and/or in the dri-
The SRS air bag warning light " " ver’s side knee bolster. When the
on the instrument panel will illumi- SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe
nate for about 6 seconds after the impact to the front of the vehicle, it
ignition switch is turned to the ON will automatically deploy the front air
position, after which the SRS air bag bags.
warning light " " should go out.
3 40
■ Driver’s front air bag (2) ■ Driver’s front air bag (3) ■ Passenger’s front air bag
OHM039103N OHM039104N B240B05L

Upon deployment, tear seams mold- A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
ed directly into the pad covers will tion with a properly worn seat belt, WARNING
separate under pressure from the slows the driver's or the passenger's - Air bag obstructions
expansion of the air bags. Further forward motion, reducing the risk of
opening of the covers then allows full head and chest injury. Do not install or place any
inflation of the air bags. accessories on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, or on
After complete inflation, the air bag the front passenger's panel
immediately starts deflating, enabling above the glove box in a vehicle
the driver to maintain forward visibili- Such objects may become dan-
ty and the ability to steer and operate gerous projectiles and cause
other controls. serious injury if the air bag
deploys.
3 41
✽ NOTICE Main components of occupant

Before you replace a fuse or discon- classification system
nect a battery terminal, change the • A detection device located within
ignition switch to the OFF position. the front passenger seat cushion.
Never remove or replace the air bag • Electronic system to determine
related fuse(s) when the ignition whether passenger air bag sys-
switch is in the ON position. Failure tems should be activated or deacti-
to heed this warning will cause the vated.
SRS air bag warning light to illumi- • A warning light located on the
nate. instrument panel which illuminates
the words PASSENGER AIR BAG
OHG035067N “OFF” indicating the front passen-
Occupant classification system ger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warn-
Your vehicle is equipped with an ing light is interconnected with the
occupant classification system in the occupant classification system.
front passenger's seat.
The occupant classification system
is designed to detect the presence of
a properly-seated front passenger
and determine if the passenger's
front air bag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not. The driver's front air
bag is not affected or controlled by
the occupant classification system.
3 42
If the front passenger seat is occu- You will find the PASSENGER AIR • The OCS (Occupant Classification
pied by a person that the system BAG “OFF” indicator on the center System) may not function properly
determines to be of adult size, and facia panel. if the passenger takes actions
he/she sits properly (sitting upright This system detects conditions 1~4 which can affect the classification
with the seatback in an upright posi- in the following table and activates or system. These include:
tion, centered on the seat cushion deactivates the front passenger air (1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
with their seat belt on, legs comfort- bag based on these conditions. (2) Leaning against the door or cen-
ably extended and their feet on the Always be sure that you and all vehi- ter console.
floor), the PASSENGER AIR BAG cle occupants are seated and (3) Sitting towards the sides or the
“OFF” indicator will turn off and the restrained properly (sitting upright front of the seat.
front passenger's air bag will be able with the seat in an upright position,
to inflate, if necessary, in frontal (4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
centered on the seat cushion, with resting them on other locations
crashes. the person’s legs comfortably which reduce the passenger
extended, feet on the floor, and wear- weight on the front seat.
ing the safety belt properly) for the (5) Improperly wearing the seat belt.
most effective protection by the air
bag and the seat belt. (6) Reclining the seat back.
3 43
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system WARNING - OCS system
Riding in an improper position
Indicator/Warning light Devices adversely affects the occupant
Condition detected by the "PASSENGER AIR classification system (OCS) and
occupant classification system Front passenger
BAG OFF" indicator SRS warning light
air bag may result in the deactivation of
light front passenger airbag. It is
1. Adult or child *1 Off Off Activated important for the driver to
2. Child restraint system*2 On Off Deactivated
instruct the passenger as to the
proper seating instructions as
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated contained in this manual.
4. There is a malfunction in (Continued)
Off On Activated
the system
*1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger
child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passen-
ger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on
his/her physique or posture.
*3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
3 44
(Continued)
OVQ036013N 1KMN3663 1KMN3665

- Never put a heavy load in the - Never sit with the hips shifted - Never place the feet on the
front passenger seat or seat- towards the front of the seat. dashboard.
back pocket.
OHG031073A 1KMN3662 1KMN3664

- Never sit on the front passen- - Never excessively recline the - Never lean on the door or
ger seat with anything front passenger seatback. center console.
attached such as a blanket or - Never sit on one side of the
cushion. front passenger seat.
3 45
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” ✽ NOTICE

indicator is still on, ask the passen- The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
ger to move to the rear seat. indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is
WARNING - AIR BAG changed to the ON position or after
"OFF" light the engine is started. If the front
Do not allow an adult passenger passenger seat is occupied, the occu-
to ride in the front seat when the pant classification sensor will then
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” classify the front passenger after
indicator is illuminated, several more seconds.
because the air bag will not
B990A01O
deploy in the event of a crash.
When an adult is seated in the front The driver must instruct the
passenger seat, if the PASSENGER passenger to reposition himself
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, in the seat. Failure to properly
change the ignition switch to the OFF position yourself may lead to
position and ask the passenger to sit airbag deactivation resulting in
properly (sitting upright with the seat airbag non-deployment in a col-
back in an upright position, centered lision. If the PASSENGER AIR
on the seat cushion with their seat BAG “OFF” indicator remains
belt on, legs comfortably extended illuminated after the passenger
and their feet on the floor). Restart repositions themselves proper-
the engine and have the person ly and the vehicle is restarted, it
remain in that position. This will allow is recommended the passenger
the system to detect the person and move to the rear seat because
to enable the passenger air bag. the passenger's front air bag
will not deploy.
3 46
Any child age 12 and under should If the occupant classification system ■ Driver’s front air bag
ride in the rear seat. Children too is not working properly, the SRS air
large for child restraints should use bag warning light on the instrument
the available lap/shoulder belts. No panel will illuminate because the
matter what type of crash, children of passenger's front air bag is connect-
all ages are safer when restrained in ed with the occupant classification
the rear seat. system. If there is a malfunction of
the occupant detection system, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indi-
✽ NOTICE cator will not illuminate and the pas- OHG035037
■ Driver’s knee air bag
Do not modify or replace the front senger's front air bag will inflate in
passenger seat. Do not place any- frontal impact crashes even if there is
thing on or attach anything such as no occupant in the front passenger's
a blanket, front seat covers or after seat.
market seat heater to the front pas-
senger seat. This can adversely
affect the occupant classification
system.
OHG035038
■ Passenger’s front air bag
OHG030039
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag
3 47
Your vehicle is equipped with an The seat belt buckle sensors deter- Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
Advanced Supplemental Restraint mine if the driver and front passen- with an occupant classification sys-
(Air Bag) System (SRS) and the ger's seat belts are fastened. tem in the front passenger's seat.
lap/shoulder belts at both the driver The occupant classification system
and passenger seating positions. detects the presence of a passenger
The indications of the system's pres- These sensors provide the ability to in the front passenger's seat and will
ence are the letters "AIR BAG" control the SRS deployment based on turn off the front passenger's air bag
embossed on the air bag pad cover whether or not the seat belts are fas- under certain conditions. For more
in the steering wheel and/or on the tened, and how severe the impact is. detail, see "Occupant classification
cover of the driver's side knee bolster system" in this section.
located below the steering wheel and The advanced SRS offers the ability
the passenger's side front panel pad to control the air bag inflation within
above the glove box. two levels. A first stage level is pro- WARNING
vided for moderate-severity impacts. • Do not place any objects
The SRS consists of air bags A second stage level is provided for underneath the front seats as
installed under the pad covers in the more severe impacts. they could interfere with the
center of the steering wheel, in the occupant classification sys-
knee bolster below the steering tem.
According to the impact severity and • Do not place or charge an
wheel column and the passenger's
seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS electronic device such as a
side front panel above the glove box.
Control Module) controls the air bag laptop computer on the front
The purpose of the SRS is to provide inflation. Failure to properly wear
the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger seat. Its electronic
seat belts can increase the risk or field may cause the OCS to
passenger with additional protection severity of injury in an accident.
than that offered by the seat belt sys- switch to the "on" condition
tem alone in case of a frontal impact and thus allow the passenger
of sufficient severity. The SRS uses air bag to deploy needlessly
sensors to gather information about in a collision, increasing your
the driver's and front passenger's repair costs.
seat belt usage and impact severity.
3 48
Manufacturers are required by gov- Advanced air bags are combined with Front air bags are not intended to
ernment regulations to provide a pre-tensioner seat belts to help pro- deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or
contact point concerning modifica- vide enhanced occupant protection in rollover crashes. In addition, front air
tions to the vehicle for persons with frontal crashes. Front air bags are not bags will not deploy in frontal crash-
disabilities, which modifications may intended to deploy in collisions in es below the deployment threshold.
affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag which sufficient protection can be pro-
system. That contact is HYUNDAI vided by the pre-tensioner seat belt.
Customer Assistance center at 1-
800-633-5151. However, HYUNDAI WARNING - SRS Wiring
does not endorse nor will it support
any changes to any part or structure Do not tamper with or discon-
of the vehicle that could affect the nect SRS wiring or other com-
advanced air bag system, including ponents of the SRS system.
the occupant classification system. Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment of
the air bags or by rendering the
WARNING - Replacement/ SRS inoperative.
Modifications
The front passenger seat, dash-
board or door should not be ✽ NOTICE
replaced except by an author- Air bags can only be used once -
ized HYUNDAI dealer using orig- have an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
inal HYUNDAI parts designed er replace the air bag immediately
for this vehicle and model. Any after deployment.
other such replacement or mod-
ification could adversely affect
the operation of the occupant
classification system and your
advanced air bags.
3 49
■ Rear impact ■ Front Your vehicle is equipped with a side

impact air bag in each front and out-
board rear seat. The purpose of the
air bag is to provide occupants with
additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt alone.
The side impact air bags are
designed to deploy only during cer-
OBH038058N OHG030040
tain side-impact collisions, depend-
■ Side impact ■ Rear ing on the crash severity, angle,
speed and point of impact. The side
air bags are not designed to deploy
in all side impact situations or in all
rollover situations. Side impact
airbags are deployed if the rollover or
the possible rollover event is detect-
ed by ACU (Airbag Control Unit).
1JBA3514 OHG030041
■ Rollover WARNING - Unexpected
deployment
Avoid impact to the side impact
airbag sensor when the ignition
switch is ON to prevent unex-
pected deployment of the side
impact air bag.
OBH038062 OHG030042
Side impact air bag
3 50
Side impact air bags are supplemen- If seat or seat cover is damaged, have
tal to the seat belt systems and are the vehicle checked and repaired by
not a substitute for them. Therefore an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
your seat belts must be worn at all
times while the vehicle is in operation. WARNING - Flying
For best protection from the side air objects
bag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side air bag, Do not place any objects (an
all seat occupants should sit in an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
upright position with the seat belt door and seat. Such objects
properly fastened. may become dangerous projec- OHG030043
tiles if the side airbag inflates,
The driver's hands should be placed which may result in serious
on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and injuries to the occupants.
3:00 positions. The passenger's
arms and hands should be placed on
their laps.
WARNING
WARNING - Deployment Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
Do not install any accessories
bag and yourself. Also, do not
including seat covers, on the
attach any objects around the OHG030044
side or near the side impact air
area the air bag inflates such as
bag as this may affect the Curtain air bag
the door, side door glass, front
deployment of the side air bags. Curtain air bags are located along
and rear pillar.
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
3 51
They are designed to help protect the ✽ NOTICE

heads of the front seat occupants WARNING Never try to open or repair any com-
and the rear outboard seat occupants Do not allow the passengers to ponents of the side curtain air bag
in certain side impact collisions. lean their heads or bodies onto system. This should only be done by
The curtain air bags are designed to doors, put their arms on the an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
deploy only during certain side doors, stretch their arms out of
impact collisions, depending on the the window, or place objects
crash severity, angle, speed and between the doors and passen- WARNING
impact. The curtain air bags are not gers when they are seated on • Do not hang other objects
designed to deploy in all side impact seats equipped with side such as hangers or hard
situations or in all rollover situations. impact and/or curtain air bags. objects except clothes. Also,
Curtain airbags are deployed if the Failure to follow this instruction do not put heavy, sharp or
rollover or the possible rollover event could result in injury or death to breakable objects in the
is detected by ACU (Airbag Control vehicle occupants in a crash. clothes pockets. In an acci-
Unit). dent or when the curtain air
bag is inflated, it may cause
vehicle damage or personal
injury.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag. Also do not attach
any objects around the area
the air bag inflates such as
the door, side door glass,
front and rear pillar, roof side
rail.
• Do not hang hard or breakable
objects on the clothes hanger.
3 52
Why didn't my air bag go off in

a collision? (Inflation and non-
inflation conditions of the air
bag)
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.
OHG035045N/OHG031046A/OHG035047N/OHG035075/OHG030049/OHG035075N
Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module/ (4) Side impact sensor (rear)
Rollover sensor (5) Side impact sensor-Pressure
(2) Front impact sensor (front)
(3) Side impact sensor (front)
3 53
• Problems may arise if the sensor

WARNING - Air bag installation angles are changed
sensors due to the deformation of the front
• Do not hit or allow any objects bumper, body or B/C pillars or front
to impact the locations where door where side collision sensors
air bags or sensors are are installed. Have the vehicle
installed. checked and repaired by an
This may cause unexpected authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
air bag deployment, which • Installing aftermarket bumper
could result in serious per- guards or replacing a bumper with
sonal injury or death. non-genuine parts may adversely
• If the installation location or affect your vehicle’s collision and OBH038053
angle of the sensors is altered air bag deployment performance. Air bag inflation conditions
in any way, the air bags may Front air bags
deploy when they should not Front air bags are designed to inflate
or they may not deploy when in a frontal collision depending on
they should, causing severe the force, speed and angles of
injury or death. impact of the front collision.
Therefore, do not try to per-
form maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
3 54
Although the front air bags (driver’s

and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate in frontal colli-
sions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient frontal
force in another type of impact. Side
and curtain air bags are designed to
inflate only in side impact collisions
or rollover situations, but they may
1JBA3514 inflate in other collisions if the side
impact sensors detect a sufficient OBH038057
impact.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved • In certain low-speed collisions the
roads or sidewalks, air bags may air bags may not deploy. The air
deploy. Drive carefully on unim- bags are designed not to deploy in
proved roads or on surfaces not such cases because they may not
designed for vehicle traffic to prevent provide benefits beyond the pro-
unintended air bag deployment. tection of the seat belts in such col-
lisions.
OHG030050
Side impact and curtain air bags
Side impact and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the force, speed and
angles of impact resulting from a
side impact collision.
3 55
OBH038058 1JBA3516 OBH038060

• Air bags are not designed to inflate • Front air bags may not inflate in • In an angled collision, the force of
in rear collisions. Because occu- side impact collisions. Occupants impact may direct the occupants in
pants are moved backward by the typically move to the direction of a direction where the air bags would
force of the impact. In this case, the collision and frontal air bag not be able to provide any addition-
inflated air bags would not provide deployment would not provide al benefit, and thus the system may
additional benefits. additional occupant protection in not deploy the air bags.
side impacts.
However, side impact and curtain
air bags may inflate depending on
the force, vehicle speed and
angles of impact.
3 56
OBH038061 OBH038062 1JBA3518

• Just before impact, drivers often • They are deployed if the rollover or • Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-
brake heavily. Such heavy braking the possible rollover event is cle collides with objects such as
lowers the front portion of the vehi- detected by ACU (Airbag Control utility poles or trees, where the
cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi- Unit). They are not designed to be point of impact is concentrated to
cle with a higher ground clearance. deployed in all rollover situations. one area and the deceleration
Air bags may not inflate in this forces are significantly reduced.
"under-ride" situation because
deceleration forces that are detect-
ed by sensors may be significantly
reduced by such “under-ride” colli-
sions.
3 57
SRS Care ✽ NOTICE

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
WARNING • If the air bags inflate, they must
and so there are no parts you can • Modification to SRS compo- be replaced by an authorized
safely service by yourself. If the SRS nents or wiring, including the HYUNDAI dealer.
air bag warning light ( ) does not illu- addition of any kind of badges • If your vehicle was flooded and
minate when you turn the ignition ON, to the pad covers or modifica- has soaked carpeting or water on
or if it continuously remains on, have tions to the body structure, can the flooring, you should not try to
your vehicle immediately inspected by adversely affect SRS perform- start the engine; have the vehicle
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. ance and lead to possible injury. towed to an authorized
• No objects (such as crash pad HYUNDAI dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such cover, cellular phone holder,
as removing, installing, repairing, or cup holder, perfume or stick-
ers) should be placed over or WARNING - Tampering
any work on the steering wheel, the with SRS
front passenger's panel, front seats near the air bag modules on
and roof rails must be performed by the steering wheel, instrument Do not tamper with or discon-
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. panel, windshield glass, and nect SRS wiring, or other com-
Improper handling of the SRS system the front passenger's panel ponents of the SRS system.
may result in serious personal injury. above the glove box. Such Doing so could result in the
objects could cause harm if accidental inflation of the air
the vehicle is in a crash bags or render the SRS inoper-
For cleaning the air bag pad covers, severe enough to cause the ative and lead to possible seri-
use only a soft, dry cloth or one which air bags to deploy. ous injury.
has been moistened with plain water.
Solvents or cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
3 58
If components of the air bag system • Do not use any accessories on • Do not modify the front seats.
must be discarded, or if the vehicle seat belts. Devices claiming to Modification of the front seats
must be scrapped, certain safety improve occupant comfort or repo- could interfere with the operation of
precautions must be observed. An sition the seat belt can reduce the the supplemental restraint system
authorized HYUNDAI dealer knows protection provided by the seat belt sensing components or side air
these precautions and can give you and increase the chance of serious bags.
the necessary information. Failure to injury in a crash. • Do not place items under the
follow these precautions and proce- • Passengers should not place front seats. Placing items under
dures could increase the risk of per- hard or sharp objects between the front seats could interfere with
sonal injury. themselves and the air bags. the operation of the supplemental
Carrying hard or sharp objects on restraint system sensing compo-
Additional safety precautions your lap or in your mouth can result nents and wiring harnesses.
• All occupants should sit upright, in injuries if an air bag inflates. • Never hold an infant or child on
fully back in their seats with their • Keep occupants away from the your lap. The infant or child could
seat belts on and their feet on the air bag covers. All occupants be seriously injured or killed in the
floor. should sit upright, fully back in their event of a crash. All infants and
• Passengers should not move seats with their seat belts on and children should be properly
out of or change seats while the their feet on the floor. If occupants restrained in appropriate child
vehicle is moving. A passenger are too close to the air bag covers, safety seats or seat belts in the
who is not wearing a seat belt dur- they could be injured if the air bags rear seat.
ing a crash or emergency stop can inflate.
be thrown against the inside of the • Do not attach or place objects
vehicle, against other occupants, on or near the air bag covers.
or out of the vehicle. Any object attached to or placed
• Each seat belt is designed to on the front or side air bag covers
restrain one occupant. If more could interfere with the proper
than one person uses the same operation of the air bags.
seat belt, they could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
3 59
Adding equipment to or modi- ■ Front ■ Side (front)

fying your air bag-equipped
vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by chang-
ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys-
tem, front end or side sheet metal or
ride height, this may affect the oper-
ation of your vehicle's air bag sys-
tem.
OHG031051A OHG030052
■ Side (rear)
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels, some
required by the U.S. National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), are attached to alert the
driver and passengers of potential
risks of the air bag system.
OHG030053
3 60
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 • Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 • Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
• Smart key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 • Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
• Remote keyless entry system operations. . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 • Side view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 • Reverse parking aid function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 • Instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 • Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 • LCD display control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 4
• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-15 LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-16 • LCD modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
• Door lock/unlock features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 • Trip computer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
• Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Warnings and indicators (lnstrument cluster) . . 4-77
Smart trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Hazard warning flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 • Headlight (Headlamp) escort function . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 • Headlight (Headlamp) welcome function . . . . . . . . 4-101
• Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
• High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103 Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
• Smart High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104 • Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105 • Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106 • Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Windshield wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107 • Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109 • Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110 • Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
• Trunk room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110 • Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
• Door courtesy lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111 • Rear curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111 • Side curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111 Multimedia system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112 • Steering wheel audio control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
Automatic climate control system (Type A). . . . 4-113 • Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Automatic climate control system (Type B). . . . 4-124
• Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-136 • Aux, USB and iPod® port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
KEYS
Record your key number Key operations
The key code number • Used to start the engine.
is stamped or printed • Used to lock and unlock the doors.
on the key code tag • Used to lock and unlock the glove
attached to the key box.
set. Should you lose your keys, con-
tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Remove the key code tag and store it WARNING - Aftermarket
in a safe place. Also, record the key keys
code number and keep it in a safe Use only HYUNDAI original
and handy place, but not in the vehi- parts for the ignition key in your
cle. vehicle. If an aftermarket key is OHG045004
used, the ignition switch may
not return to ON after START. If To remove the mechanical key, press
WARNING - Smart key this happens, the starter will and hold the release button(1) and
Leaving children unattended in a continue to operate causing remove the mechanical key(2).
vehicle with the smart key is dan- possible fire due to excessive To reinstall the mechanical key, put
gerous even if the ENGINE current in the wiring. the key into the hole and push it until
START/STOP button is in the a click sound is heard.
ACC or ON position. Children
copy adults and they could press
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
The smart key would enable chil-
dren to operate power windows
or other controls, or even make
the vehicle move, which could
result in serious bodily injury or
even death. Never leave the keys
in your vehicle with unsuper-
vised children, when the Engine
is running.
4 3
When leaving your keys with a park- Immobilizer system

ing lot attendant or valet, perform Your vehicle is equipped with an
above steps 1 to 4, remove the electronic engine immobilizer system
mechanical key from the smart key to reduce the risk of unauthorized
and leave the smart key with the vehicle use.
attendant. In this manner the smart
key can only be used to start the
engine and operate door locks. Whenever the ENGINE START/STOP
button is changed to the ON position,
the immobilizer system checks and
Lock release verifies if the key is valid or not.
To release the trunk lock feature, If the key is valid, the engine will start.
OHG040005 open the glove box with the mechan- If the key is invalid, the engine will
Restrictions in handling keys ical key and set the trunk lid control not start.
To activate the trunk lock system so button to the ON position (pressed).
that the trunk can only be opened In this position the trunk will open
with the mechanical key, perform the with the trunk lid button or smart key.
following:
1. Press and hold the release button
and remove the mechanical key.
2. Unlock the glove box by using the
mechanical key then open it.
3. Set the trunk lid control button to
the OFF position (unpressed).
4. Close and lock the glove box using
the mechanical key.
4 4
To deactivate the immobilizer This device complies with Part 15

system CAUTION of the FCC rules.
Change the ENGINE START/STOP Do not put metal accessories Operation is subject to the following
button to the ON position. near the smart key. two conditions:
The engine may not start because 1. This device may not cause harm-
To activate the immobilizer system the metal accessories may inter- ful interference, and
Change the ENGINE START/STOP rupt the transponder signal from 2. This device must accept any inter-
button to the OFF position. The immo- transmitting normally. ference received, including inter-
bilizer system activates automatically. ference that may cause undesired
Without a valid smart key for your If you need additional keys or lose operation.
vehicle, the engine will not start. your keys, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. CAUTION
✽ NOTICE Changes or modifications not
Your immobilizer password is a cus- expressly approved by the party
tomer unique password and should CAUTION - Immobilizer
damage responsible for compliance
be kept confidential. Do not leave this could void the user's authority
number anywhere in your vehicle. Do not expose your immobilizer
system to moisture, static elec- to operate the equipment.
tricity and rough handling. This
CAUTION may damage your immobilizer.
Keep each key separate in order
to avoid a starting malfunction.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction.
4 5
SMART KEY
You can activate or deactivate the
Lock Sound (chime sound) function
in the vehicle. Refer to "User Settings
Mode" in this section.
✽ NOTICE
• The switch will only operate when
the smart key is within 28~40 in.
(0.7~1 m) from the outside door
handle.
• Even though you press the outside
OHG045007 OHG041011A door handle switch, the doors will
Smart key functions Using the door and trunk handle not lock and the chime will sound
switch for 3 seconds if any of following
1. Door lock occur:
2. Door unlock Locking
1. Carry the smart key.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
3. Trunk open - The ENGINE START/STOP
4. Alarm 2. Close all doors, engine hood and button is in ACC or ON position.
trunk. - Any door except the trunk is
With a smart key, you can lock or 3. Press the switch of the outside open.
unlock a door (and trunk) and even door handle.
start the engine without inserting the 4. All doors and trunk will lock. The
key. Refer to the following, for more hazard warning lights will blink and
details. the chime will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked
by checking the door lock button
inside the vehicle or pulling the
outside door handle.
4 6
Unlocking ✽ NOTICE Trunk open

1. Press the switch of the driver's • The switch will only operate when 1. Carry the smart key.
outside door handle. the smart key is within 28~40 in. 2. Press the trunk handle switch.
2. The driver’s door will unlock. The (0.7~1 m) from the outside door 3. The trunk will open.
hazard warning lights will blink handle.
and the chime will sound twice. • When the smart key is recognized ✽ NOTICE
3. Press the button once more within in the area of 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.)
from the front outside door han- • Once the trunk is opened and then
4 seconds. closed, the trunk will lock auto-
4. All doors and trunk will unlock and dle, other people can also open the
door without possession of the matically when all doors are
the hazard warning lights will blink locked.
and the chime will sound twice. smart key.
• After unlocking all doors, the • The switch will only operate when
doors will lock automatically the smart key is within 28 in.
You can activate or deactivate the unless a door is opened. (0.7 m) from the trunk handle.
Two Turn Unlock and Unlock Sound
(chime sound) function in the vehi- Start-up
cle. Refer to "User Settings Mode" in You can start the engine without
this section. inserting the key. For detailed infor-
mation refer to "ENGINE START/
STOP button" in section 5.
4 7
If any door, trunk or engine hood ✽ NOTICE

remains open, the hazard warning • The button will only operate when
lights will not operate. If all doors, the smart key is within 28~40 in.
trunk and engine hood are closed (0.7~1 m) from the outside door
after the lock button is pressed, the handle.
hazard warning lights will blink once. • After unlocking the driver’s door
or all doors, the door(s) will lock
You can activate or deactivate the automatically unless a door is
Lock Sound (chime sound) function in opened.
the vehicle. Refer to "User Settings
Mode" in this section. Trunk open (3)
OHG045007 1.Press the trunk open button(3) for
Remote keyless entry system Unlock (2) more than 1 second.
operations 1. Press the unlock button(2). 2.The trunk will open. The hazard
Lock (1) 2. The driver’s door will unlock. The warning light will blink twice to indi-
hazard warning lights will blink and cate the trunk is opened.
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors, engine hood and the chime will sound twice.
trunk. 3. Press the unlock button(2) once ✽ NOTICE
3. Press the lock button(1). more within 4 seconds. • Once the trunk is opened and
4. All doors and trunk will lock. The 4. All doors and trunk will unlock. The closed, the trunk will lock automat-
hazard warning lights will blink and hazard warning lights will blink and ically when all doors are locked.
the chime will sound once. the chime will sound twice. • The switch/button will only oper-
ate when the smart key is within
5. Make sure that doors are locked by 28~40 in. (0.7~1m) from the trunk
checking the door lock button inside You can activate or deactivate the Two handle.
or pulling the outside door handle. Turn Unlock and Unlock Sound (chime
sound) function in the vehicle. Refer to
"User Settings Mode" in this section.
4 8
Alarm (4) Smart key precautions • If the smart key is in close proximity
1. Press the alarm button(4) for more • If you lose your smart key, you will to your cell phone or smart phone,
than 1 second. not be able to start the engine. Tow the signal from the smart key could
2. The horn sounds and hazard the vehicle, if necessary, and con- be blocked by normal operation of
warning light flashes for about 30 tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. your cell phone or smart phone.
seconds. • A maximum of 2 smart keys can be This is especially important when
To stop the horn and lights, press registered to a single vehicle. If you the phone is active such as making
any button on the smart key. lose a smart key, you should imme- call, receiving calls, text messaging,
diately take the vehicle and the and/or sending/receiving emails.
second key to your authorized Avoid placing the smart key and your
HYUNDAI dealer to protect it from cell phone or smart phone in the
potential theft. same pants or jacket pocket and
maintain adequate distance between
• The smart key will not work if any the two devices.
of following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta- CAUTION - Smart key
tion or an airport which can inter- Keep the smart key away from
fere with normal operation of the water or any liquid and fire. If
smart key. the inside of the smart key gets
- The smart key is near a mobile damp (due to drinks or mois-
two-way radio system or a cellular ture), or is heated, internal cir-
phone. cuit may malfunction, excluding
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being the car from the warranty.
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you have
a problem with the smart key, con-
tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
4 9
This device complies with Part 15 Battery replacement

of the FCC rules. A smart key battery should last for
Operation is subject to the following several years, but if the smart key is
two conditions: not working properly, try replacing
1. This device may not cause harm- the battery with a new one. If you are
ful interference, and unsure how to use your smart key or
2. This device must accept any inter- replace the battery, contact an
ference received, including inter- authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
OHG045535N
CAUTION
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
Changes or modifications not
gently pry open the cover.
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment. If the
keyless entry system is inopera-
tive due to changes or modifica-
tions not expressly approved by
the party responsible for com-
pliance, it will not be covered by
your manufacturer’s vehicle
warranty.
4 10
Front Cover • The smart key is designed to give

you years of trouble-free use, how-
ever it can malfunction if exposed
to moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use or
replace the battery, contact an
Battery authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the smart key to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• If you suspect that your smart key
Rear Cover OHG040009 might have sustained some dam-
2. Remove the old battery and insert age, or you feel your smart key is
a new battery (CR2032). Make not working correctly, contact an
sure the battery position is correct. authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3. Reinstall the rear cover of the • An inappropriately disposed bat-
smart key. tery can be harmful to the environ-
ment and human health. Dispose
the battery according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
CAUTION - Smart key

damage
Do not drop, get wet or expose
the smart key to heat or sun-
light, or it will be damaged.
4 11
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Armed stage • Lock the doors by pressing the
Park the vehicle and stop the engine. lock button on the smart key or
Arm the system as described below. with the mechanical key.
Armed
stage 1.Turn off the engine. After completion of the steps
2.Make sure that all doors, the above, the hazard warning lights
engine hood and trunk lid are will operate once to indicate that
closed and latched. the system is armed.
Disarmed Theft-alarm 3.• Lock the doors by pressing the If any door, trunk lid or engine
stage stage switch of the front outside door hood remains opened, the hazard
handle with the smart key in your warning lights will not operate
possession. and theft-alarm will not arm. After
the doors, trunk lid and engine
After completion of the steps hood are closed, the hazard
This system is designed to provide above, the hazard warning lights
protection from unauthorized entry warning lights will blink once.
operate once to indicate that the
into the car. This system is operated system is armed.
in three stages: the first is the If any door remains opened, the
"Armed" stage, the second is the doors will not lock and the chime
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is will sound for 3 seconds. Close the
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, door and try again to lock the
the system provides an audible doors.
alarm with blinking of the hazard
warning lights. If trunk lid or engine hood remains
opened, the hazard warning lights
will not operate and theft-alarm
will not arm. After the trunk lid and
engine hood are closed, the haz-
ard warning lights will blink once.
4 12
Do not arm the system until all Theft-alarm stage Opening the trunk with the
passengers have left the vehicle. If The alarm will be activated if any of alarm armed (if equipped)
the system is armed while a pas- the following occurs while the system When the alarm is armed, the alarm
senger(s) remains in the vehicle, is armed. will not sound if the trunk lid is
the alarm may be activated when • A door is opened without using the opened with the smart key.
the remaining passenger(s) leave smart key. Once the trunk is opened and then
the vehicle. If any door, trunk lid or closed, the trunk will be locked auto-
engine hood is opened within 30 • A door is opened without using the
mechanical key. matically and the system will be
seconds after entering the armed armed again.
stage, the system is disarmed to • The trunk is opened without using
prevent unnecessary alarm. the smart key. Also, if any of the doors or hood is
• The engine hood is opened. opened while the trunk lid is opened
The horn will sound and the hazard and the alarm armed, the alarm will
warning lights will blink continuously sound.
for approximately 30 seconds. To
turn off the system, unlock the doors
with the smart key.
4 13
Disarmed stage • Avoid trying to start the engine

The system will be disarmed when: while the alarm is activated. The
- The door unlock button is pressed vehicle starter motor is disabled
on the smart key. during the theft-alarm stage.
- The switch of the front outside door • If you lose your keys, consult your
is pressed while carrying the smart authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
key.
- The door is opened with the CAUTION - Theft-alarm
mechanical key. system alteration
- The engine is started. (within 3 Do not change, alter or adjust
seconds). the theft-alarm system because
it could cause the theft-alarm
After the doors are unlocked, the system to malfunction and
hazard warning lights will blink twice should only be serviced by an
to indicate that the system is dis- authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
armed. Malfunctions caused by improp-
After pressing the unlock button, if er alterations, adjustments or
any door (or trunk) is not opened modifications to the theft-alarm
within 30 seconds, the system will be system are not covered by your
rearmed. vehicle manufacturer warranty.
4 14
DOOR LOCKS
✽ NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door
locks and door mechanisms may
U n l o ck not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
L o ck multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
OHG041011A OHG045012N damage to system components.
Operating door locks from With the mechanical key
outside the vehicle • Turn the key toward the rear of the
With the smart key vehicle to unlock and toward the
• Doors can be locked and unlocked front of the vehicle to lock.
pressing the switch of the outside • If you lock the driver’s door with a
door handle with the smart key in key, all doors will lock.
your possession. • From the driver’s door, turn the key
• Doors can be locked and unlocked to the right once to unlock the dri-
by pressing the button on the ver’s door and once more within 4
smart key. seconds to unlock all doors.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they • Once the door is unlocked, it may
may be opened by pulling the door be opened by pulling the door han-
handle. dle.
• When closing the door, push the • When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that door by hand. Make sure that
doors are closed securely. doors are closed securely.
4 15
• If the inner door handle of the dri- If a power door lock fails to function
ver’s or front passenger’s door is while you are in the vehicle, try one
pulled when the door lock button is or more of the following:
in the lock position, the door unlocks • Operate the door unlock feature
Lock and opens. repeatedly (both electronic and man-
• A door cannot be locked if the ual) while simultaneously pulling on
smart key is in the vehicle and a the door handle.
Unlock door is opened. • Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from outside.
OHG040013
Operating door locks from

inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button(1) to the “Unlock” posi-
tion. The red mark(2) on the door
lock button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button(1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark(2) on the door lock button will
not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door han-
dle(3) outward.
4 16
■ Driver’s door • When you press the front portion(1)

of the switch, all vehicle doors will WARNING - Doors
lock. The doors should always be
• When you press the rear portion(2) fully closed and locked while
of the switch, all vehicle doors will the vehicle is in motion to pre-
unlock. vent accidental opening of the
• If the smart key is in the vehicle and door. Opening a door when the
a door is opened, the doors will not vehicle is moving could cause
lock even though the front portion(1) serious harm to occupants or
of central door lock switch is pressed. someone outside the vehicle.
OHG040014
■ Front passenger’s door
✽ NOTICE
Once the doors are locked with the
WARNING
smart key, the doors cannot be - Unattended children/
unlocked with the central door animals
lock/unlock switch. Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle. An
enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended
OHG040015 children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle.
With central door lock switch
Operate by pressing the central door
lock switch.
4 17
Door lock/unlock features 3. Close the rear door.

Impact sensing door unlock sys- To open the rear door, pull the out-
tem side door handle (2).
All doors will automatically unlock Even though the doors may be
when an impact causes the air bags unlocked, the rear door will not open
to deploy. by pulling the inner door handle until
the rear door child safety lock is
Shift lever door lock/unlock system unlocked.
• All doors will automatically lock
when the shift lever is moved out of WARNING - Rear door
P (Park). OHG042017
locks
• All doors will automatically unlock Use the rear door safety locks
when the shift lever is moved into P Child-protector rear door lock whenever children are in the
(Park). The child safety lock is provided to vehicle. If a child accidently
help prevent children from acciden- opens the rear doors while the
You can activate or deactivate the tally opening the rear doors from vehicle is motion, they can fall
Auto Door Lock/Unlock features in inside the vehicle. The rear door out resulting in severe injury or
the vehicle. Refer to "User Settings safety locks should be used whenev- death.
Mode" in this section. er children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into
the hole (1) and turn it to the lock
( ) position. When the child
safety lock is in the lock position,
the rear door will not open even
though the inner door handle is
pulled.
4 18
TRUNK
■ Type A The trunk swings upward. Make sure
no objects or people are near the
rear of the vehicle when opening the
trunk.
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, trunk lock
and trunk mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing condi-
OHG041018A tions.
■ Type B
OHG045016
Opening the trunk CAUTION - Trunk lift

cylinders
• Press the trunk unlock button for
Make certain that you close the
more than 1 second on the smart
trunk before driving your vehi-
key.
cle. Possible damage may occur
• Press the switch on the trunk han- to the trunk lift cylinders and
dle with the smart key in your pos- attached hardware if the trunk is
session (2). not closed prior to driving.
• Insert the mechanical key of the
OHG046550N
smart key into the lock and turn it
clockwise (1). To open the trunk from inside the
vehicle :
- Type A : Pull out the trunk lid
release lever.
- Type B : Push the trunk lid release
button.
4 19
Closing the trunk

To close, lower the trunk lid, then press WARNING
down on it until it locks. To be sure the • No person should be allowed
trunk lid is securely fastened, always to occupy the trunk of the
check by trying to pull it up again. vehicle at any time. If the
Once the trunk is opened and then trunk is partially or totally
closed, the trunk locks automatically. latched and the person is
unable to get out, severe
injury or death could occur
WARNING - Exhaust due to lack of ventilation,
fumes exhaust fumes and rapid heat
The trunk lid should be always OHG040019 build-up, or because of expo-
kept completely closed while sure to cold or hot weather
Emergency trunk safety conditions. The trunk is also a
the vehicle is in motion. If it is release
left open or ajar, toxic exhaust highly dangerous location in
gases may enter the vehicle and Your vehicle is equipped with an the event of a crash because it
serious illness or death may emergency trunk release cable locat- is not a protected occupant
result. ed inside the trunk. If someone is space and is a part of the
inadvertently locked in the trunk, vehicle’s crush zone.
moving the handle in the direction of • Your vehicle should be kept
the arrow will release the trunk latch locked and keys be kept out of
✽ NOTICE mechanism and open the trunk. the reach of children. Parents
If the trunk is closed with the smart should teach their children
key in it, the chime will sound for about the potential dangers of
approximately 3 seconds and the playing in trunks.
trunk will not lock.
4 20
SMART TRUNK (IF EQUIPPED)

How to use the Smart Trunk
The trunk can be opened with no-
touch activation satisfying all the
conditions below.
• After 15 seconds when all doors
are closed and locked
• Positioned in the detecting area for
more than 3 seconds.
✽ NOTICE
OHG045532N
• The Smart Trunk does not operate OHG045526N
when:
On a vehicle equipped with a smart - The smart key is detected within 1. Setting
key, the trunk can be opened with 15 seconds after the doors are To activate the Smart Trunk, go to
no-touch activation using the Smart closed and locked, and is contin- User Settings Mode and select
Trunk system. uously detected. Smart Trunk on the LCD display.
- The smart key is detected within For more details, refer to "LCD
15 seconds after the doors are Display" in this chapter.
closed and locked, and 60 in.
(1.5 m) from the front door han-
dles. (for vehicles equipped with
Welcome Light)
- A door is not locked or closed.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
4 21
✽ NOTICE
Do not approach the detecting area
if you do not want the trunk to open.
If you have unintentionally entered
the detecting area and the hazard
warning lights and chime starts to
operate, leave the detecting area
with the smart key. The trunk will
stay closed.
OHG045505 OHG045506
2. Detect and Alert 3. Automatic opening
If you are positioned in the detecting The hazard warning lights will blink
area (20 ~ 40 in. (50 ~100 cm) and chime will sound 2 times and
behind the vehicle) carrying a smart then the trunk will slowly open.
key, the hazard warning lights will
blink and chime will sound for about
3 seconds to alert you the smart key
has been detected and the trunk will
open.
4 22
✽ NOTICE
WARNING • If you press the door unlock but-
• Make sure the trunk is closed ton (2), the Smart Trunk function
before driving the vehicle. will be deactivated temporarily.
• Make sure there are no people But, if you do not open any door
or objects around the trunk for 30 seconds, the smart trunk
before opening or closing the function will be activated again.
trunk. • If you press the trunk open button
• Make sure objects in the trunk (3) for more than 1 second, the
do not come out when open- trunk opens.
ing the trunk on a slope. It • If you press the door lock button
may cause serious injury. OHG045007 (1) or trunk open button (3) when
• Make sure to deactivate the How to deactivate the Smart the Smart Trunk function is not in
Smart Trunk when washing Trunk function using the smart the Detect and Alert stage, the
your vehicle. Otherwise, the key smart trunk function will not be
trunk may open inadvertently. deactivated.
1. Door lock • In case you have deactivated the
• The key should be kept out of
reach of children. Children 2. Door unlock Smart Trunk function by pressing
may inadvertently open the 3. Trunk open the smart key button and opened a
Smart Trunk while playing 4. Alarm door, the smart trunk function can
around the rear area of the be activated again by closing and
vehicle. locking all doors.
If you press any button of the smart
key during the Detect and Alert
stage, the Smart Trunk function will
be deactivated.
Make sure to be aware of how to
deactivate the Smart Trunk function
for emergency situations.
4 23
✽ NOTICE
• The Smart Trunk function will not
work if any of the following
occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellu-
OHG045507 lar phone.
Detecting area - Another vehicle's smart key is
• The Smart Trunk operates with a
being operated close to your
welcome alert if the smart key is
vehicle.
detected within 20 ~ 40 in. (50 ~
• The detecting range may decrease
100 cm) from the trunk.
or increase when :
- One side of the tire is raised to
• The alert stops at once if the smart replace a tire or to inspect the
key is positioned outside the vehicle.
detecting area during the Detect - The vehicle is slantingly parked
and Alert stage. on a slope or unpaved road, etc.
4 24
WINDOWS
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
up/down
(7) Power window lock switch
OHG040020
4 25
Power windows ✽ NOTICE

The ignition switch must be in the ON While driving with the rear windows
position for power windows to operate. down or with the sunroof (if
Each door has a power window equipped) in an open (or partially
switch that controls the door's win- open position), your vehicle may
dow. The driver’s door has a master demonstrate a wind buffeting or
power window switch that controls all pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-
the windows in the vehicle. Also, the mal occurrence and can be reduced
driver has a power window lock or eliminated by taking the follow-
switch which can block the operation ing actions. If the noise occurs with
of passenger windows. one or both of the rear windows
The power windows can be operated down, partially lower both front OHG040021
for approximately 30 seconds after windows approximately one inch. Window opening and closing
the ignition key is in the ACC or OFF If you experience the noise with the To open or close a window, press
position. However, if the front doors sunroof open, slightly reduce the down or pull up the front portion of
are opened, the power windows can- size of the sunroof opening. the corresponding switch to the first
not be operated within the 30 second detent position(5).
period.
4 26
And if the power window switch is

pulled up continuously again within 5
seconds after the window is lowered
by the automatic window reversal
feature, the automatic window rever-
sal will not operate.
✽ NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature for
the window is only active when the
“auto up” feature is used by fully
OHG040022 OUN026013 pulling up the switch. The automat-
Auto up/down window Automatic reversal ic reverse feature will not operate if
Pressing or pulling up the power win- If the upward movement of the win- the window is raised using the
dow switch momentarily to the sec- dow is blocked by an object or part of halfway position on the power win-
ond detent position(6) completely the body, the window will detect the dow switch.
lowers or lifts the window even when resistance and will stop upward
the switch is released. To stop the movement. The window will then WARNING - Obstructions
window at the desired position while lower approximately 11.8 in. (30 cm)
the window is in operation, pull up or Always check for obstructions
to allow the object to be cleared. before raising any window to
press and release the switch to the If the window detects the resistance
opposite direction of the movement. avoid injuries or vehicle dam-
while the power window switch is age. If an object less than 0.16
If the power window is not operated pulled up continuously, the window
correctly, the automatic power win- inch. (4mm) in diameter is
will stop upward movement then caught between the window
dow system must be reset as follows: lower approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON glass and the upper window
position. channel, the automatic reverse
window may not detect the
2. Close the window and continue resistance and will not stop and
pulling up on the power window
switch for at least 1 second after reverse direction.
the window is completely closed.
4 27
Always double check to make sure

CAUTION - Opening/ all arms, hands, head and other
Closing window obstructions are safely out of the way
To prevent possible damage to before closing a window.
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
OHG040023
WARNING - Power
Power window lock button windows
The driver can disable the power • Never leave the keys in your
window switches on the rear passen- vehicle with unsupervised
gers' doors by pressing the power children, when the Engine is
window lock switch to the lock posi- running.
tion (pressed). • Do not allow children to play
When the power window lock switch with the power windows. Keep
is pressed: the driver’s door power win-
• The driver's master control can dow lock button in the LOCK
operate all the power windows. position (pressed). Serious
• The front passenger's control can injury can result from uninten-
operate the front passenger's tional window operation by
power window. the child.
• The rear passenger's control can-
not operate the rear passenger's
power window.
4 28
HOOD
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be
removed from the engine com-
partment.
2. Lower the hood halfway (lifted
approximately 30cm from the
OHG040024 OHG045025N
closed position) and push down to
Opening the hood 2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise securely lock in place. Then dou-
Open the hood after turning off the the hood slightly, pull up the sec- ble check to be sure the hood is
engine on a flat surface, move the ondary latch (1) inside of the hood secure.
shift lever to the P(Park) position center and lift the hood (2).
and set the parking brake. 3. Raise the hood. It will raise com-
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch pletely by itself after it has been WARNING - Fire risk
the hood. The hood should pop raised about halfway. Do not leave gloves, rags or any
open slightly. other combustible material in
the engine compartment. Doing
so may cause a heat-induced
fire.
4 29
WARNING
• Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away. If
the engine hood is not
secured properly, it is likely to
fly up blocking your vision
and causing a crash.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood raised. The view will
be blocked and the hood
could fall or be damaged.
4 30
FUEL FILLER LID

■ Type A If the fuel filler lid will not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the lid to break
the ice and release the lid. Do not pry
on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or
move the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.
OHG041026A
■ Type B
OHG043027A
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the
fuel filler lid opener button.
3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully
open.
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel
tank cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
OHG046551N
Opening the fuel filler lid

The fuel filler lid must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pushing
the fuel filler lid opener button.
4 31
Closing the fuel filler lid

1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
WARNING WARNING - Static
until it clicks one time. This indi- Always check that the fuel cap electricity
cates that the cap is securely is installed securely to prevent • Before touching the fuel noz-
tightened. fuel spillage in the event of an zle, you should eliminate
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it accident. Spilled fuel in the potentially dangerous static
lightly and make sure that it is presence of an ignition source electricity discharge by touch-
securely closed. could result in a fire. ing another metal part of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
WARNING - Refueling WARNING - Fire / zle, or other gas source. Static
Always remove the fuel cap explosion risk electricity discharge can
carefully and slowly. If the cap Read and follow all warnings ignite fuel vapors resulting in
is venting fuel or if you hear a posted at the gas station facili- rapid burning.
hissing sound, wait until the ty. Failure to follow all warnings • Do not get back into a vehicle
condition stops before com- will result in severe personal once you have begun refuel-
pletely removing the cap. injury, severe burns or death ing since you can generate
If pressurized fuel sprays out, it due to fire or explosion. static electricity by touching,
can cover your clothes or skin rubbing or sliding against any
and subject you to the risk of item or fabric (polyester, satin,
fire and burns. nylon, etc.) capable of produc-
ing static electricity. Static
electricity discharge can
✽ NOTICE ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning.
Tighten the cap until it clicks one
time, otherwise the warning light (Continued)
“Check Fuel Cap” will illuminate on
the LCD display.
4 32
(Continued) WARNING CAUTION - Exterior paint

If you must re-enter the vehi- When using an approved Do not spill fuel on the exterior
cle, you should once again portable fuel container, be sure surfaces of the vehicle. Any
eliminate potentially danger- to place the container on the type of fuel spilled on painted
ous static electricity dis- ground prior to refueling. Static surfaces may damage the paint.
charge by touching a metal electricity discharge from the
part of the vehicle, away from container can ignite fuel vapors
the fuel filler neck, nozzle or causing a fire. Once refueling
other gasoline source. has begun, contact with the WARNING - Refueling &
vehicle should be maintained Vehicle fires
until the filling is complete. Use When refueling, always shut the
only approved portable plastic engine off. Sparks produced by
fuel containers designed to electrical components related
carry and store gasoline. to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. Once
refueling is complete, check to
WARNING - Cell phone make sure the filler cap and
fires filler door are securely closed,
before starting the engine.
Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric current
and/or electronic interference
from cellular phones can poten-
tially ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire.
4 33
WARNING - Smoking
DO NOT use matches or a
lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or
leave a lit cigarette in your vehi-
cle while at a gas station espe-
cially during refueling.
Automotive fuel is highly flam-
mable and can, when ignited,
result in fire.
OHG040028
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the “Fuel requirements” Emergency fuel filler lid
suggested in section 1. release
If the fuel filler cap requires replace- If the fuel filler lid does not open
ment, use only a genuine HYUNDAI using the remote fuel filler lid
cap or the equivalent specified for release, you can open it manually by
your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler pulling the handle outward slightly.
cap can result in a serious malfunc-
tion of the fuel system or emission CAUTION
control system.
Do not pull the handle exces-
sively, otherwise the luggage
area trim or release handle may
be damaged.
4 34
PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

• In cold and wet climates, the sun-
roof may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
CAUTION - Sunroof
control lever
OHG045029
Do not continue to move the OHG045249L
sunroof control lever after the
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof is fully opened, closed, Sunroof open warning
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your or tilted. Damage to the motor or (if equipped)
sunroof with the sunroof control lever system components could If the driver turns off the engine, the
located on the overhead console. occur. warning chime will sound for approx-
The sunroof can only be opened, imately 7 seconds and a message
closed, or tilted when the ignition “Sunroof Open” will appear on the
switch is in the ON position. WARNING LCD display.
Never adjust the sunroof or Close the sunroof securely when
sunshade while driving. This leaving your vehicle.
could result in loss of control
and an accident that may cause
death, serious injury, or proper-
ty damage.
4 35
To stop the sliding at any point, press

the sunshade control switch momen-
tarily.
✽ NOTICE
It is normal for wrinkles to form on
the blind because of its material
characteristic.
OHGH045304 OHG045196K
Sunshade Sliding the sunroof

• To open the sunshade : When the sunshade is closed
Press the sunshade control If you pull the sunroof control lever
switch(1). rearward, the sunshade will slide all
• To close the sunshade : the way open then the sunroof glass
- When the sunroof glass is will slide all the way open. To stop the
opened sunroof movement at any point, pull
If you press the sunshade control or push the sunroof control lever
switch(2) once, the sunroof glass momentarily.
will close then the sunshade will
close.
- When the sunroof glass is closed
If you press the sunshade control
switch(2) once or press the sun-
roof control lever(3), the sun-
shade will close.
4 36
When the sunshade is opened

If you pull the sunroof control lever
rearward, the sunroof glass will slide
all the way open. To stop the sunroof
movement at any point, pull or push
the sunroof control lever momentarily.
✽ NOTICE
Only the front glass of the panora-
ma sunroof opens and closes.
OHG045032 OHG045509
Tilting the sunroof Closing the sunroof

When the sunshade is closed Press the sunshade CLOSE button.
If you push the sunroof control lever The sunroof glass will close then the
upward, the sunshade will slide all sunshade will close. To stop the sun-
the way open then the sunroof glass roof movement at any point, press
will tilt. the sunshade control switch momen-
To stop the sunroof movement at any tarily.
point, pull or push the sunroof control If you want to close the sunroof glass
lever momentarily. only, push the sunroof control lever.
Push the sunroof control lever again
When the sunshade is opened to close the sunshade. To stop the
sunroof movement at any point, pull
If you push the sunroof control lever or push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt. momentarily.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
4 37
Do not extend the face, neck, arms

or body outside the sunroof while CAUTION - Sunroof motor
driving. damage
Periodically remove any dirt that may • If you try to open the sunroof
accumulate on the guide rail. when the temperature is
below freezing or when the
sunroof is covered with snow
or ice, the glass or the motor
could be damaged.
• If the sunshade or sunroof is
completely closed or opened,
OYF049215 stop pressing the control
Automatic reversal switch. Pressing the control
switch longer than necessary
If an object or part of the body is
may damage the motor.
detected while the sunroof glass or
sunshade is closing automatically, it
will reverse the direction, and then
stop. CAUTION
The auto reverse function does not If you drive with the sunroof
work if a tiny obstacle is between the opened right after a car wash or
sliding glass or sunshade and the rain, water may get inside the
sunroof sash. You should always vehicle.
check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof
before closing it.
4 38
3. Push the sunroof control lever for-

WARNING ward in the direction of close
A panoramic sunroof is made of (about 10 seconds) until the sun-
glass, therefore it may break in roof is moved a little. Then,
an accident. If you do not have release the lever.
your seat belt on, you may go 4. Push the sunroof control lever for-
through the broken glass and ward in the direction of close until
get injured or killed. For all pas- the sunroof operates as follows;
sengers safety, have the appro-
priate protection on (ex. seat SUNSHADE OPEN → TILT OPEN
belt, child restraint seat, etc.). → SLIDE OPEN → SLIDE
OHG045197 CLOSE → SUNSHADE CLOSE
Resetting the sunroof
Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the Then, release the control lever.
followings)
- Battery is discharged or discon- When this is complete, the sun-
nected or the related fuse has been roof system is reset.
replaced or disconnected
- The one-touch sliding function of For more detailed information, con-
the sunroof does not normally oper- tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
ate
✽ NOTICE
1. Turn the engine on and close the If you do not reset the sunroof, it
sunroof glass and sunshade com- may not work properly.
pletely.
2. Release the control lever.
4 39
DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Storing positions into memory
WARNING using the buttons on the door
• Never attempt to operate the Storing driver’s seat positions
driver position memory system
1. Move the shift lever into P while
while the vehicle is moving.
the Engine Start/Stop button is in
This could result in loss of the ON position.
control, and an accident caus-
2. Adjust the driver’s seat, outside
ing death, serious injury, or
mirrors, steering wheel position
property damage.
and instrument panel illumination.
• Do not adjust the seat while
3. Press the SET button on the con-
wearing seat belts. Moving the
trol panel. The system will beep
OHG040033 seat cushion forward may
once.
The driver position memory system cause strong pressure on the
abdomen. 4. Press one of the memory buttons
stores and recalls the driver's seat, (1 or 2) within 5 seconds after
outside mirror, and steering wheel pressing the SET button. The sys-
positions, as well as the instrument tem will beep twice when memory
panel illumination intensity. By saving has been successfully stored.
the desired positions, different driv-
ers can recall different settings
according to their preference. If the
battery is disconnected, the memory
will be erased.
4 40
5. Recalling positions from memory Adjusting the control switch for the
1. Move the shift lever into P while driver’s seat, side view mirrors, steer-
the Engine Start/Stop button is in ing wheel and the instrument panel
the ON position. illumination while the system is
2. To recall the position in memory, recalling the stored position will
press the desired memory button cause the movement to stop and
(1 or 2). The system will beep move in the direction that the control
once, then the driver’s seat, out- switch is moved.
OHG045521L/OHG045522L side mirrors, steering wheel and
the instrument panel illumination
"Driver 1(or 2) settings saved" will will automatically adjust to the
appear on the instrument cluster stored positions.
LCD display. 3.
OHG045523N/OHG045524N
"Driver 1 (or 2) settings is applied"

will appear on the instrument cluster
LCD display.
4 41
Easy access function

(if equipped)
With the shift lever in the P (Park)
position, the system will move the
driver's seat and steering wheel
automatically so you can comfortably
enter and exit the vehicle.
- The steering wheel will move
away from the driver and the seat
will move rearward, when the
ENGINE START/ STOP button is
in the OFF position.
- The steering wheel will move
toward the driver and the seat will
move forward, when the ENGINE
START/STOP button is in the
ACC position.
You can activate or deactivate this

feature. Refer to "User Settings
Mode" in this section.
4 42
STEERING WHEEL
Electronic power steering (EPS) ✽ NOTICE (Continued)
The power steering uses a motor to The following symptoms may occur • When the vehicle is stationary, if
assist you in steering the vehicle. If during normal vehicle operation: you turn the steering wheel all the
the engine is off or if the power steer- • The steering effort is high immedi- way to the left or right continuous-
ing system becomes inoperative, the ately after the engine starts. This ly, the steering wheel effort
vehicle may still be steered, but it will happens as the system performs increases. This is not a system mal-
require increased steering effort. the EPS system diagnostics. When function. As time passes, the steer-
The motor driven power steering is the diagnostics is completed, the ing wheel effort will return to its
controlled by a power steering con- steering wheel will return to its normal condition.
trol unit which senses the steering normal condition.
wheel torque and vehicle speed to • A click noise may be heard from If the Electronic Power Steering
command the motor. the EPS relay after the ignition System does not operate normally,
switch is changed to the ON or the warning light ( ) will illuminate
The steering becomes heavier as on the instrument cluster. The steer-
the vehicle’s speed increases and OFF position.
• Motor noise may be heard when ing wheel may become difficult to
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s control or operate abnormally. Take
speed decreases for optimum steer- the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
driving speed. your vehicle to an authorized
ing control. HYUNDAI dealer and have the
Should you notice any change in the • When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, abnor- vehicle checked as soon as possible.
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power mal noise could occur. If tempera-
steering checked by an authorized ture rises, the noise will disappear.
HYUNDAI dealer. This is a normal condition.
(Continued)
4 43
Tilt and telescopic steering

Tilt and telescopic steering allows
you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can also raise it
to give your legs more room when
you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be posi-

tioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges. OHG040189L OHG040035
Manual type Electric type
WARNING - Steering To change the steering wheel angle To change the steering wheel angle
wheel adjustment and height: and height:
1. Pull down the lock-release lever • Move the switch (1) up and down
Never adjust the angle and (1). to adjust the angle (2).
height of the steering wheel
while driving. You may lose 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the • Move the switch forward or rear-
steering control and cause seri- desired angle (2) and height (3). ward to adjust the height (3).
ous personal injury, death, or 3. Pull up the lock-release lever to
accidents. lock the steering wheel in place.
4 44
OHG040038
Horn
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when this area
is pressed.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
4 45
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the with HomeLink® system and
center view through the rear window compass
is seen. Make this adjustment before Your vehicle may be equipped with a
you start driving. Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
Do not place objects in the rear seat with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass
or cargo area which would interfere Display and an Integrated
with your vision through the rear win- HomeLink® Wireless Control
dow. System. During nighttime driving,
this feature will automatically detect
and reduce rearview mirror glare
while the compass indicates the OYF042250N
direction the vehicle is pointed. The
(1) Telematics button
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
allows you to activate your garage (2) Telematics button
door(s), electric gate, home lighting, (3) Telematics button
etc. (4) Compass control button &
Dimming ON/OFF button
(5) Status indicator LED
(6) Channel 1 button
(9) Compass display
(10) Rear light sensor
4 46
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision Automatic-dimming function Z-Nav™ Compass Display

Safety™ (NVS®) Mirror Your mirror will automatically dim The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is
The NVS® Mirror in your vehicle is upon detecting glare from the vehi- also equipped with a Z-Nav™
the most advanced way to reduce cles traveling behind you. The auto- Compass that shows the vehicle
annoying glare in the rearview mirror dimming function can be controlled Compass heading in the Display
during any driving situation. For more by the Dimming ON/OFF button: Window using the 8 basic cardinal
information regarding NVS® mirrors headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
and other applications, please refer 1. Pressing and holding the button
to the Gentex website: for 3 seconds turns the autodim-
www.gentex.com ming function OFF which is indi-
cated by the green Status
✽ NOTICE Indicator LED turning off.
The NVS® Mirror automatically 2. Pressing and holding the button
reduces glare during driving condi- for 3 seconds again turns the
tions based upon light levels moni- auto-dimming function ON which
tored in front of the vehicle and is indicated by the green Status
from the rear of the vehicle. These Indicator LED turning on.
light sensors are visible through The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
openings in the front and rear of the tion each time the vehicle is started.
mirror case. Any object that
obstructs either light sensor will
degrade the automatic dimming
control feature.
4 47
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the button
within 1 second to turn the display
feature OFF.
2. Press and release the button
again within 1 second to turn the
display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the
button and are detailed below.
There is a difference between mag-

netic north and true north. The com-
pass in the mirror can compensate
for this difference when it knows the
Magnetic Zone in which it is operat-
ing. This is set either by the dealer or
by the user. The operating Zone
Numbers for North America are
shown in the figure on the following
section.
B520C05NF
4 48
To adjust the Zone setting: There are some conditions that can Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
1. Determine the desired Zone cause changes to the vehicle mag- Control System
Number based upon your current nets, such as installing a ski rack or The HomeLink® Wireless Control
location on the Zone Map. a CB antenna. Body repair work on System provides a convenient way to
2. Press and hold the button for 6 the vehicle can also cause changes replace up to three hand-held radio-
seconds, the current Zone to the vehicle's magnetic field. In frequency (RF) transmitters with a
Number will appear on the display. these situations, the compass will single built-in device. This innovative
3. Pressing and holding the button need to be re-calibrated to quickly feature will learn the radio frequency
again will cause the numbers to correct these changes. To re-cali- codes of most current transmitters to
increment (Note: they will repeat brate the compass: operate devices such as gate opera-
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing tors, garage door openers, entry
the button when the desired Zone 1. Press and hold the button for door locks, security systems, even
Number appears on the display more than 9 seconds. When the home lighting. Both standard and
will set the new Zone. compass memory is cleared a "C" rolling code-equipped transmitters
4. Within about 5 seconds the com- will appear in the display. can be programmed by following the
pass will start displaying a com- 2. To calibrate the compass, drive outlined procedures. Additional
pass heading again. the vehicle in 2 complete circles at HomeLink® information can be found
less than 5 mph (8 km/h). at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
4 49
Retain the original transmitter of the ✽ NOTICE - Programming

WARNING RF device you are programming for HomeLink®
Before programming HomeLink® use in other vehicles as well as for • When programming a garage
to a garage door opener or gate future HomeLink® programming. It is door opener, it is advised to park
operator, make sure that people also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle outside of the garage.
and objects are out of the way of the vehicle, the programmed • It is recommended that a new bat-
the device to prevent potential HomeLink® buttons be erased for tery be placed in the hand-held
harm or damage. Do not use security purposes. transmitter of the device being pro-
HomeLink® with any garage grammed to HomeLink® for quick-
door opener that lacks the safe- er training and accurate transmis-
ty stop and reverse features sion of the radio-frequency signal.
required by U.S. federal safety • Some vehicles may require the
standards (this includes any ignition switch to be turned to the
garage door opener model man- second (or "accessories") position
ufactured before April 1, 1982). A for programming and/or opera-
garage door that cannot detect tion of HomeLink®.
an object - signaling the door to • In the event that there are still pro-
stop and reverse - does not meet gramming difficulties or questions
current U.S. federal safety stan- after following the programming
dards. Using a garage door steps listed below, contact
opener without these features HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com
increases the risk of serious or 1-800-355-3515.
injury or death.
4 50
Programming Flashing ✽ NOTICE

To train most devices, follow these Some devices may require you to
instructions: replace this Programming step 3
with procedures noted in the "Gate
Flashing Operator/Canadian Programming"
section. If the HomeLink® indicator
light does not change to a rapidly
blinking light after performing these
steps, contact HomeLink® at
www.homelink.com.
OYF042251N
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)
OYF042252N away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping
1. For first-time programming, press the indicator light in view.
and hold the two outside buttons
3. Simultaneously press and hold
( , ), HomeLink® Channel 1
both the HomeLink® and hand-
and Channel 3, until the indicator
held transmitter buttons until the
light begins to flash (after 10 sec-
HomeLink® indicator light changes
onds). Release both buttons. Do
from a slow to a rapid blinking light.
not hold the buttons for longer
Now you may release both the
than 20 seconds.
HomeLink® and hand-held trans-
mitter buttons.
4 51
4. Firmly press, hold for 5 seconds 6. Firmly press and release the Gate operator & Canadian
and release the programmed "learn" or "smart" button. (The programming
HomeLink® button up to two sepa- name and color of the button vary During programming, your handheld
rate times to activate the door. If by manufacturer). There are 30 transmitter may automatically stop
the door does not activate, press seconds to initiate step 7. transmitting. Continue to press
and hold the just-trained 7. Return to the vehicle and firmly the Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
HomeLink® button and observe press, hold for 2 seconds Control System button (note steps
the indicator light. and release the programmed 2 through 4 in the Standard
• If the indicator light stays on con- HomeLink® button. Repeat the Programming portion of this docu-
stantly, programming is complete "press/hold/release" sequence a ment) while you press and re-press
and your device should activate second time, and, depending on ("cycle") your handheld transmitter
when the HomeLink® button is the brand of the garage door every two seconds until the frequen-
pressed and released. opener (or other rolling code cy signal has been learned. The indi-
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly equipped device), repeat this cator light will flash slowly and then
for 2 seconds and then turns to sequence a third time to complete rapidly after several seconds upon
a constant light, continue with the programming process. successful training.
"Programming" steps 5-7 to
complete the programming of a HomeLink® should now activate your Operating HomeLink®
rolling code equipped device rolling code equipped device. To operate, simply press and release
(most commonly a garage door the programmed HomeLink® button.
opener). Activation will now occur for the
5. At the garage door opener receiv- trained device (i.e. garage door
er (motor-head unit) in the garage, opener, gate operator, security sys-
locate the "learn" or "smart" but- tem, entry door lock, home/office
ton. This can usually be found lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
where the hanging antenna wire is hand-held transmitter of the device
attached to the motor-head unit. may also be used at any time.
4 52
Reprogramming a single Erasing HomeLink® buttons FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4

HomeLink® button Individual buttons cannot be erased. IC: 4112A-TLMHL4
To program a device to HomeLink® However, to erase all three pro-
using a HomeLink® button previously grammed buttons: This device complies with Part 15
trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the two outer of the FCC Rules.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® buttons until the indi- Operation is subject to the following
HomeLink® button. DO NOT cator light begins to flash after 10 two conditions:
release the button. seconds. 1. This device may not cause harm-
2. The indicator light will begin to 2. Release both buttons. Do not hold ful interference, and
flash after 20 seconds. Without for longer than 20 seconds. 2. This device must accept any inter-
releasing the HomeLink® button, The Integrated HomeLink® Wireless ference received, including inter-
proceed with "Programming" step Control System is now in the training ference that may cause undesired
2. (learn) mode and can be pro- operation.
grammed at any time following the
For questions or comments, contact appropriate steps in the Programming
HomeLink® at www.homelink.com or sections above. WARNING
1-800-355-3515. The transceiver has been tested
and complies with FCC and
Industry Canada rules. Changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate
the device.
4 53
NVS® is a registered trademark and Side view mirrors

Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex Be sure to adjust mirror angles
CAUTION - Rearview
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan. mirror
before driving.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark Do not scrape ice off the mirror
Your vehicle is equipped with both face; this may damage the sur-
owned by Johnson Controls, left-hand and right-hand side view
Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin. face of the glass. If ice should
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted restrict movement of the mirror,
remotely with the remote switch. The do not force the mirror for
mirror heads can be folded back to adjustment. To remove ice, use
prevent damage during an automatic a deicer spray, or a sponge or
car wash or when passing through a soft cloth with very warm water.
narrow street.
The right side view mirrors is convex.
Objects seen in the mirror are closer
than they appear. WARNING - Mirror
Use your interior rearview mirror or adjustment
direct observation to determine the Do not adjust or fold the side
actual distance of following vehicles view mirrors while the vehicle is
when changing lanes. moving. This could result in
loss of control, and an accident
which could cause death, seri-
ous injury or property damage.
4 54
WARNING
• Always check the road condi-
tion while driving for unex-
pected situations even
though the vehicle is
equipped with a blind spot
mirror.
• The blind spot mirror is a
device made for convenience.
OHG044300A
Do not solely rely on the mir-
ror but always pay attention to OHG040044
drive safely. Adjusting the side view mirror
The electric remote control mirror
switch allows you to adjust the posi-
tion of the left and right side view mir-
rors.
To adjust the position of the mirrors:
1. Place the ignition switch in the
ACC position.
OFS053068
2. Move the lever(1) to R (right) or L
Blind spot mirror (if equipped) (left) to select the right side mirror
The blind spot mirror (BSM) is sup- or the left side mirror.
plemental mirror to help reduce a dri- 3. Press a corresponding point on
ver's blind spot that will show the rear the mirror adjustment control to
side territory of your vehicle. The position the selected mirror up,
blind spot mirror is equipped with the down, left or right.
left-hand side view mirror.
4 55
4. After the adjustment, position the

lever in the center to prevent inad-
vertent movement.
CAUTION - Outside
mirror
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum
adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
OHG041214A OHG040045
Do not press the switch longer
than necessary, the motor Folding/unfolding the side view Electric type (if equipped)
may be damaged. mirror The side view mirror can be folded or
• Do not attempt to adjust the Manual type unfolded by pressing the switch as
side view mirror by hand. To fold the side view mirror, grasp the below.
Doing so may damage the housing of the mirror and then fold it Left (1) : The mirror will unfold.
related parts. toward the rear of the vehicle. Right (2) : The mirror will fold.
Center (AUTO, 3) :
The mirror will fold or unfold automat-
ically as follows:
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by the
smart key.
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by the
button on the outside door handle.
4 56
- The mirror will unfold when you Neutral : When the remote control
approach the vehicle (all doors side view mirror switch is
closed and locked) with a smart placed in the middle, the
key in possession. (if equipped) side view mirrors will not
operate while the vehicle is
moving rearward.
CAUTION
The electric type side view mir- The side view mirrors will automati-
ror operates even though the cally revert to their original positions
ENGINE START/ STOP button is under the following conditions:
in the OFF position. However, to 1. The ignition switch is in the OFF
prevent unnecessary battery position.
OHG041034A
discharge, do not adjust the
2. Shift lever is moved to any position
mirrors longer than necessary Reverse parking aid function except R (Reverse).
while the engine is not running. (if equipped)
3. Remote control side view mirror
While the vehicle is moving rear- switch is placed in the middle.
ward, the side view mirror(s) will
CAUTION move downward to aid reverse park-
In case it is an electric type side ing. According to the position of the
view mirror, don’t fold it by side view mirror switch (1), the side
hand. It could cause motor fail- view mirror(s) will operate as follows:
ure.
L/R : When the remote control side
view mirror switch is selected to
the L (left) or R (right) position,
both side view mirrors will move
downward.
4 57
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A
1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. LCD display
5. Fuel gauge
■ Type B
6. Engine coolant temperature gauge
7. Warning and indicator lights
For more details, refer to "Gauges" in

the next pages.
The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OHG046046N/OHG045047N
4 58
■ Type A ■ Type A
OHG040049N OHG040051
■ Type B ■ Type B
OHG045048
Instrument panel illumination

The instrument panel illumination
intensity can be adjusted as follows:
• Ignition switch in the ON position
• Pushing the control switch up or
down
The illumination intensity is shown OHG040050N OHG040052

on the instrument cluster LCD dis-
play. Gauges Tachometer
Speedometer The tachometer indicates the engine
The speedometer indicates the vehi- speed in revolutions per minute
cle speed. (rpm).
The speedometer is calibrated in Use the tachometer to select the cor-
miles per hour and/or kilometers per rect shift points and to prevent lug-
hour. ging and/or over-revving the engine.
4 59
■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B

CAUTION - Red zone
Do not operate the engine with-
in the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
OHG040053 OHG043054A
Engine coolant temperature Fuel gauge
gauge The fuel gauge indicates the approx-
This gauge shows the temperature imate amount of fuel remaining in the
of the engine coolant when the igni- fuel tank.
tion switch is ON. • The fuel tank capacity is given in sec-
Do not continue driving with an over- tion 12.
heated engine. If your vehicle over- • The fuel gauge is supplemented by
heats, refer to “If the engine over- a low fuel warning light, which will
heats” in section 6. illuminate when the fuel tank is
If the segment level moves beyond nearly empty.
the normal range area toward the “H” • On inclines or curves, the fuel
position, it indicates overheating that gauge segment level may fluctuate
may damage the engine. or the low fuel warning light may
come on earlier than usual due to
the movement of fuel in the tank.
4 60

WARNING - Fuel gauge
Stop and obtain additional fuel
as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when
the gauge level comes close to
the E level. Running out of fuel
can expose vehicle occupants
to danger.
CAUTION - Low fuel OHG045311 OHG045312N
Avoid driving with a extremely Transaxle Shift Indicator Odometer

low fuel level. Running out of Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator The odometer indicates the total dis-
fuel could cause the engine to This indicator displays which auto- tance that the vehicle has been driv-
misfire, damaging the catalytic matic transaxle shift lever is selected. en and should be used to determine
converter. when periodic maintenance should
• Park : P be performed.
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
• Drive : D
• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
4 61
OHG045055
LCD display control

The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons.
(1) : MODE button for changing

modes
(2) ▼ : MOVE switch for changing
items
(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for
setting or resetting the
selected item
For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
4 62
LCD DISPLAY
LCD modes
Modes Symbol Explanation
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.
Trip Computer
For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Turn By Turn (TBT)

This mode displays the state of the navigation.
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the Lane Departure Warning System
LDWS (LDWS).
(if equipped) For more details, refer to "Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)"
in chapter 5.
A/V
This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
(If equipped)
This mode informs of the service interval (mileage or days) and

Information or
warning messages related to the Blind Spot Detection system, and so on.
User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, and so on.
For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
4 63
■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG045323L OHG045324N OHG045226N

Cannot edit settings while driving Quick guide (Help, if equipped) Trip computer mode
This warning message illuminates if If you press and hold the OK button This mode displays driving informa-
you try to select the other User in the User Settings Mode, explanation like the tripmeter, fuel economy,
Settings item when driving. tion about the selected item is dis- and so on.
For safety, change the User Settings played in the cluster.
after parking the vehicle, applying For more details, refer to “Trip
the parking brake and moving the Computer” in this chapter.
shift lever to P (Park) position.
4 64
OHG045257 OHG055159N OHG045238N
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode LDWS Mode (if equipped) A/V mode
(if equipped) This mode displays the state of the This mode displays the state of the
This mode displays the state of the Lane Departure Warning System A/V system.
navigation. (LDWS).
For more information, refer to "Lane

Departure Warning System (LDWS)"
in chapter 5.
4 65
OHG045258N OHG045326N OHG045327N
Information mode Service required Service in OFF

Service interval If you do not have your vehicle serv- If the service interval is not set,
Service in iced according to the already "Service in OFF" message is dis-
inputted service interval, "Service played on the LCD display.
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance required" message is displayed for
service (mileage or days). several seconds each time you set ✽ NOTICE
the Engine Start/Stop button to the If any of the following conditions
If the remaining mileage or time ON position.
reaches 900 miles (1,500 km) or 30 occurs, the mileage and days may be
days, "Service in" message is dis- To reset the service interval to the incorrect.
played for several seconds each time mileage and days you inputted - The battery cable is disconnected.
you set the Engine Start/Stop button before: - The fuse switch is turned off.
to the ON position. - Press the OK button for more than - The battery is discharged.
1 second.
For the setting of the service inter-
val, refer to "User Settings Mode"
of the LCD display.
4 66
OHG045534N
Warning Message
If one of followings occurs, warning
messages will be displayed on the
information mode for several sec-
onds.
- Malfunction of below systems
• Blind Spot Detection (BSD)
• Forward Collision Warning
System (FCWS)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS), and so on.
- Low washer fluid, etc.
4 67
User settings mode

On this mode, you can change setting of the instrument cluster, doors, lamps, and so on.
Driving Assist (if equipped)

Items Explanation
• Off: The FCW system will be deactivated.
FCWS
• Late/Normal/Early: The warning point of time may be adjusted.
(Forward Collision Warning
System)
For more details, refer to "Forward Collision Warning System (FCWS)" in chapter 5.
To activate or deactivate the RCTA system.

RCTA
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
For more details, refer to "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" in chapter 5.
4 68
Door/Trunk
Items Explanation
• Off (Disable) : The auto door lock operation will be deactivated.
• Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3mph
(15km/h).
Automatically Lock
• Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is shift-
ed from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) posi-
tion.
• Off (Disable) : The auto door unlock operation will be deactivated.
• Vehicle Off: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the Engine Start/Stop button is set to
the OFF position.
Automatically Unlock
• Driver Door Unlock: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the driver's door is unlocked.
• On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is shift-
ed to the P (Park) position.
• OFF : The two press unlock function will be deactivated. Therefore, all doors will unlock if the door
is unlocked.
Two Press Unlock
• ON : The driver’s door will unlock if the door is unlocked. When the door is unlocked again within
4 seconds, all doors will unlock.
Door Lock Sound
To activate or deactivate the lock sound when locking doors.
(Lock/Unlock Sound)
To activate or deactivate the Smart Trunk system.
Smart Trunk
For more details, refer to "Smart Trunk" in this chapter.
4 69
Lights/Sound
Items Explanation
• Off: The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.

• 3, 5, 7 Flashes : The lane change signals will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is
One Touch Turn Signal moved slightly.
For more details, refer to “Light” in this chapter.
• Off : The ambient light of interior will turn off.

Ambient Light • 1, 2, 3, 4 Level : The brightness of the ambient light may be adjusted.
• On: The head lamp delay function will be activated.

Head Lamp Delay • Off: The headlamp delay function will be deactivated.
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) • Off : The BSD sound function will be deactivated.
Sound • On : The BSD sound function will be activated.
• Off : The welcome sound function will be deactivated.

Welcome Sound
• On : The welcome sound function will be activated.
4 70
Convenient
Items Explanation
• None: The seat easy access function will be deactivated.

• Normal/Extended:
- When you turn off the engine, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward short (Normal)
Seat Easy Access or long (Extended) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably.
- If you change the Engine Start/Stop button from OFF position to the ACC, ON, or START posi-
tion, the driver’s seat will return to the original position.
For more details, refer to “Driver Position Memory System” in this chapter.
• On: The steering wheel will automatically move forward or rearward for the driver to enter or exit
the vehicle comfortably.
Steering Easy Access • Off: The steering easy access function will be deactivated.
For more details, refer to “Driver Position Memory System” in this chapter.
• Off : The steering position function will be deactivated.

Steering Position
• On : The steering position function will be activated.
• Off : The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever refueling.
Fuel Economy Auto Reset • On (Auto Reset) : The average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Fuel Economy Unit Choose the fuel economy unit. (US gallon, UK gallon)
4 71
Service interval
Items Explanation
On this mode, you can activate the service interval function with mileage (km or mi.) and period
(months).
Service Interval
• Off : The service interval function will be deactivated.
• On :You can set the service interval (mileage and months).
4 72
TRIP COMPUTER
Overview Trip modes ■ Type A ■ Type B
Description To change the trip mode, press the

The trip computer is a microcomput- MOVE switch “▼” on the steering
er-controlled driver information sys- wheel.
tem that displays information related
to driving. FUEL ECONOMY
• Distance To Empty
✽ NOTICE • Average Fuel Economy
Some driving information stored in • Instant Fuel Economy
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the OHG045057N
battery is disconnected.
Trip A/B
TRIP A
• Tripmeter [A] Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
distance since the last tripmeter
• Elapsed Time [A] reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi.
or km.
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
TRIP B [OK] button on the steering wheel
• Tripmeter [B] for more than 1 second when the
• Average Vehicle Speed [B] tripmeter is displayed.
• Elapsed Time [B]
Digital Speedometer
4 73
Average Vehicle Speed (2) Elapsed Time (3) ■ Type A ■ Type B
• The average vehicle speed is cal- • The elapsed time is the total driv-
culated by the total driving dis- ing time since the last elapsed time
tance and driving time since the reset.
last average vehicle speed reset. - Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 MPH or km/h • To reset the elapsed time, press
• To reset the average vehicle speed, the [OK] button on the steering
press the [OK] button on the steer- wheel for more than 1 second
ing wheel for more than 1 second when the elapsed time is dis-
when the average vehicle speed is played.
displayed.
✽ NOTICE OHG045226N
✽ NOTICE Even if the vehicle is not in motion, Fuel economy
• The average vehicle speed is not dis- the elapsed time keeps calculating Distance To Empty (1)
played if the driving distance is less while the engine is running. • The distance to empty is the esti-
than 0.19 miles (300 meters) or the mated distance the vehicle can be
driving time is less than 10 seconds driven with the remaining fuel.
since the Engine Start/Stop button is - Distance range: 1 ~ 9999 mi. or
turned to ON. 1 ~ 9999 km.
• Even if the vehicle is not in
motion, the average vehicle speed • If the estimated distance is below
keeps calculating while the engine 1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will
is running. display “---” as distance to empty.
4 74
✽ NOTICE Average Fuel Economy (2) Automatic reset

• If the vehicle is not on level ground • The average fuel economy is calcu- To make the average fuel economy
or the battery power has been lated by the total driving distance be reset automatically whenever refu-
interrupted, the distance to empty and fuel consumption since the last eling, select the “Auto Reset” mode in
function may not operate correct- average fuel economy reset. User Setting menu of the LCD display
ly. - Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9 (Refer to “LCD Display”).
• The distance to empty may differ MPG or L/100km, km/L Under “Auto Reset” mode, the aver-
from the actual driving distance as • The average fuel economy can be age fuel economy will be cleared to
it is an estimate of the available reset both manually and automati- zero (---) when the vehicle speed
driving distance. cally. exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more
• The trip computer may not regis- than 1.6 gallons (6 liters).
ter additional fuel if less than 1.6 Manual reset
gallons (6 liters) of fuel are added
To clear the average fuel economy ✽ NOTICE
to the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and distance to manually, press the [OK] button on The average fuel economy is not dis-
empty may vary significantly the steering wheel for more than 1 played for more accurate calculation
based on driving conditions, driv- second when the average fuel econo- if the vehicle does not drive more
ing habits, and condition of the my is displayed. than 10 seconds or 0.19 miles (300
vehicle. meters) since the Engine Start/Stop
button is turned to ON.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)

• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few sec-
onds when the vehicle speed is
more than 6.2 MPH (10 km/h).
- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 50 MPG
or 0 ~ 30 L/100km
4 75
■ Type A ■ Type B ✽ NOTICE

If "Sunroof Open" warning mes-
sage is displayed in the cluster, this
display may not be displayed in the
cluster.
OHG045337N/OHG045315N OHG045316N
Digital Speedometer One time driving information
This message shows the speed of mode
the vehicle (MPH, km/h). This display shows trip distance (1),
average fuel economy (2) and the
vehicle can be driven with the
remaining fuel (3).
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
engine and then goes off automati-
cally. The information provided is cal-
culated according to each trip.
If the estimated distance is below
1km (1 mi.), the distance to empty
(3) will display as "---" and a refuel
message will appear (4).
4 76
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS (INSTRUMENT CLUSTER)

All warning lights are checked by Air bag warning light Seat belt warning
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). Any light that does
not illuminate should be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. This warning light will illuminate for As a reminder to the driver, the seat
After starting the engine, check to approximately 6 seconds each time belt warning light will blink for
make sure that all warning lights are you turn the ignition switch to the ON approximately 6 seconds each time
off. If any are still on, this indicates a position. you turn the ignition switch ON
situation that needs attention. This light also comes on when the regardless of belt fastening.
Supplemental Restraint System For more details, refer to the “Seat
(SRS) is not working properly. If the Belt” in section 3.
SRS air bag warning light does not
come on, or continuously remains on
after operating for about 6 seconds
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON position or start the engine, or
if it comes on while driving, have the
SRS inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
4 77
Turn signal indicator Front fog light indicator Smart High Beam
indicator (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :

The blinking green arrows on the This light comes on when the front • When the high-Beam is on with the
instrument panel show the direction fog lights are ON. light switch in the AUTO light posi-
indicated by the turn signals. If the tion.
arrow comes on but does not blink, High beam indicator • If your vehicle detects oncoming or
blinks more rapidly than normal, or preceding vehicles, the Smart High
does not illuminate at all, a malfunc- Beam system will switch the high
tion in the turn signal system is indi- beam to low beam automatically.
cated. Your dealer should be consult- This indicator illuminates when the
ed for repairs. headlights are on and in the high Position (Parking) /
beam position or when the turn sig- Tail light indicator
nal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-
Pass position.
This indicator illuminates when the

position lights are on.
4 78
Engine oil pressure The oil pressure warning light comes

warning light on whenever there is insufficient oil CAUTION
pressure. In normal operation, it If the oil pressure warning light
should come on when the ignition stays on while the engine is run-
This warning light indicates the switch is turned on, then go out when ning, serious engine damage may
engine oil pressure is low. the engine is started. If the oil pres- result. The oil pressure warning
If the warning light illuminates while sure warning light stays on while the light comes on whenever there is
driving: engine is running, there is a serious insufficient oil pressure. In nor-
malfunction. mal operation, it should come on
1. Drive safely to the side of the road
and stop. when the ignition switch is turned
on, then go out when the engine
2. With the engine off, check the is started. If the oil pressure warn-
engine oil level. If the level is low, ing light stays on while the
add oil as required. engine is running, there is a seri-
If the warning light remains on after ous malfunction.
adding oil or if oil is not available, call If this happens, stop the vehicle
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. as soon as it is safe to do so,
turn off the engine and check
CAUTION - Engine the oil level. If the oil level is low,
damage fill the engine oil to the proper
If the engine is not stopped level and start the engine again.
immediately after the engine oil If the light stays on with the
pressure warning light is illumi- engine running, turn the engine
nated and stays on while the off immediately. In any instance
engine is running, serious where the oil light stays on
engine damage may result. when the engine is running, the
engine should be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer
before the car is driven again.
4 79
Parking brake & brake 3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks Anti-lock brake system
fluid warning light are found, the warning light (ABS) warning light
remains on or the brakes do not
operate properly. Have the vehicle
Parking brake warning towed to any authorized HYUNDAI This light illuminates if the ignition
This light is illuminated when the dealer for a brake system inspec- switch is turned ON and goes off in
parking brake is applied with the ignition and necessary repairs. approximately 3 seconds if the sys-
tion switch in the START or ON posi- Your vehicle is equipped with dual- tem is operating normally.
tion. The warning light should go off diagonal braking systems. This If the ABS warning light remains on,
when the parking brake is released means you still have braking on two comes on while driving, or does not
while the engine is running. wheels even if one of the dual sys- come on when the ignition switch is
The parking brake warning chime will tems should fail. With only one of the turned to the ON position, this indi-
sound to remind you that the parking dual system working, more than nor- cates that there may be a malfunc-
brake is applied when you are driving mal pedal travel and greater pedal tion with the ABS.
above 6 mph (10 km/h). Always release pressure are required to stop the car.
Also, the car will not stop in as short If this occurs, have your vehicle
the parking brake before you drive. checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
a distance with only a portion of the
brake system working. If the brakes dealer as soon as possible. The nor-
Low brake fluid level warning fail while you are driving, shift to a mal braking system will still be oper-
If the warning light remains on, it may lower gear for additional engine brak- ational, but without the assistance of
indicate that the brake fluid level in ing and stop the car as soon as it is the anti-lock brake system.
the reservoir is low. safe to do so.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe To check bulb operation, check
location and stop your vehicle. whether the parking brake and brake
2. With the engine stopped, check the fluid warning light illuminates when
brake fluid level immediately and the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
add fluid as required. Then check all tion.
brake components for fluid leaks.
4 80
Electronic If the ABS warning light or EBD warn- Charging system warn-
brake force ing light is on and stays on, the ing light
distribution speedometer or odometer/tripmeter
(EBD) system may not work. In this case, have your
warning light vehicle checked by an authorized This warning light indicates a mal-
If these two warning lights shown illu- HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible. function of either the generator or
minate at the same time while driv- electrical charging system.
ing, the ABS and EBD system may If the warning light comes on while
have malfunctioned. the vehicle is in motion:
In this case, your ABS and regular 1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
brake system may not work normally.
Have the vehicle checked by an 2. With the engine off, check the gen-
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon erator drive belt for looseness or
as possible. breakage.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a
problem exists somewhere in the
WARNING - ABS/brake electrical charging system. Have
lights an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
If both ABS and brake warning correct the problem as soon as
lights are on and stay on, your possible.
vehicle’s brake system will not
work normally during sudden
braking. Loss of braking could
result in an accident, serious
injury, or death. In this case,
avoid high speed driving and
abrupt braking. Have your vehi-
cle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
4 81
Door ajar warning light Immobilizer indicator • When the battery is weak, if the
ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed, the indicator will blink and
If any of the following occurs in a you will not be able to start the
vehicle equipped with the smart key, engine. However, you may still be
This warning light illuminates when a able to start the engine by directly
the immobilizer indicator illuminates,
door is not closed securely. pressing the engine start/stop but-
blinks or the light goes off.
• When the smart key is in the vehi- ton with the smart key. If smart key
Trunk lid open warning cle, if the ENGINE START/STOP system related parts have a prob-
light button is in the ACC or ON posi- lem, the indicator will blink.
tion, the indicator will illuminate.
However, when the smart key is
This warning light illuminates when a not in the vehicle, if the ENGINE
trunk lid is not closed securely. START/STOP button is pressed,
the indicator will blink 10 times to
indicate that you will not be able to
start the engine.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ON position and the
indicator turns off after 2 seconds,
the system may have a problem.
Have the vehicle checked by an
4 82
EPB (Electric Parking AUTO HOLD indicator EPS (Electronic Power

AUTO
Brake) malfunction indi- EPB light (if equipped)
HOLD
Steering) system warn-
cator (if equipped) ing light
The EPB malfunction indicator will If you press the AUTO HOLD switch, This indicator light comes on after
illuminate when the ignition switch is the AUTO HOLD indicator on the the ignition key is turned to the ON
turned ON, but should go off after cluster comes on white. And when position and then goes out after
approximately 3 seconds. If the you stop the vehicle completely by approximately 6 seconds.
warning light does not come on, or pressing the brake pedal, the indica- This light also comes on when the
continuously remains on take your tor changes from white to green. EPS has some problems. If it comes
vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI If the AUTO HOLD malfunction indi- on while driving, have your vehicle
dealer and have the system cator lights up yellow, the AUTO checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
checked. HOLD is not working properly. Take dealer.
Also, the EPB malfunction indicator your vehicle to an authorized
may illuminate when the ESC indica- HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys- Engine coolant tempera-
tor comes on to indicate that the tem checked. ture warning light
ESC is not working properly, but if For more information, refer to
this occurs, it does not indicate the "AUTO HOLD" in section 5.
EPB has malfunctioned.
The warning light illuminates if the
temperature of the engine coolant is
above 257±4.5°F (125±2.5°C).
Do not continue driving with an over-
heated engine. If your vehicle over-
heats, refer to "Overheating" in sec-
tion 6.
4 83
Low fuel level warning Malfunction indicator

light light (MIL) CAUTION - MIL
(check engine light) illumination
• Prolonged driving with the
This warning light indicates the fuel This indicator light is part of the Malfunction Indicator Light
tank is nearly empty. When it comes Engine Control System which moni- illuminated may cause damage
on, you should add fuel as soon as tors various emission control system to the emission control sys-
possible. Driving with the fuel level components. If this light illuminates tems which could effect dri-
warning light on or with the fuel level while driving, it indicates that a vability and/or fuel economy.
below “E” can cause the engine to potential malfunction has been • If the Emission Control
misfire and damage the catalytic detected somewhere in the emission Malfunction Indicator Light
converter. control system. illuminates, potential catalytic
This light will also illuminate when converter damage is possible
the ignition switch is turned to the which could result in loss of
ON position, and will go out in a few engine power. Have the Engine
seconds after the engine is started. If Control System inspected as
it illuminates while driving, or does soon as possible by an author-
not illuminate when the ignition ized HYUNDAI dealer.
switch is in the ON position, take
your vehicle to your nearest author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer and have the
system checked.
Generally, your vehicle will continue
to be drivable, but have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer promptly.
4 84
ECO indicator ESC (Electronic Stability ESC OFF indicator

ECO Control) indicator
Active ECO system The ESC indicator will illuminate The ESC OFF indicator will illumi-
When active ECO is operating the when the ignition switch is turned nate when the ignition switch is
ECO indicator is green. ON, but should go off after approxi- turned ON, but should go off after
For more details, refer to “Active mately 3 seconds. When the ESC is approximately 3 seconds. To switch
ECO” in section 5. on, it monitors the driving conditions. to ESC OFF mode, press the ESC
Under normal driving conditions, the OFF button. The ESC OFF indicator
ESC indicator will remain off. When a will illuminate indicating the ESC is
slippery or low traction condition is deactivated.
encountered, the ESC will operate,
and the ESC indicator will blink to
indicate the ESC is operating.
But, if the ESC system malfunctions
the indicator illuminates and stays
on. Take your vehicle to an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer and have the
system checked.
4 85
Cruise indicator (if equipped) Cruise SET indicator TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
CRUISE indicator SET System) indicator
■ Type A ■ Type B Low tire pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indica-
CRUISE The indicator light illuminates when tor
the cruise function switch (SET- or
The indicator light illuminates when RES+) is ON. The cruise SET indica-
the cruise control system is enabled. tor light in the instrument cluster is The low tire pressure telltale/TPMS
The cruise indicator light in the illuminated when the cruise control malfunction indicator comes on for 3
instrument cluster is illuminated switch (SET- or RES+) is pushed. seconds after the ignition switch is in
when the cruise control CRUISE but- The cruise SET indicator light does the ON position.
ton on the steering wheel is pushed. not illuminate when the cruise con- The TPMS malfunction indicator will
The indicator light turns off when the trol switch (CANCEL) is pushed or illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
cruise control CRUISE button is the system is disengaged. mately 1 minute when there is a
pushed again. For more details, refer to “Cruise problem with the Tire Pressure
For more details, refer to "Cruise Control System” in section 5. Monitoring System.
Control System" in section 5. If this occurs, have the system
dealer as soon as possible.
For more details, refer to “TPMS” in
section 6.
4 86
• The TPMS cannot alert you to

WARNING - Low tire severe and sudden tire damage
pressure caused by external factors.
Significantly low tire pressure • If you feel any vehicle instability,
makes the vehicle unstable and immediately take your foot off the
can contribute to loss of vehicle accelerator pedal, apply the brakes
control and increased braking gradually and with light force, slow-
distances. ly move to a safe position off the
Continued driving on low pres- road.
sure tires will cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
4 87
LCD display warning Key not detected Low key battery

(if equipped) ■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B
Key not in vehicle
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG045073L OHG045075L
OHG045072L If the smart key is not in the vehicle If the ENGINE START/STOP button
or is not detected and you press the changes to the OFF position when
If the smart key is not in the vehicle ENGINE START/STOP button, the the smart key in the vehicle dis-
and if any door is opened or closed warning illuminates on the LCD discharges, the warning illuminates on
with the ENGINE START/STOP but- play for 10 seconds. Also, the immo- the LCD display for about 10 sec-
ton in the ACC, ON, or START posi- bilizer indicator blinks for 10 seconds. Also, the warning chime
tion, the warning illuminates on the onds. sounds once.
LCD display. Also, the chime sounds Replace the battery with a new one.
for 5 seconds when the smart key is
not in the vehicle and the door is
closed.
Always have the smart key with you.
4 88
Press brake pedal to start engine Shift to "P" position Press start button again
OHG045076L OHG045077L OHG045078L
If the ENGINE START/STOP button If you try to turn off the engine with- If you can not operate the ENGINE
changes to the ACC position twice out the shift lever in the P (Park) START/STOP button when there is a
by pressing the button repeatedly position, the ENGINE START/STOP problem with the ENGINE
without depressing the brake pedal, button changes to the ACC position. START/STOP button system, the
the warning illuminates on the LCD If the button is pressed once more it warning illuminates for 10 seconds
display for about 10 seconds to indi- will change to the ON position. The and the chime sounds to indicate
cate that you should depress the warning illuminates on the LCD dis- that you could start the engine by
brake pedal to start the engine. play for about 10 seconds to indicate pressing the ENGINE START/STOP
that you should press the ENGINE button once more.
START/STOP button with the shift The chime will stop if the ENGINE
lever in the P (Park) position to turn START/STOP button system works
off the engine. normally or the theft alarm system is
Also, the warning chime sounds for armed.
about 10 seconds. (if equipped) If the warning illuminates each time
you push the start/stop button, we
recommend that the system be
dealer.
4 89
Shift to "P" or "N" to start the Please press start button with key Check "Brake switch" fuse
engine
OHG045074L OHG045082L
OHG045079L
If you press the ENGINE START/ When the brake switch fuse is dis-
If you try to start the engine with the STOP button while the warning “Key connected, the warning illuminates
shift lever not in the P (Park) or N is not detected” illuminates the warn- for 10 seconds on the LCD display.
(Neutral) position, the warning illumi- ing “Press the start button with key” Replace the fuse with a new one. If
nates for about 10 seconds on the illuminates for 10 seconds on the that is not possible you can start the
LCD display. LCD display. Also, the immobilizer engine by pressing the ENGINE
You can also start the engine with indicator blinks for 10 seconds. START/STOP button for 10 seconds
the shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi- in ACC.
tion, but for your safety start the
engine with the shift lever in the P
(Park) position.
4 90
Door /Trunk open Sunroof open (if equipped) Illumination

OHG045085L OHG045249L OHG045313L
This indicator displays which door (or This warning message illuminates if The illumination intensity of the
trunk) is opened. you turn off the engine when the sun- instrument panel is shown when
roof is open. adjusting it with the illumination con-
trol switch.
4 91
Low washer fluid Parking assist warning Low Tire Pressure

OHG045087L OHG045086N OHG045246L
This warning light illuminates for 12 Displays the area an obstacle is This warning message illuminates if
seconds when the washer fluid detected while moving forward or the tire pressure is low with the
reservoir is nearly empty. Refill the rearward. Engine/Start button in ON position.
washer fluid as soon as possible.
For more details, refer to "Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
4 92
Turn on "FUSE SWITCH" Align steering wheel (if equipped) Steering wheel aligning is completed
(if equipped)
OHG045319L OHG045332L/OHG045244N
OHG045333L/OHG045243L
This warning message illuminates if This warning message illuminates if
the fuse switch located on the fuse you start the engine when the steer- If the steering wheel aligning is com-
box under the steering wheel is OFF. ing wheel is turned to more than 90 pleted after “Align steering wheel”
It means that you should turn the degrees to the left or right. warning message is displayed, this
fuse switch on. It means that you should turn the message is displayed for 2 seconds.
steering wheel and make the angle
For more details, refer to “Fuses” of the steering wheel be less than 30
in chapter 7. degrees.
4 93
Low Fuel Engine has overheated

OHG045527L OHG045256L
This warning message illuminates if This warning message illuminates

the fuel tank is nearly empty. when the engine coolant tempera-
- When the low fuel level warning ture is above 248°F (120°C). This
light is illuminated. means that the engine is overheated
- When the trip computer displays "--- and may be damaged.
mile (or km)" as distance to empty.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
Add fuel as soon as possible. to "Overheating" in chapter 6.
4 94
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

■ Type A
WARNING - Rear
parking
The rear parking assist system
is a supplementary function
only. The operation of the rear
parking assist system can be
affected by several factors
(including environmental condi-
tions). To avoid collision with
children, pedistrians, objects, or OHG040123
Sensors
Sensors ■ Type B
OHG045088 vehicles, the driver should
always check the area behind
The rear parking assist system
the vehicle before and while
assists the driver during reverse
backing up, otherwise serious
movement of the vehicle by chiming
injuries could occur.
if any object is sensed within a dis-
tance of 47 in. (120 cm) behind the
vehicle. This system is a supplemen-
tal system and it is not intended to
nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the OHG046301N
driver. The sensing range and
objects detectable by the back sen- Rear parking assist system
sors are limited. Whenever backing- OFF button
up, pay as much attention to what is To turn off the rear parking assist
behind you as you would in a vehicle system, push the button (the indica-
without a rear parking assist system. tor light will illuminate).
4 95
Operation of the rear parking Types of warning sound and indi- ✽ NOTICE
assist system cator • The indicator may differ from the
Operating condition illustration according to the objects
Types of warning sound Indicator or sensors status.
• This system will activate when
backing up with the ignition switch When an object is 47 in. to 24 • If the indicator blinks, have the
ON. in. (120 cm to 60 cm) from the system checked by an authorized
• The sensing distance while the rear bumper : Buzzer beeps HYUNDAI dealer.
rear parking assist system is in intermittently. • The actual indicator in the vehicle
operation is approximately 47 in. may be different from the illustra-
(120 cm). When an object is 24 in. to 12 tion.
• When more than two objects are in. (60 cm to 30 cm) from the
sensed at the same time, the clos- rear bumper : Buzzer beeps
est one will be recognized first. more frequently.
✽ NOTICE When an object is within 12

The parking assist system may not in. (30 cm) of the rear bumper
operate if the vehicle’s distance from : Buzzer beeps continuously.
the object is already less than
approximately 12 in (30 cm) when
the system is ON.
4 96
Non-operational conditions of The detecting range may decrease Rear parking assist system
rear parking assist system when: precautions
The rear parking assist system 1. The sensor is stained with foreign • The rear parking assist system may
may not operate properly when: matter such as snow or water. not sound sequentially depending
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It (The sensing range will return to on the speed and shapes of the
will operate normally when the normal when removed.) objects detected.
moisture has been cleared.) 2. Outside air temperature is • The rear parking assist system may
2. The sensor is covered with foreign extremely hot or cold. malfunction if the vehicle bumper
matter, such as snow or water, or height or sensor installation has
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will The following objects may not be been modified or damaged. Any
operate normally when the materi- recognized by the sensor: non-factory installed equipment or
al is removed or the sensor is no 1. Sharp or slim objects such as accessories may also interfere with
longer blocked.) ropes, chains or small poles. the sensor performance.
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces 2. Objects which tend to absorb the • The sensor may not recognize
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, sensor frequency such as clothes, objects less than 9.84 in. (25 cm)
gradient). spongy material or snow. from the sensor, or it may sense an
4. Objects generating excessive 3. Undetectable objects smaller than incorrect distance. Use caution.
noise (vehicle horns, loud motor- 40 in. (1 m) in height and narrower • When the sensor is frozen or
cycle engines, or truck air brakes) than 6 in. (14 cm) in diameter. stained with snow, dirt, or water,
are within range of the sensor. the sensor may be inoperative until
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists. the stains are removed using a soft
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile cloth.
phones are within range of the • Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor. sensor. Sensor damage could
7. The sensor is covered with snow. occur.
8. Trailer towing
4 97
This system can only sense objects Self-diagnosis

within the range and location of the WARNING - Objects When you shift the gear to the R
sensors; it can not detect objects in Pay close attention when the (Reverse) position and if one or more
other areas where sensors are not vehicle is driven close to of the below occurs you may have a
installed. Also, small or slim objects, objects on the road, particularly malfunction in the rear parking assist
such as poles or objects located pedestrians, and especially system.
between sensors may not be detect- children. Be aware that some • You do not hear an audible warning
ed by the sensors. objects may not be detected by sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
Always visually check behind the the sensors, due to the object’s mittently.
vehicle when backing up. distance, size or material, all of
Be sure to inform any drivers of the which can limit the effective-
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with ness of the sensor. To avoid col- • is displayed.
the system regarding the systems lisions with children, pedistri- (blinks)
capabilities and limitations. ans, objects, and vehicles,
always perform a visual inspec- If this occurs, have your vehicle
tion to make sure the vehicle is checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
clear of all obstructions before dealer as soon as possible.
moving the vehicle in any direc-
tion. Otherwise serious injuries ✽ NOTICE
could occur. Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants due to a rear parking assist
system malfunction. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
4 98
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Rearview WARNING - Backing &
camera using camera
The rear view camera is not a Never rely solely on the rear
safety device. It only serves to view camera when reversing.
assist the driver in identifying You must always view the area
objects directly behind the mid- behind you including looking
dle of the vehicle. The camera over both shoulders as well as
does NOT cover the complete continuously checking all three
area behind the vehicle. While rear view mirrors. Due to the dif-
the camera's display is general- ficulty of ensuring that the area
OHG043095A ly accurate, objects can be behind you remains clear,
The rearview camera will activate much closer than they appear in always back slowly and stop
when the back-up light is ON with the the display screen and can be immediately if you even suspect
ignition switch ON and the shift lever distorted in both size and pro- that a person, and especially a
in the R (Reverse) position. portion. child, might be behind you.
Otherwise serious injury or
This system is a supplemental sys- death could occur.
tem that shows behind the vehicle
through the display monitor while
backing-up.
Always keep the camera lens clean.
If the lens is covered with foreign
matter, the camera may not operate
normally.
4 99
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTING

FLASHER • You can operate the turn signals Battery saver function
when the hazard flasher is on. The • The purpose of this feature is to
hazard flasher will rework when prevent the battery from being dis-
you turn off the turn signals. charged. The system automatically
• The hazard flasher will stop if you turns off the parking lights when
push the switch one time while the the driver turns off the engine and
turn signals and the hazard flasher opens the driver-side door.
work simultaneously. To turn the • With this feature, the parking lights
hazard warning lights on again, will be turned off automatically if
push the switch a second time. the driver parks on the side of the
road at night.
OHG045517
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the engine is turned off, per-
The hazard warning flasher should form the following:
be used whenever you find it neces-
1) Open the driver-side door.
sary to stop the car in a hazardous
location. When you must make such 2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
an emergency stop, always pull off ON again using the light switch
the road as far as possible. on the steering column.
The hazard warning lights are turned
on by pushing in the hazard switch. CAUTION
This causes all turn signal lights to If the driver gets out of the vehi-
blink. The hazard warning lights will cle through other doors, the bat-
operate even though the key is not in tery saver function does not
the ignition switch. operate.
To turn the hazard warning lights off, Therefore, it causes the battery
push the switch a second time. to be discharged. In this case,
make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
4 100
Headlight (Headlamp) escort Headlight (Headlamp) welcome Daytime running light

function function Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can
If you turn the ignition switch to the When the headlight is in the ON or make it easier for others to see the
ACC or OFF position with the head- AUTO position and all doors (and front of your vehicle during the day.
lights ON, the headlights (and/or trunk) are closed and locked, if you DRL can be helpful in many different
parking light) remain on for about 5 press the door unlock button on the driving conditions, and it is especially
minutes. However, if the driver’s door smart key, the headlights (and/or helpful after dawn and before sunset.
is opened and closed, the headlights parking light) will come on for about
(and/or parking light) turn off after 15 15 seconds. At this time, if you press • The DRL system turns ON when:
seconds. the door lock or unlock button, the 1. The light switch is in the AUTO
The headlights (and/or parking light) headlights (and/or parking light) will light position.
can be turned off by pressing the turn off immediately.
2. The light switch is in the Parking
lock button on the smart key twice or light position.
turning the light switch to the OFF or You can activate or deactivate this
Parking light position. feature. Refer to “User Settings
Mode” in this section. • The DRL system turns OFF when:
You can activate or deactivate this 1. The multifunction switch is in the
feature. Refer to “User Settings DRL OFF position.
Mode” in this section. 2. The headlights are ON.
3. The turn signal is ON. (the blink-
ing side of the DRL will turn off)
4. The hazard warning light is ON.
5. The parking brake is applied.
6. Engine stops.
4 101
OHG041110A OHG041111A OHG041112A
Lighting control Parking light position ( ) Headlight position ( )

The light switch has a Headlight and When the light switch is in the park- When the light switch is in the head-
a Parking light position. ing light position, the position, light position, the head, position and
To operate the lights, turn the knob at license and instrument panel lights license plate lights are ON.
the end of the control lever to one of are ON and the position light indica- The ignition switch must be in the ON
the following positions: tor is ON. position to turn on the headlights.
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
4 102
• Never place anything over sensor

(1) located on the instrument
panel. This will ensure better auto-
light system control.
• Do not clean the sensor using a
window cleaner. The cleaner may
leave a light film which could inter-
fere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of metallic coating on
the front windshield, the Auto light
OHG041113A system may not work properly. OHG041115A
Auto light position High beam operation
When the light switch is in the AUTO To turn on the high beam headlights,
light position, the parking lights and push the lever away from you. Pull it
headlights will be turned ON or OFF back for low beams.
automatically depending on the The high beam indicator will light
amount of light outside the vehicle. when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
4 103
Operating condition
1. Place the light switch in the AUTO
position.
2. Turn on the high beam by pushing
the lever away from you.
The smart high beam ( ) indica-
tor will illuminate.
3. The Smart High Beam will turn on
when vehicle speed is above 28
mph (45km/h).
• If the lever is pushed away when
OHG041114A OHG045200N
the Smart High Beam is operat-
To flash the headlights, pull the lever Smart High Beam (if equipped) ing, the Smart High Beam will
towards you. It will return to the nor- The Smart High Beam is a system turn off and the high beam will
mal (low beam) position when that automatically adjusts the head- be on continuously. The smart
released. The headlight switch does lamp range (switches between high high beam ( ) indicator will
not need to be on to use the flashing beam and low beam) according to turn off.
feature. the brightness of other vehicles and • If the lever is pulled towards you
road conditions. when the Smart High Beam is
WARNING operating, the Smart High Beam
will turn off. The smart high
Do not use high beam when beam ( ) indicator will turn off.
there are surrounding vehicles.
Using high beam could obstruct 4. If the light switch is placed to the
the other driver's vision. headlamp position, the Smart
High Beam will turn off and the
low beam will be on continuously.
4 104
The high beam switches to low beam If an indicator stays on and does not
in the below conditions. flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
- When the Smart High Beam is off. the turn signal bulbs may be burned
- When the light switch is not in the out and will require replacement.
AUTO position.
- When the headlamp is detected
from the on-coming vehicle.
- When the tail lamp is detected
from the front vehicle.
- When the surrounding is bright
enough high beams are not need-
OHG041116A
ed.
- When streetlights or other lights Turn signals and lane change
are detected. signals
- When vehicle speed is below 22 The ignition switch must be on for the
mph (35 km/h). turn signals to function. To turn on
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A). Green arrow indicators on
the instrument panel indicate which
turn signal is operating. They will
self-cancel after a turn is completed.
If the indicator continues to flash
after a turn, manually return the lever
to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
4 105
One-touch turn signal To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog
To activate the one-touch turn signal light switch (1) to the OFF position or
move the turn signal lever slightly turn off the head lights.
and then release it. The lane change
signals will blink 3, 5 or 7 times. When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
You can activate or deactivate the electrical power. Only use the fog
One-touch turn signal function or lights when visibility is poor.
choose the number of blinking (3, 5,
or 7) from the User Settings Mode on
the LCD display.
OHG040117
✽ NOTICE Front fog light
If an indicator flash is abnormally Fog lights are used to provide
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned improved visibility and avoid acci-
out or have a poor electrical connec- dents when visibility is poor due to
tion in the circuit. fog, rain or snow etc.
The fog lights will turn on when :
1. The headlight is turned on.
2. The fog light switch is turned to the
ON position.
4 106
WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the igni-
tion switch is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
move the lever to the MIST
position and release it with
the lever in the OFF position.
The wipers will operate con-
tinuously if the lever is held in
this position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation.
OHG042118 OHG042121
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
Windshield wiper/washer the same wiping intervals. Use Windshield washers
A : Wiper speed control this mode in a light rain or mist. In the OFF position, pull the lever
· MIST – Single wipe To vary the speed setting, turn gently toward you to spray washer
the speed control knob. fluid on the windshield and to run the
· OFF – Off
LO : Normal wiper speed wipers 1-3 cycles.
· INT – Intermittent wipe
HI : Fast wiper speed Use this function when the wind-
· LO – Normal wiper speed
shield is dirty.
· HI – Fast wiper speed
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
B : Intermittent wipe time adjust- If the washer does not work, check
ment the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
C : Wash with brief wipes appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
4 107
CAUTION - Washer pump CAUTION - Wipers &

To prevent possible damage to Windshields
the washer pump, do not oper- • To prevent possible damage
ate the washer when the fluid to the wipers or windshield,
reservoir is empty. do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the
WARNING - Obscured wiper blades, do not use gaso-
visibility line, kerosene, paint thinner,
or other solvents on or near
Do not use the washer in freez- them.
ing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with • To prevent damage to the
the defrosters; the washer solu- wiper arms and other compo-
tion could freeze on contact nents, do not attempt to move
with the windshield and the wipers manually.
obscure your vision.
4 108
INTERIOR LIGHT
• When the door switch is
CAUTION pushed:
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the - The map lamp and room lamp
engine is not running. comes on when a door is opened
It may cause battery discharge. and closed. The lamps go out
after approximately 30 seconds.
- The map lamp and room lamp
comes on for approximately 30
WARNING - Interior light seconds when doors are
Do not use the interior lights unlocked with a smart key as long
when driving in the dark. The as the doors are not opened.
glare from the interior lights OHG045122
- The map lamp and room lamp will
may obstruct your view and Map lamp stay on for approximately 20 min-
cause an accident. • , : Push the switch (1) to utes if a door is opened with the
turn the map lamp on or ignition switch in the ACC or OFF
off. This light produces a position.
Automatic turn off function spot beam for conven- - The map lamp and room lamp will
(if equipped) ient use as a map lamp stay on continuously if the door is
The interior lights automatically turn at night or as a personal opened with the ignition switch in
off approximately 20 minutes after lamp for the driver and the ON position.
the ignition switch is turned off. the front passenger. - The map lamp and room lamp will
With the theft alarm system, the inte- go out immediately if the ignition
rior lights automatically turns off switch is changed to the ON posi-
approximately 5 seconds after the tion or all doors are locked.
system is in the armed stage. - Push the switch once more to
turn off the door switch.
4 109
■ Type A
• : Press this button to turn
the front and rear room
lamps on and off.
Mood lamp (2, if equipped)

- The mood lamp turns on when
the ENGINE START/STOP but-
ton is in the ACC or above posi-
tion.
OHG040123
- The mood lamp will turn off when ■ Type B
the ENGINE START/STOP but-
OHG045125
ton is in the OFF position.
Trunk room lamp
The trunk room lamp comes on for 20
minutes when the trunk is opened.
OHG040124
Room lamp
Press the button to turn the light on
or off.
CAUTION
Do not leave the lamp switches
on for an extended period of time
when the vehicle is not running.
4 110
OHG040126 OHG040127 OHG040128
Door courtesy lamp Glove box lamp Vanity mirror lamp

The door courtesy lamp comes ON The glove box lamp comes on when Opening the lid of the vanity mirror
when the door is opened to assist the glove box is opened. will automatically turn on the mirror
entering or exiting the vehicle. It also The parking lights or headlights must light.
serves as a warning to passing vehi- be ON for the glove box lamp to func-
cles that the vehicle door is opened. tion. CAUTION
To prevent unnecessary charg-
CAUTION ing system drain, close the van-
To prevent unnecessary charg- ity mirror cover after using the
ing system drain, close the mirror.
glove box securely after using
the glove box.
4 111
DEFROSTER
• To turn off the defroster, press the
CAUTION - Conductors rear window defroster button
To prevent damage to the con- again.
ductors bonded to the inside If there is heavy accumulation of
surface of the rear window, snow on the rear window, brush it off
never use sharp instruments or before operating the rear defroster.
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window. Side view mirror defroster
(if equipped)
✽ NOTICE If your vehicle is equipped with the
If you want to defrost and defog side view mirror defrosters, they will
OHG045223 operate at the same time you turn on
the front windshield, refer to
“Windshield defrosting and defog- Rear window defroster the rear window defroster.
ging” in this section. The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the rear window, while the engine is
running.
• To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the cen-
ter facia switch panel.
• The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when
the defroster is ON.
• The rear window defroster auto-
matically turns off after approxi-
mately 20 minutes or when the
ignition switch is turned off.
4 112
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (TYPE A)
1. Fan speed control knob

2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. OFF button
4. Driver’s temperature control switch
5. Passenger's temperature control switch
6. Front windshield defroster button
7. Rear window defroster button
8. Air conditioning button
9. Mode selection button
10. Air intake control button
11. SYNC button
OHG045516L
4 113
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side ✽ NOTICE

• To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of
the following:
- Mode selection switch
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster but-
ton (Press the button one more
time to deselect the front wind-
shield defroster function. The
OHG045216 OHG045212 'AUTO' sign will illuminate on
the information display once
Automatic heating and air condi- 2. Set the temperature to the desired again.)
tioning temperature. - Air intake control button
1. Push the AUTO button. - Fan speed control knob
The modes, fan speeds, air intake The selected function will be con-
and air-conditioning will be controlled trolled manually while other func-
automatically by setting the tempera- tions operate automatically.
ture. • For your convenience and to
improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
73°F (23°C).
4 114
Manual heating and air condi- 1. Start the engine.

tioning 2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
The heating and cooling system can tion.
be controlled manually by pushing To improve the effectiveness of
buttons other than the AUTO button. heating and cooling:
In this case, the system works - Heating:
sequentially according to the order of - Cooling:
buttons selected. 3. Set the temperature control to the
When pressing any button except the desired position.
AUTO button while using automatic 4. Set the air intake control to the
OHG040143 operation, the functions not selected outside (fresh) air position.
Never place anything over the sensor will be controlled automatically. 5. Set the fan speed control to the
located on the instrument panel to desired speed.
ensure better control of the heating 6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
and cooling system. the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
4 115
OHG045210
Mode selection
The mode selection switch controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
OHG045133
4 116
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of air
directed to the windshield and side
window defrosters.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
OHG045211 OHG045135
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor. Defrost-Level Instrument panel vents
Most of the air flow is directed to the The outlet vents can be opened or
windshield with a small amount of air closed separately using the thumb-
Face-Level (B, C, D, E, F) directed to the side window defrosters. wheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
Air flow is directed toward the upper ✽ NOTICE air delivery from these vents using
body and face. Additionally, each The defrost mode is more effective the vent control lever as shown.
outlet can be controlled to direct the when a warmer air temperature set-
air discharged from the outlet. ting is selected.
Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)

floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
4 117
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side Adjusting the driver and passenger

side temperature individually
• Press the “SYNC” button again to
adjust the driver and passenger
side temperature individually. The
illumination of button turns off.
• Operate the driver side tempera-
ture control to adjust the driver side
temperature.
• Operate the passenger side tem-
perature control to adjust the pas-
OHG045212 OHG045515N senger side temperature.
Temperature control Adjusting the driver and passenger
The temperature will increase to the side temperature equally Temperature conversion
maximum (HIGH) by pressing • Press the “SYNC” button to adjust If the battery has been discharged or
part of the switch. the driver and passenger side tem- disconnected, the temperature mode
The temperature will decrease to the perature equally. display will reset to Centigrade.
minimum (LOW) by pressing The passenger side temperature This is a normal condition. You can
part of the switch. will be set to the same temperature switch the temperature mode
When pressing the switch, the tem- as the driver side temperature. between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as
perature will increase or decrease by • Operate the driver side tempera- follows;
1°F (0.5 °C). When set to the lowest ture control. The driver and pas-
temperature setting, the air condi- senger side temperature will be While pressing the OFF button,
tioning may operate. adjusted equally. press the AUTO button for 3 seconds
or more. The display will change from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
4 118
Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air WARNING
position selected, air • Continuous use of the climate
from the passenger control system in the recircu-
compartment will be lated air position can cause
drawn through the heat- drowsiness or sleepiness, and
ing system and heated loss of vehicle control. Set the
or cooled according to air intake control to the outside
the function selected. (fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
Outside (fresh) air position • Continued climate control
OHG045219 With the outside (fresh) system operation in the recir-
Air intake control air position selected, air culated air position may allow
enters the vehicle from humidity to increase inside
This is used to select the outside
outside and is heated or vehicle which may fog the
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
cooled according to the glass and obscure visibility.
position.
function selected. • Do not sleep in a vehicle with
To change the air intake control posi-
the air conditioning or heating
tion, push the control button.
✽ NOTICE system on. It may cause seri-
ous harm or death due to a
While driving at high speed with the drop in the oxygen level
recirculation air position mode, and/or body temperature.
fresh air may automatically enter
the vehicle to provide ventilation of
the inside air.
4 119
It should be noted that prolonged

operation of the heating in recirculat-
ed air position will cause fogging of
the windshield and side windows and
the air within the passenger com-
partment will become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected, will result in exces-
sively dry air in the passenger com-
partment.
OHG045215 OHG045217
Fan speed control Air conditioning
The fan speed control knob allows Press the A/C button to turn the air
you to control the fan speed of the conditioning system on (indicator light
airflow in the vehicle. will illuminate).
To change the fan speed: Press the button again to turn the air
• Turn the knob to the right (+) to conditioning system off.
increase fan speed.
• Turn the knob to the left (-) to
decrease fan speed.
4 120
System operation Operation Tips

Ventilation • To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
1. Set the mode to the position. from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
2. Set the air intake control to the
set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
recirculated air position. Be sure to
3. Set the temperature control to the return the control to the fresh air
desired position. position when the irritation has
4. Set the fan speed control to the passed to keep fresh air in the
desired speed. vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
OHG045218 Heating • Air for the heating/cooling system
OFF mode 1. Set the mode to the position. is drawn in through the grilles just
2. Set the air intake control to the ahead of the windshield. Care
Press the OFF button to turn off the
outside (fresh) air position. should be taken that these are not
air climate control system. However,
3. Set the temperature control to the blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
you can still operate the mode and
desired position. other obstructions.
air intake buttons as long as the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the • To prevent interior fog on the wind-
desired speed. shield, set the air intake control to
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, the fresh air position and fan speed
turn the air conditioning system (if to the desired position, turn on the
equipped) on. air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
• If the windshield fogs up, set the temperature.
mode to the or position.
4 121
Air conditioning Air conditioning system operation tips • Operating the air conditioning sys-
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems • If the vehicle has been parked in tem in the recirculated air position
are filled with environmentally friend- direct sunlight during hot weather, provides maximum cooling, how-
ly R-134a refrigerant. open the windows for a short time ever, continual operation in this
1. Start the engine. Press the air to let the hot air inside the vehicle mode may cause the air inside the
conditioning button. escape. vehicle to become stale.
2. Set the mode to the position. • To help reduce moisture inside of After sufficient cooling has been
3. Set the air intake control to the the windows on rainy or humid achieved, switch back from the
outside air or recirculated air posi- days, decrease the humidity inside recirculated air to the fresh outside
tion. the vehicle by operating the air air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and conditioning system. • During cooling operation, you may
temperature control to maintain • During air conditioning system occasionally notice a misty air flow
maximum comfort. operation, you may occasionally because of rapid cooling and
notice a slight change in engine humid air intake. This is a normal
speed as the air conditioning com- system operation characteristic.
✽ NOTICE - Excessive A/C pressor cycles. This is a normal
When using the air conditioning sys- system operation characteristic.
tem, monitor the engine coolant • Use the air conditioning system
closely while driving up hills or in every month only for a few minutes
heavy traffic when outside tempera- to ensure maximum system per-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys- formance.
tem operation may cause engine
overheating and potential engine • When using the air conditioning
damage. Continue to use the blower system, you may notice clear water
fan but turn the air conditioning dripping (or even puddling) on the
system off if the engine coolant tem- ground under the passenger side
perature gauge indicates engine of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
overheating. tem operation characteristic.
4 122
✽ NOTICE Checking the amount of air

Outside air • Replace the filter according to the conditioner refrigerant and
Recirculated Maintenance Schedule. compressor lubricant
air If the vehicle is being driven in When the amount of refrigerant is
severe conditions such as dusty or low, the performance of the air con-
rough roads, more frequent air ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
conditioner filter inspections and has a negative impact on the air con-
changes are required. ditioning system.
Blower Evaporator core • When the air flow rate suddenly Therefore, if abnormal operation is
Climate control air filter Heater core
decreases, the system should be found, have the system inspected by
checked at an authorized an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OHM048209 HYUNDAI dealer.
Climate control air filter CAUTION - Compressor
The climate control air filter installed damage
behind the glove box filters the dust It is important that the correct
or other pollutants that come into the type and amount of oil and
vehicle from the outside through the refrigerant is used. Otherwise,
heating and air conditioning system. damage to the compressor and
If dust or other pollutants accumulate abnormal system operation may
in the filter over a period of time, the occur.
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind- The air conditioning system should be
shield even when the outside (fresh) serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
air position is selected. If this hap- dealer.
pens, have the climate control air fil-
ter replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
4 123
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (TYPE B)
1. Fan speed control knob

2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. OFF button
4. Driver’s temperature control switch
5. Passenger's temperature control switch
6. Front windshield defroster button
7. Rear window defroster button
8. Air conditioning button
9. Mode selection button
10. Air intake control button
11. Climate information screen selection
button
12. SYNC button
OHG045514L
4 124
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side ✽ NOTICE

• To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of
the following:
- Mode selection switch
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster but-
ton (Press the button one more
time to deselect the front wind-
shield defroster function. The
OHG045216 OHG045212 'AUTO' sign will illuminate on
the information display once
Automatic heating and air condi- 2. Set the temperature to the desired again.)
tioning temperature. - Air intake control button
1. Push the AUTO button. - Fan speed control knob
The modes, fan speeds, air intake The selected function will be con-
and air-conditioning will be controlled trolled manually while other func-
automatically by setting the tempera- tions operate automatically.
ture. • For your convenience and to
improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
73°F (23°C).
4 125
Manual heating and air condi- 1. Start the engine.

tioning 2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
The heating and cooling system can tion.
be controlled manually by pushing To improve the effectiveness of
buttons other than the AUTO button. heating and cooling:
In this case, the system works - Heating:
sequentially according to the order of - Cooling:
buttons selected. 3. Set the temperature control to the
When pressing any button except the desired position.
AUTO button while using automatic 4. Set the air intake control to the
OHG040143 operation, the functions not selected outside (fresh) air position.
Never place anything over the sensor will be controlled automatically. 5. Set the fan speed control to the
located on the instrument panel to desired speed.
ensure better control of the heating 6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
and cooling system. the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
4 126
OHG045210
Mode selection
The mode selection switch controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
OHG045133
4 127
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)

floor, with a small amount of air
directed to the windshield and side
window defrosters.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
OHG045211 OHG045135
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor. Defrost-Level Instrument panel vents
Most of the air flow is directed to the The outlet vents can be opened or
windshield with a small amount of air closed separately using the thumb-
Face-Level (B, C, D, E, F) directed to the side window defrosters. wheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
Air flow is directed toward the upper ✽ NOTICE air delivery from these vents using
body and face. Additionally, each The defrost mode is more effective the vent control lever as shown.
outlet can be controlled to direct the when a warmer air temperature set-
air discharged from the outlet. ting is selected.
Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)

floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
4 128
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side Adjusting the driver and passenger

side temperature individually
• Press the “SYNC” button again to
adjust the driver and passenger
side temperature individually. The
illumination of button turns off.
• Operate the driver side tempera-
ture control to adjust the driver side
temperature.
• Operate the passenger side tem-
perature control to adjust the pas-
OHG045212 OHG045515 senger side temperature.
Temperature control Adjusting the driver and passenger
The temperature will increase to the side temperature equally Temperature conversion
maximum (HIGH) by pressing • Press the “SYNC” button to adjust If the battery has been discharged or
part of the switch. the driver and passenger side tem- disconnected, the temperature mode
The temperature will decrease to the perature equally. display will reset to Centigrade.
minimum (LOW) by pressing The passenger side temperature This is a normal condition. You can
part of the switch. will be set to the same temperature switch the temperature mode
When pressing the switch, the tem- as the driver side temperature. between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as
perature will increase or decrease by • Operate the driver side tempera- follows;
1°F (0.5 °C). When set to the lowest ture control. The driver and pas-
temperature setting, the air condi- senger side temperature will be While pressing the OFF button,
tioning may operate. adjusted equally. press the AUTO button for 3 seconds
or more. The display will change from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
4 129
Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air WARNING
position selected, air • Continuous use of the climate
from the passenger control system in the recircu-
compartment will be lated air position can cause
drawn through the heat- drowsiness or sleepiness, and
ing system and heated loss of vehicle control. Set the
or cooled according to air intake control to the outside
the function selected. (fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
Outside (fresh) air position • Continued climate control
OHG045214 With the outside (fresh) system operation in the recir-
Air intake control air position selected, air culated air position may allow
enters the vehicle from humidity to increase inside
This is used to select the outside
outside and is heated or vehicle which may fog the
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
cooled according to the glass and obscure visibility.
position.
function selected. • Do not sleep in a vehicle with
To change the air intake control posi-
the air conditioning or heating
tion, push the control button.
✽ NOTICE system on. It may cause seri-
ous harm or death due to a
While driving at high speed with the drop in the oxygen level
recirculation air position mode, and/or body temperature.
fresh air may automatically enter
the vehicle to provide ventilation of
the inside air.
4 130
It should be noted that prolonged

operation of the heating in recirculat-
ed air position will cause fogging of
the windshield and side windows and
the air within the passenger com-
partment will become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected, will result in exces-
sively dry air in the passenger com-
partment.
OHG045215 OHG045217
Fan speed control Air conditioning
The fan speed control knob allows Press the A/C button to turn the air
you to control the fan speed of the conditioning system on (indicator light
airflow in the vehicle. will illuminate).
To change the fan speed: Press the button again to turn the air
• Turn the knob to the right (+) to conditioning system off.
increase fan speed.
• Turn the knob to the left (-) to
decrease fan speed.
4 131
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
OHG045218 OHG045220 Heating

OFF mode Climate information screen selec- 1. Set the mode to the position.
Press the OFF button to turn off the tion 2. Set the air intake control to the
air climate control system. However, Press the climate information screen outside (fresh) air position.
you can still operate the mode and selection button to display climate 3. Set the temperature control to the
air intake buttons as long as the igni- information on the screen. desired position.
tion switch is in the ON position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
4 132
Operation Tips Air conditioning Air conditioning system operation tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems • If the vehicle has been parked in
from entering the vehicle through are filled with environmentally friendly direct sunlight during hot weather,
the ventilation system, temporarily R-134a refrigerant. open the windows for a short time
set the air intake control to the 1. Start the engine. Press the air con- to let the hot air inside the vehicle
recirculated air position. Be sure to ditioning button. escape.
return the control to the fresh air 2. Set the mode to the position. • To help reduce moisture inside of
position when the irritation has 3. Set the air intake control to the out- the windows on rainy or humid
passed to keep fresh air in the side air or recirculated air position. days, decrease the humidity inside
vehicle. This will help keep the driv- the vehicle by operating the air
er alert and comfortable. 4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain conditioning system.
• Air for the heating/cooling system maximum comfort. • During air conditioning system
is drawn in through the grilles just operation, you may occasionally
ahead of the windshield. Care notice a slight change in engine
should be taken that these are not ✽ NOTICE - Excessive A/C speed as the air conditioning com-
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or When using the air conditioning sys- pressor cycles. This is a normal
other obstructions. tem, monitor the engine coolant system operation characteristic.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind- closely while driving up hills or in • Use the air conditioning system
shield, set the air intake control to heavy traffic when outside tempera- every month only for a few minutes
the fresh air position and fan speed tures are high. Air conditioning sys- to ensure maximum system per-
to the desired position, turn on the tem operation may cause engine formance.
air conditioning system, and adjust overheating and potential engine
damage. Continue to use the blower • When using the air conditioning
the temperature control to desired system, you may notice clear water
temperature. fan but turn the air conditioning
system off if the engine coolant tem- dripping (or even puddling) on the
perature gauge indicates engine ground under the passenger side
overheating. of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
4 133
• Operating the air conditioning sys- ✽ NOTICE

tem in the recirculated air position Outside air • Replace the filter according to the
provides maximum cooling, how- Maintenance Schedule.
Recirculated
ever, continual operation in this air If the vehicle is being driven in
mode may cause the air inside the severe conditions such as dusty or
vehicle to become stale. rough roads, more frequent air
After sufficient cooling has been conditioner filter inspections and
achieved, switch back from the changes are required.
recirculated air to the fresh outside Blower Evaporator core • When the air flow rate suddenly
air position. Climate control air filter Heater core
decreases, the system should be
• During cooling operation, you may checked at an authorized
occasionally notice a misty air flow OHM048209 HYUNDAI dealer.
because of rapid cooling and Climate control air filter
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic. The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind-
shield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, have the climate control air fil-
ter replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
4 134
■ Example You can find out which air condition-

ing refrigerant is applied your vehicle WARNING - Vehicles
at the label inside of the engine equipped with R-134a
room. Because the refriger-
Refer to section 8 for more detail ant is at very high
location of air conditioning refrigerant pressure, the air con-
label. ditioning system
should only be serv-
Checking the amount of air iced by trained and certified
conditioner refrigerant and technicians. It is important that
compressor lubricant the correct type and amount of
OHG045533N
When the amount of refrigerant is oil and refrigerant is used.
Air Conditioning refrigerant low, the performance of the air con- Otherwise, it may cause dam-
label ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also age to the vehicle and personal
❈ The actual Air Conditioning refrig- has a negative impact on the air con- injury.
erant label in the vehicle may differ ditioning system.
from the illustration. Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by The air conditioning system should be
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
Each symbols and specification on dealer.
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below ;
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
4 135
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

• For maximum defrosting, set the ■ Type A
WARNING - Windshield temperature control to the extreme
heating right/hot position and the fan speed
Do not use the or posi- control to the highest speed.
tion during cooling operation in • If warm air to the floor is desired
extremely humid weather. The while defrosting or defogging, set the
difference between the temper- mode to the floor-defrost position.
ature of the outside air and that • Before driving, clear all snow and ice
of the windshield could cause from the windshield, rear window,
the outer surface of the wind- outside rear view mirrors, and all
shield to fog up, causing loss of OHG045154
side windows.
visibility. In this case, set the ■ Type B
• Clear all snow and ice from the
mode selection knob or button hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
to the position and fan improve heater and defroster effi-
speed control knob or button to ciency and to reduce the probabili-
the lower speed. In addition, ty of fogging up the inside of the
briefly operate the windshield windshield.
wipers to clear any fog from the
outer surface of the windshield.
OHG045155
To defog inside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4 136
4. The air conditioning will be turned ■ Type A 4. The air conditioning will be turned
on according to the detected on according to the detected
ambient temperature and outside ambient temperature and outside
(fresh) air position will be selected (fresh) air position will be selected
automatically. automatically.
If the air conditioning and outside If the position is selected, lower
(fresh) air position are not selected fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
automatically, adjust the correspon- speed.
ding button manually. If the posi-
tion is selected, lower fan speed is Defogging logic
adjusted to a higher fan speed. OHG045157
■ Type B To reduce the probability of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning are con-
trolled automatically according to
certain conditions such as or
position. To cancel or return the
defogging logic, do the following.
OHG045158
To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot (HIGH) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4 137
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the
driver or passengers.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
• Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed while
OHG045159N
driving. Do not attempt to OHG041159A
place so many items in the
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON storage compartment that the Center console storage
position. storage compartment cover To open the center console storage,
2. Press the defrost button ( ). cannot close securely. pull up the lever (1).
3. While holding the air conditioning
button (A/C) pressed, press the air
intake control button at least 5
times within 3 seconds. WARNING - Flammable
materials
The indicator on the air intake control
button blinks 3 times with 0.5 second Do not store cigarette lighters,
of interval. It indicates that the defog- propane cylinders or other flam-
ging logic is canceled or returned to mable/explosive materials in the
the programmed status. vehicle. These items may catch
fire and/or explode if the vehicle
is exposed to hot temperature
If the battery has been discharged or for extended periods.
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
4 138
WARNING - Sunglass
holder
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Such objects
can be thrown from the holder
in the event of a sudden stop
or an accident, possibly injur-
ing the passengers in the
vehicle.
OHG041160A OHG045162 • Do not put the glasses
Glove box Sunglass holder forcibly into a sunglass holder
to prevent breakage or defor-
The glove box can be locked and To open the sunglass holder, press mation of glasses. It may
unlocked with the mechanical key (1). the cover and the holder will slowly cause personal injury if you
To open the glove box, push the but- open. Place your sunglasses in the try to open it forcibly when the
ton (2) and the glove box will auto- compartment door with the lenses glasses are jammed in holder.
matically open. Close the glove box facing out. Push to close.
after use.
Do not open the sunglass holder
while the vehicle is moving. The rear
WARNING view mirror of the vehicle can be
To reduce the risk of injury in an blocked by an open sunglass holder.
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
4 139
INTERIOR FEATURES
Cup holder ■ Front
WARNING - Hot liquids

Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion. If
the hot liquid spills, you may
burn yourself. Such a burn to
the driver could lead to loss of
control of the vehicle. OHG041164A
■ Rear
OHG041166A
Ashtray
To use the ashtray, open the cover. WARNING - Cans and
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it bottles
out. Keep cans or bottles out of
Do not use the vehicle’s ashtray as direct sun light and do not put
waste receptacles. them in a vehicle that is heated
up. It may explode.
WARNING - Ashtray use OHG040167

Putting lit cigarettes or matches Cups or small beverage cans may be
in an ashtray with other com- placed in the cup holders.
bustible materials may cause a
fire.
4 140
■ Front
CAUTION - Vanity mirror • Type A
lamp
Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvisor
to its original position after use.
If the vanity mirror is not closed
securely, the lamp will stay on
and could result in battery dis-
charge and possible sunvisor OHG041169A
• Type B
damage.
OHG040168
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2). OHG041190A
■ Rear
Adjust the sunvisor extension for-
ward or backward (3).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (4).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for
holding a tollgate ticket.
For your safety, do not block your
view when using the sunvisor.
OHG040170
Power outlet
4 141
The power outlet is designed to pro- Digital clock (if equipped)

vide power for mobile telephones or CAUTION Whenever the battery terminals or
other devices designed to operate • Make sure that the electric related fuses are disconnected, you
with vehicle electrical systems. The devices are plugged in secure- must reset the time.
devices should draw less than 10 ly. If not, it could cause a mal-
function of electric systems. Detailed information on setting the
amps with the engine running. clock is described in Audio system
• Use the power outlet only when the • If you use an electric device section 4.
engine is running and remove the with a battery, electric current
accessory plug after use. Using the may flow from the electric
accessory plug for prolonged peri- device into the vehicle and WARNING
ods of time with the engine off could may cause a malfunction of Do not adjust the clock while
cause the battery to discharge. electric systems. Only use driving. You may lose your
• Only use 12V electric accessories electric devices which could steering control and cause an
which are less than 10A in electric prevent inverse current. accident that results in severe
capacity. If not, it could lead to an personal injury or death.
overheated power outlet or electric
wiring in the vehicle and electric WARNING - Electric
systems may malfunction. shock
• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater Do not put fingers or objects
to the lowest operating level when (pin, coin, etc.) into a power out-
using the power outlet. let and do not touch with wet
• Close the cover when not in use. hands. You may get an electric
• Some electronic devices can cause shock.
electronic interference when
plugged into a vehicle’s power
outlet. These devices may cause
excessive audio static and malfunc-
tions in other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
4 142
OHG045222L OUN026348 OCM039200N

Clock with AVN system Clothes hanger Floor mat anchor(s)
(if equipped) To use the hanger, pull down the When using a floor mat on the front
You can set the clock by using the inner portion of the assist handle. floor carpet, make sure it attaches to
Audio or Navigation. the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehi-
cle. This keeps the floor mat from
GPS Time check WARNING sliding forward.
The clock is automatically updated Do not hang other objects such
through the navigation system. as hangers or hard objects WARNING - Aftermarket
except clothes. Also, do not put Floor mat
GPS Time non-check heavy, sharp or breakable
objects in the clothes pockets. Do not install aftermarket floor
The clock can be manually adjusted. mats that are not capable of
In an accident or when the cur-
1. Select the "Setup" key on the being securely attached to the
tain air bag is inflated, it may
Head Unit. vehicle's floor mat anchors.
cause vehicle damage or per- Unsecured floor mats can inter-
2. Select the "Clock". sonal injury.
3. Select the "Date/Time Settings". fere with pedal operation and
cause an accident that results
For more details, please refer to in severe personal injury, death,
the manual that was supplied with or property damage.
your vehicle.
4 143
The following must be observed when ■ Type A
installing ANY floor mat to the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle's
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that can-
not be firmly attached to the vehi-
cle's floor mat anchors. OHG041174A
• Do not stack floor mats on top of ■ Type B
one another (e.g. all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor OHG041176A
mat). Only a single floor mat should The rear curtain will fold automatical-
be installed in each position. ly when you shift the shift lever into R
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was (Reverse) and unfold automatically
manufactured with driver's side floor when you shift the shift lever from R
mat anchors that are designed to (Reverse) into P (Park).
securely hold the floor mat in place. After the rear curtain is folded by
OHG046302N
To avoid any interference with pedal shifting the shift lever into R
operation, HYUNDAI recommends Rear curtain (if equipped) (Reverse) and you drive more than
that only the HYUNDAI floor mat To fold the rear curtain, press the 12 mph (20 km/h) with the shift lever
designed for use in your vehicle be button. To unfold the rear curtain, in D (Drive), the rear curtain will
installed. press the button again. unfold automatically.
CAUTION
Do not pull or fold the rear cur-
tain by hand. It could cause
motor failure.
4 144
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
CAUTION - Antenna
• Do not clean inside of the rear
window glass with a cleaner
or use a scraper to remove
foreign deposits as this may
cause damage to the antenna
elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings
such as Ni, Cd, and so on.
These can disturb receiving
OHG040177 OHG045178/Q AM and FM broadcast signals.
Side curtain (if equipped) Shark fin antenna (1)
To use the side curtain: The shark fin antenna will receive the
1. Lift the curtain by the hook (1). transmit data.
2. Hang the curtain on both sides of
the hook. Glass antenna (2)
Your vehicle uses a glass antenna to
receive both AM and FM signals.
4 145
VOLUME (VOL +/-) (1) RADIO mode

• Push up the lever to increase vol- It will function as the PRESET STA-
ume. TION select buttons.
• Push down the lever to decrease
volume. Single CD Player mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2) DOWN button.
The SEEK/PRESET button has dif-
ferent functions base on the system MODE (3)
mode. Press the MODE button to select
OHG040179L For the following functions the button Radio, CD (Compact Disc), USB,
should be pressed for 0.8 seconds or AUX or Phone.
Steering wheel audio control more.
The steering wheel audio control but- MUTE (4)
ton is installed for your convenience.
Only press one button at a time; the RADIO mode • Press the MUTE button to cancel
control buttons may not operate It will function as the AUTO SEEK the sound.
when multiple buttons are pressed. select button. It will SEEK until you • Press the MUTE button again to
release the button. activate the sound.
Single CD Player mode Detailed information for audio control

It will function as the FF/REW button. buttons are described in the seper-
ately supplied Navigation System
If the SEEK/PRESET button is manual.
pressed for less than 0.8 seconds, it
will work as follows in each mode.
4 146
Audio system Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

✽ NOTICE A compatible phone can be used to
Pair/Connect the Bluetooth® Wireless
• If you install an aftermarket HID Technology.
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio
and electronic device may mal- Detailed information for the Bluetooth®
function. Wireless Technology is described in
• Prevent chemicals such as per- the seperately supplied Navigation
fume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, System manual.
hand cleaner, and air freshener
from contacting the interior parts Navigation system
because they may cause damage The navigation system ascertains OHG046190N
or discoloration. the present position of your vehicle
by using information from satellites Aux, USB and iPod® port
and guides you to the place you If your vehicle has an aux, USB (uni-
assign as the destination. versal serial bus) port or iPod® port,
Detailed information for the navigation you can use an aux port to connect
system is described in the separately audio devices, a USB port to plug in
supplied Navigation System manual. a USB and an iPod® port to plug in
an iPod®.
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of
the portable audio device.
❈ iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
4 147
How vehicle audio works This can be due to factors, such as AM reception
the distance from the radio station,
FM reception closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
¢ ¢ ¢
¢ ¢¢ ¢ ¢¢
JBM002
JBM001
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
AM and FM radio signals are broadcasts. This is because AM radio
cast from transmitter towers located waves are transmitted at low fre-
around your city. They are intercept- quencies. These long distance,low
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi- frequency radio waves can follow the
cle. This signal is then processed by curvature of the earth rather than
the radio and sent to your vehicle travelling straight. In addition, they
speakers. curve around obstructions resulting
When a strong radio signal has in better signal coverage.
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some cas-
es the signal coming to your vehicle
may not be strong and clear.
4 148
FM radio station
¢ ¢¢
JBM003 JBM004 JBM005

FM broadcasts are transmitted at • Fading - As your vehicle moves • Station Swapping - As an FM sig-
high frequencies and do not bend to away from the radio station, the nal weakens, another more power-
follow the earth's surface. Because signal will weaken and sound will ful signal near the same frequency
of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade. When this occurs, may begin to play. This is because
begin to fade within short distances we suggest that you select another your radio is designed to lock onto
from the station. Also, FM signals are stronger station. the clearest signal. If this occurs,
easily affected by buildings, moun- • Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or select another station with a
tains, and obstructions. This can large obstructions between the stronger signal.
lead to undesirable or unpleasant lis- transmitter and your radio can dis- • Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
tening conditions which might lead turb the signal causing static or signals being received from sever-
you to believe a problem exists with fluttering noises to occur. Reducing al directions can cause distortion
your radio. The following conditions the treble level may lessen this or fluttering. This can be caused by
are normal and do not indicate radio effect until the disturbance clears. a direct and reflected signal from
trouble: the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
4 149
XM RADIO MODE • If you are driving in a valley where NOTE:

the surrounding hills or peaks There may also be additional
block the signal from the satellite. unforeseen circumstances leading
Features of your vehicle • If you are driving on a mountain to reception problems with the
Satellite radio reception road where is the signal blocked by XM™ satellite radio signal.
mountains. Advisory Messages, such as ‘CH
Unavailable’ may occur when start-
ing XM Radio.
SATELLITE1
You may experience difficulties in SATELLITE2

receiving XM™ satellite radio signals
in the following situations. • If you are driving in an area with tall
• If you are driving in a tunnel or a trees that block the signal (30 ft.
covered parking area. /10m or more), for example on an
road that goes through a dense for-
• If you are driving beneath the top est.
level of a multi-level freeway.
• The signal can become weak in
• If you are driving under a bridge. some areas that are not covered
• If you are driving next to a tall vehi- by the XM™ repeater network.
cle (such as a truck or a bus) that
blocks the signal.
4 150
Using a cellular phone or a two- Caring for disc

way radio WARNING
• If the temperature inside the car is
When a cellular phone is used inside Do not use a cellular phone too high, open the car windows to
the vehicle, noise may be produced while driving. Stop at a safe ventilate before using the system.
from the audio system. This does not location to use a cellular phone.
• It is illegal to copy and use
mean that something is wrong with MP3/WMA files without permis-
the audio equipment. In such a case, sion. Use CDs that are created
try to operate mobile devices as far only by lawful means.
from the audio equipment as possi-
ble. • Do not apply volatile agents, such
as benzene and thinner, normal
cleaners and magnetic sprays
CAUTION made for analogue disc onto CDs.
When using a communication
system such as a cellular phone • To prevent the disc surface from
or a radio set inside the vehicle, getting damaged, hold CDs by the
a separate external antenna edges or the center hole only.
must be fitted. When a cellular • Clean the disc surface with a piece
phone or a radio set is used of soft cloth before playback (wipe
with an internal antenna alone, it from the center to the outside
it may interfere with the vehi- edge).
cle's electrical system and • Do not damage the disc surface or
adversely affect safe operation attach pieces of sticky tape or
of the vehicle. paper.
• Make certain only CDs are insert-
ed into the CD player (Do not insert
more than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use
to protect them from scratches or
dirt.
4 151
• Depending on the type of CD- NOTE:

R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may Order of playing files (folders) :
not operate normally according to
the manufacturing companies. In 1. Song playing order : to
such circumstances, continued sequentially.
use may cause malfunctions to 2. Folder playing order :
your audio system. ❋ If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.
✽ NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy Protected
Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio
CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
that inabilities to properly play a
copy protected CD may indicate
that the CD is defective, not the CD
player.
4 152
WARNING (Continued) CAUTION

• Do not stare at the screen • Please refrain from use if the • Operating the device while
while driving. Staring at the screen is blank or no sound driving could lead to acci-
screen for prolonged periods can be heard as these signs dents due to a lack of atten-
of time could lead to traffic may indicate product mal- tion to external surroundings.
accidents. function. Continued use in First park the vehicle before
such conditions could lead to operating the device.
• Do not disassemble, assem- accidents(fires, electric
ble, or modify the audio sys- shock) or product malfunc- • Adjust the volume to levels
tem. Such acts could result in tions. that allow the driver to hear
accidents, fire, or electric sounds from outside of the
shock. • Do not touch the antenna dur- vehicle. Driving in a state
ing thunder or lightening as where external sounds cannot
• Using the phone while driving such acts may lead to light-
may lead to a lack of attention be heard may lead to acci-
ning induced electric shock. dents.
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of • Do not stop or park in park- • Pay attention to the volume
accidents. Use the phone ing-restricted areas to operate setting when turning the
feature after parking the vehi- the product. Such acts could device on. A sudden output of
cle. lead to traffic accidents. extreme volume upon turning
• Heed caution not to spill water • Use the system with the vehi- the device on could lead to
or introduce foreign objects cle ignition turned on. hearing impairment. (Adjust
into the device. Such acts Prolonged use with the igni- the volume to a suitable levels
could lead to smoke, fire, or tion turned off could result in before turning off the device.)
product malfunction. battery discharge. (Continued)
(Continued)
4 153
(Continued) (Continued)
• If you want to change the posi- • When cleaning the device,
tion of device installation, make sure to turn off the
please inquire with your place device and use a dry and
of purchase or service mainte- smooth cloth. Never use
nance center. Technical tough materials, chemical
expertise is required to install cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
or disassemble the device. benzene, thinners, etc.) as
• Turn on the car ignition before such materials may damage
using this device. Do not oper- the device panel or cause col-
ate the audio system for long or/quality deterioration
periods of time with the igni- • Do not place beverages close
tion turned off as such opera- to the audio system. Spilling
tions may lead to battery dis- beverages may lead to system
charge. malfunction.
• Do not subject the device to • In case of product malfunc-
severe shock or impact. Direct tion, please contact your place
pressure onto the front side of of purchase or After Service
the monitor may cause dam- center.
age to the LCD or touch • Placing the audio system
screen. within an electromagnetic
(Continued) environment may result in
noise interference.
4 154
✽ NOTICE - USING THE (Continued) (Continued)

DISCS • When using CD-R/CD-RW • Copy-protected CDs such as S-
• This device has been manufac- discs, differences in disc reading type CDs may not function in
tured to be compatible with and playing times may occur the device. DATA discs cannot
software bearing the following depending on the disc manufac- be played. (However, such discs
logo marks. turer, production method and may still operate but will do so
• Do not clean discs with chemical the recording method as used by abnormally.)
solutions, such as record sprays, the user. • Do not use abnormally shaped
antistatic sprays, antistatic liq- • Clean fingerprints and dust off discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octa-
uids, benzene, or thinners. the disc surface (coated side) gon-shaped) as such discs could
• After using a disc, put the disc with a soft cloth. lead to malfunctions.
back in its original case to pre- • The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs • If the disc is straddled on the
vent disc scratches. attached with labels may result disc slot without removal for 10
• Hold discs by their edges or in disc slot jams or difficulties in seconds, the disc will automati-
within the center hole to prevent disc removal. Such discs may cally be re-inserted into the disc
damages to disc surfaces. also result in noise while play- player.
• Do not introduce foreign sub- ing. • Only genuine audio CDs are
stances into the disc insert/eject • Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may supported. Other discs may
slot. Introducing foreign sub- not properly operate depending result in recognition failure (e.g.
stances could damage the device on the disc manufacturer, pro- copy CD-R, CDs with labels)
interior. duction method and the record
• Do not insert two discs simulta- method as used by the user. If
neously. problems persist, trying using a
(Continued) different CD as continued use
may result in malfunctions.
• The performance of this prod-
uct may differ depending on the
CD-RW Drive Software.
(Continued)
4 155
✽ NOTICE - USING THE USB (Continued) (Continued)

DEVICE • Some USB devices may not be • Do not use the USB I/F to
• Connect the USB device after supported due to compatibility charge batteries or USB acces-
turning on the engine. The USB issues. sories that generate heat. Such
device may become damaged if • Avoid contact between the USB acts may lead to worsened per-
it is already connected when the connector with bodily parts or formance or damage to the
ignition is turned on.The USB foreign objects. device.
device may not operate properly • Repeated connecting/discon- • The device may not recognize
if the car ignition is turned on or necting of USB devices within the USB device if separately
off with the USB device connect- short periods of time may result purchased USB hubs and exten-
ed. in product malfunction. sion cables are being used.
• Heed caution to static electricity • A strange noise may occur when Connect the USB directly with
when connecting/disconnecting disconnecting the USB. the multimedia terminal of the
USB devices. • Make sure to connect/discon- vehicle.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not nect external USB devices with • When using mass storage USB
be recognized when connected the audio power turned off. devices with separate logical
as an external device. • The amount of time required to drives, only files saved to the
• When connecting an external recognize the USB device may root drive can be played.
USB device, the device may not differ depending on the type, • Files may not properly operate
properly recognize the USB is in size or file formats stored in the if application programs are
some states. USB. Such differences in time installed to the USBs.
• Only products formatted with are not indications of malfunc- • The device may not operate nor-
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will tions. mally if MP3 Players, cellular
be recognized. • The device only supports USB phones, digital cameras, or oth-
• This device recognizes USB devices used to play music files. er electronic devices (USB
devices formatted in FAT • USB images and videos are not devices not recognized as
12/16/32 file formats. This supported. portable disk drives) are con-
device does not recognize files in (Continued) nected with the device.
NTFS file format. (Continued)
(Continued)
4 156
• Charging through the USB may • Avoid use of USB
not work for some mobile memory products
devices. that can also be used
• The device may not support as key chains or
normal operation when using a mobile phone acces-
USB memory type besides sories. Use of such products may
(Metal Cover Type) USB cause damage to the USB jack.
Memory. • Connecting an MP3 device or
• The device may not support phone through various chan-
normal operation when using nels, such as AUX/BT or Audio/
formats such as HDD Type, CF, USB mode may result in pop
or SD Memory. noises or abnormal operation.
• The device will not support files • USB memory without the certi-
locked by DRM (Digital Rights fication mark may not be recog-
Management.) nized.
• USB memory sticks used by
connecting an Adaptor (SD
Type or CF Type) may not be
properly recognized.
• The device may not operate
properly when using USB HDDs
or USBs subject to connection
failures caused by vehicle vibra-
tions. (e.g. i-stick type)
(Continued)
4 157
✽ NOTICE - USING THE iPod® (Continued) (Continued)

DEVICE • When the EQ features of an • If your iPhone is connected to
• iPod® is a registered trademark external device, such as the both the Bluetooth® Wireless
of Apple Inc. iPod, and the audio system are Technology and USB, the sound
• In order to use the iPod while both active, EQ effects could may not be properly played. In
operating the keys, you must use overlap and cause sound deteri- your iPhone, select the Dock
a dedicated iPod cable. (the oration and distortion. connector or Bluetooth®
cable that is supplied when pur- Whenever possible, turn off the Wireless Technology to change
chasing iPod/iPhone products) EQ feature within the external the sound output (source).
• If the iPod is connected to the device upon use by connecting • iPod mode cannot be operated
vehicle while it is playing, a high with the audio system. when the iPod cannot be recog-
pitch sound could occur for • Noise may occur when an iPod nized due to versions that do not
approximately 1-2 seconds or AUX device is connected. support communication proto-
immediately after connecting. If When such devices are not cols.
possible, connect the iPod to the being used, disconnect the • For fifth generation iPod Nano
vehicle with the iPod device for storage. devices, the iPod may not be
stopped/paused. • When the iPod or AUX device recognized when the battery
• During ACC ON state, connect- power is connected to the power level is low. Please charge the
ing the iPod through the iPod jack, playing the external device iPod for use.
cable will charge the iPod may result in noise. In such cas- • Search/play orders shown with-
through the car audio system. es, disconnect the power connec- in the iPod device may differ
• When connecting with the iPod tion before use. with the orders shown within
cable, make sure to fully insert • Skipping or improper operation the audio system.
the jack to prevent communica- may occur depending on the • If the iPod malfunctions due to
tion interference. characteristics of your an iPod device defect, reset the
(Continued) iPod/Phone device. iPod and try again. (To learn
(Continued) more, refer to your iPod manual)
(Continued)
4 158
(Continued) ✽ NOTICE - USING THE (Continued)

• Some iPods may not sync with the Bluetooth® Wireless • When returning to Bluetooth®
System depending on its version. Technology Audio Mode Wireless Technology Audio mode
If the Media is removed before the • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology after ending a call, the mode may
Media is recognized, then the sys- Audio Mode can be used only not automatically restart in some
tem may not properly restore the when a Bluetooth® Wireless mobile phones.
previously operated mode. (iPad Technology phone has been con- • Receiving an incoming call or mak-
charging is not supported.) nected. ing an outgoing call while playing
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode will not be available Audio may result in audio interfer-
when connecting mobile phones ence.
that do not support this feature.
• While Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio is playing, if the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone is connected, then the music
will also stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while
playing Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio mode may
result in pop noises in some mobile
phones.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
streaming audio may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
(Continued)
4 159
✽ NOTICE - USING UPON (Continued) (Continued)

CONNECTING Bluetooth® - For more information on 3. Completely remove the mobile
Wireless Technology PHONE Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone battery, reboot, and then
• Before connecting the car audio features within your mobile, again.
system with the mobile phone, refer to your mobile phone user’s 4. Reboot the audio system and try
check to see that the mobile phone manual. again.
supports Bluetooth® Wireless 2. Turn off the Bluetooth® 5. Delete all paired devices, pair
Technology features. Wireless Technology feature in and try again.
• Even if the phone supports your car audio system. • The Handsfree call volume and
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology, - To turn off the Bluetooth® quality may differ depending on
the phone will not be found during Wireless Technology feature in the mobile phone.
device searches if the phone has your car audio system, go to • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
SETUP [Phone] and [turn off] features supported within the
been set to hidden state or the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology the Bluetooth® Wireless vehicle are as follows. Some fea-
power is turned off. Disable the Technology feature. tures may not be supported
hidden state or turn on the • Park the vehicle when connecting depending on your Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology the car audio system with your Wireless Technologydevice.
power prior to searching/connect- mobile phone. - Answering and placing
ing with the car audio system. • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
• If you do not want to automatical- connection may become intermit- Handsfree calls
ly connect your Bluetooth® tently disconnected in some - Menu operation during call
Wireless Technology phone, try mobile phones. Follow these steps (Switch to Private, Switch to call
the following. to try again. waiting, Outgoing volume)
1. Turn off the Bluetooth® feature 1. Turn the Bluetooth® Wireless - Download Call History
in your mobile phone. Technology function within the - Download Mobile Phone book
(Continued) mobile phone off/on and try - Phone book/Call History Auto
again. Download
2. Turn the mobile phone power (Continued)
Off/On and try again.
(Continued)
4 160
• It is possible to pair up to five • Only one function can be used at a
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology time between the Bluetooth®
devices to the car system. Wireless Technology Handsfree
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless and Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device can be connect- Technology audio. (While playing
ed at a time. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
• Other devices cannot be paired audio, streaming will end upon
while a Bluetooth® Wireless entering the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technologydevice is already con- Technology phone screen.)
nected. • If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless
• When a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device becomes dis-
Technology device is being con- connected for various reasons,
nected, the connection process such as being out of range, turning
cannot be canceled. the device OFF, or a Bluetooth®
• Only Bluetooth® Wireless Wireless Technology communica-
Technology Handsfree and tion error, Bluetooth® Wireless
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Technology devices are automati-
audio related features will operate cally searched and connected.
within this system. • Bluetooth® Handsfree is a feature
• Normal operation is possible only that enables drivers to practice
for devices that support Handsfree safe driving. Connecting the head
or audio features, such as a unit with a Bluetooth® phone
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology allows the user to conveniently
mobile phone or a Bluetooth® make calls, receive calls, and man-
Wireless Technology audio device. age the phone book. Before using
(Continued) the Bluetooth® , carefully read the
contents of thisuser’s manual.
4 161
✽ NOTICE - USING THE Voice (Continued)

Recognition - When driving on rugged and
• When using the voice recognition uneven roads
feature, only commands listed - During severe rain (heavy rains,
within the user's manual are sup- windstorms)
ported. • Phone related voice commands
• Be aware that during the opera- can be used only when a
tion of the voice recognition sys- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
tem, pressing any key other than device is connected.
the key or touching the screen • When making calls by stating a
will terminate voice recognition name, the corresponding contact
mode. must be downloaded and stored
• For superior voice recognition within the audio system.
performance, position the micro- • After downloading the Bluetooth®
phone used for voice recognition Wireless Technology phone book,
above the head of the driver’s seat it takes some times to convert the
and maintain a proper position phone book data into voice infor-
when saying commands. mation. During this time, voice
• Within the following situations, recognition may not properly
voice recognition may not function operate.
properly due to external sound. • Pronounce the voice commands
- When the windows and sunroof naturally and clearly as if in a nor-
are open mal conversation.
- When the wind of the cooling /
heating device is strong
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
(Continued)
4 162
■ CD Player : AC1B4HGAN, AC1B4HGGS
4 163
COMPONENT NAMES AND (2) RADIO (7) SEEK , TRACK

FUNCTIONS Converts to Radio (FM, AM, XM) When pressed shortly (under 0.8
mode. seconds).
Each time this key is pressed, the - FM, AM mode : plays previous/next
Head Unit mode is changed in order of FM1, frequency.
FM2, AM, XM1, XM2, XM3.
- XM mode : plays previous/next
channel.
(3) MEDIA - CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode :
Starts Media mode. changes the track, file.
Each time this key is pressed, the When pressed and held (over 0.8
mode is changed in order of CD, seconds).
USB (iPod), AUX, My Music, BT - FM, AM mode : continuously
Audio. changes the frequency until the
key is released and plays the cur-
(4) PHONE rent frequency.
Converts to Phone mode. - XM mode : continuously changes
the channel until the key is
released and plays the current
(5) SETUP channel.
(1) (EJECT) Converts to Setup mode. - CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode :
Press to insert or eject disc. rewinds or fast forwards the track
When press and held(3seconds) : (6) PWR/VOL knob or file.
emergency eject. - During a Handsfree call, controls
Volume : Turn left/right to control
volume. the call volume.
4 164
(9) CLOCK
Displays the time/date/day.
Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds)to setting the Clock/Calendar
screen. (14) 1 ~ 6 (Preset)
- Radio mode : saves a frequency or
(10) FOLDER , FOLDER receives saved frequencies.
- CD MP3, USB mode : Folder - MEDIA mode : press the 1 RPT
Search key to repeat and 2 RDM key to
- XM mode: Category Search play in random order (shuffle).
(11) DISP
Turns the monitor display on/off.
(8) SCAN
- FM, AM mode : previews all receiv- (12) MENU
able broadcasts for 5 seconds
each. Displays supported menus within
each mode.
- XM mode : previews all receivable
broadcasts for 10 seconds each.
- CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode : (13) TUNE knob
previews each song (file) for 10 - FM, AM mode : turn to change
seconds each. broadcast frequencies.
- CD, USB, iPod mode : turn to
search tracks/channels/files.
4 165
Steering wheel remote con- (2) SEEK (3) MODE

troller • When pressed shortly (under 0.8 Each time this key is pressed, the
seconds). mode is changed in order of FM1,
- FM, AM, XM mode : searches FM2, AM, XM1, XM2, XM3, CD,
broadcast frequencies saved to USB(iPod), AUX, My Music, BT
presets. Audio.
- CD, USB, iPod, My Music, BT If the media is not connected or a
Audio mode : changes the track, disc is not inserted, corresponding
file. modes will be disabled.
• When pressed and held (over 0.8 Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds). seconds) to turn the audio system
on/off.
- FM, AM, XM mode : automatically
searches broadcast frequencies When power is off, press the key to
and channels. turn power back on.
(1) VOLUME - CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode :

rewinds or fast forwards the track (4) MUTE
Used to control volume. or file. Mutes audio volume.
4 166
(5) (6) (7)

• When pressed shortly. Ends phone call. • When pressed shortly
- When pressed in the phone - Starts voice recognition
screen, displays call history - When selecting during a voice
screen. prompt, stops the prompt and
- When pressed in the dial screen, converts to voice command wait-
makes a call. ing state
- When pressed in the incoming • When pressed and held (over 0.8
call screen, answers the call. seconds)
- When pressed during call wait- - Ends voice recognition
ing, switches to waiting call (Call
Waiting).
• When pressed and held (over 0.8
seconds).
- When pressed in the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
wait mode, redials the last call.
- When pressed during a
Handsfree call, switches call
back to mobile phone (Private).
- When pressed while calling on
the mobile phone, switches call
back to Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Handsfree (Operates
only when Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Handsfree is con-
nected).
4 167
RADIO MODE (1) Mode Display (5) Preset Display

Displays currently operating mode. Displays saved presets.
Basic Mode Screen
(2) Frequency (6) A.Store(Auto Store)
Displays the current frequency. Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
(3) Preset
Displays currently playing preset
number [1] ~ [6].
(4) MENU
Displays Radio menus.
4 168
Switching to Radio Mode ✽ NOTICE Using Radio Mode

If the RADIO key is pressed with the
system power off, then the power
Pressing the RADIO key will change Selecting Presets
will turn on and the most recently
the operating mode in order of FM1 Press the MENU key Select Preset
played broadcast will be played.
➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3.
Searching Radio Frequencies
Using Seek
Press the SEEK , TRACK key to
play the previous/next frequency.
Using TUNE
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within frequency.
SETUP [Display], then pressing the • FM : Increases/decreased by
RADIO key will display the Radio 200kHz
mode pop up screen. • AM : Increases/decreased by
10kHz
Use TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the TUNE knob to
select.
The 6 presets are displayed.
Press the 1 ~ 6 key to play the
desired preset.
4 169
Saving Presets ✽ NOTICE

While Auto Store is operating,
selecting the A.Store button again
will cancel the function and restore
the previous frequency.
Scan
Press the SCAN key to scan all
radio frequencies.
Press and hold the SCAN key (over
0.8 seconds) to scan preset buttons.
After selecting the frequency Press
and hold the desired preset 1 ~ • Scan All :Scans frequencies with
6 key. superior reception for 5 seconds
each.
A 'beep' will sound and the frequen-
cy is saved to the selected preset • Preset Scan : Scans broadcasts
button. saved to presets for 5 seconds
each.
Once scan is complete, the previous-
Auto Store ly playing frequency is restored.
After pressing the MENU key
Select the A.Store button to auto-
matically save receivable frequen- During Scan, pressing the SCAN
cies to Preset buttons. key again will cancel the scan opera-
tion and restore the previously
played frequency.
A total of 18 frequencies with six pre-
set frequencies each for FM1 / FM2 /
AM modes can be saved.
4 170
XM RADIO MODE (1) Mode Display

Displays currently operating mode.
Basic Mode Screen
(2) Channel Information
Displays the category, channel num-
ber, channel name, artist and song
title.
(3) Preset
Displays currently playing preset
number [1] ~ [6].
(4) MENU
Displays XM Radio menus.
(5) Preset Display

Displays saved presets.
4 171
Using SEEK Selecting Presets Saving Presets

TRACK
Press the SEEK , keys to Press the MENU key Select Preset
play the previous/next channel.
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Using Tune
Press the TUNE knob to search
all channels. After selecting the channel Press
and hold the desired preset 1 ~
6 key.
Searching Categories A 'beep' will sound and the channel
Select the category by using the is saved to the selected preset but-
FOLDER ,
FOLDER
keys and press the ton.
TUNE knob to select.
The 6 preset buttons are displayed.

Press the 1 ~ 6 key to play the
desired preset.
Channels for the selected category

are played.
4 172
SCAN
Press the SCAN key to scan all
channels with superior reception for
10 seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous-
ly played channel will be restored.
During Scan, pressing the SCAN
key again will cancel the scan opera-
tion and restore the previously
played channel.
If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the cur-
rent category.
4 173
MEDIA MODE ✽ NOTICE

• If the MEDIA key is pressed with
Pressing the MEDIA key will change the system power off, then the
the operating mode in order of power will turn on and the most
CD➟USB(iPod)➟AUX➟My Music ➟ recently played media mode will
BT Audio. be played.
• The media mode pop up screen
can be displayed only when there
are two or more media modes
turned on.
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within

SETUP [Display], then pressing the
MEDIA key will display the Media
mode Pop-up screen.
Use the TUNE knob to move the

focus. Press the knob to select.
4 174
AUDIO CD MODE (1) Mode (8) Shuffle

Displays currently operating mode. Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
Basic Mode Screen
(2) Operation State (9) List
From Repeat / Shuffle / Scan, dis- Moves to the list screen.
plays the currently operating func-
tion.
(10) Info
Shows detailed information about
(3) Track Info the current track.
Displays information about the cur-
rent track.
(4) Play State

Displays the play/pause state.
(5) Play Time

Displays the current play time.
(6) MENU
Displays the Audio CD Menu.
(7) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
4 175
Using Audio CD Mode Changing Tracks Selecting from the List

Playing/Pausing CD Tracks Press the SEEK , TRACK key to Press the TUNE knob keys to
move to the previous or next track. search and select for the desired track.
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing. ✽ NOTICE
• Pressing the TRACK key after the
track has been playing for 2 sec-
onds will start the current track
from the beginning.
• Pressing the TRACK key before
the track has been playing for 1
Once you find the desired track,
seconds will start the previous press the TUNE knob to start
track. playing.
While playing, press the TUNE
knob to pause and press again to Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
play. Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
✽ NOTICE SEEK ,
TRACK key (over 0.8 sec-
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup- onds) to rewind or fast-forward the
ported. Other discs may result in current track.
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-
R, CDs with labels)
• The artist and title information Scan
are displayed on the screen if Press the SCAN key to play the first
track information is included 10 seconds of each track.
within the audio CD.
4 176
Audio CD Mode Menu List

If you press the MENU key, you will Press the MENU key Select List
have access to the Repeat, Shuffle,
List and Info features.

for the desired track and press the
Repeat TUNE knob to select.
Press the MENU key Select Repeat
Repeat :Repeats the current track. Info
Press the MENU key Select Info
Shuffle
Press the MENU key Select Shuffle
Shuffle :Plays tracks in random order
✽ NOTICE
The 1 , 2 keys are shortcut
keys to set the Repeat and Shuffle
features.
Details for the currently playing track
are displayed.
4 177
MP3 CD MODE (1) Mode (8) Repeat

Displays currently operating mode. Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
Basic Mode Screen
(2) Operation State (9) Shuffle
From Repeat / Shuffle / Scan, dis- Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
tion.
(10) List
Moves to the list screen.
(3) File Index
Displays the current file number.
(11) Info
Shows detailed information about
(4) File Info the current file.
rent file.
(12) Copy
Copies the current file into My Music
(5) Play State
(6) Play Time

(7) MENU
Displays the CD MP3 Menu.
4 178
Using MP3 CD Mode Changing Files Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

Press the SEEK , TRACK keys to While playing, press and hold the
select the previous or next file. SEEK ,
TRACK keys (over 0.8 sec-
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
onds) to rewind or fast-forward the
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the
mode will automatically start and ✽ NOTICE current file.
being playing. • Pressing the TRACK key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds Scan
will start the current file from the Press the SCAN key to play the first
beginning. 10 seconds of each file.
• Pressing the TRACK key before the
file has been playing for 1 seconds Searching Folders
will start the previous file.
Select the folder by using the FOLDER
Selecting from the List , FOLDER keys and press the

Press the TUNE knob to search TUNE knob to select.
While playing, press the TUNE and select for the desired files.
knob to pause and press again to
play.
✽ NOTICE
• If there are numerous files and
folders within the disc, reading
time could take more than 10 sec-
onds and the list may not be dis-
played or song searches may not The first file within the selected fold-
operate. Once loading is complete, Once you find the desired file, press er will begin playing.
try again. the TUNE knob to start playing.
4 179
MP3 CD Mode Menu Shuffle List

If you press the MENU key, you will Press the MENU key Select Shuffle Press the MENU key Select List
have access to the Repeat, Shuffle, Each time the button is pressed, the
List, Info and Copy features. feature changes in order of Shuffle
Folder ➟ Shuffle All➟ Off.
• Folder Shuffle : Plays all files with-
in the current folder in Random
order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all files in
Random order.
✽ NOTICE Press the TUNE knob to search

The 1 , 2 keys are shortcut for the desired file and press the
keys to set the Repeat and Shuffle TUNE knob to select.
Repeat features.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat
➟Repeat Folder➟Off.
• Repeat Once : Repeats the current
file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files
within the current Folder.
4 180
Info Copy Files

Press the MENU key Select Info Press the MENU key Select Copy
Details for the currently playing file The currently playing file is copied
are displayed. into My Music.
✽ NOTICE ✽ NOTICE
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is • Selecting another feature during
set as the default display within copying will display a pop-up ask-
Display setup, the album/artist/file ing whether you wish to cancel
information are displayed as copying. To cancel, select 'Yes’.
detailed file information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are dis-
played as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such infor-
mation are recorded within the
MP3 file ID3 tag.
4 181
USB MODE (1) Mode (8) Repeat

Basic Mode Screen
tion.
(10) List
(3) File Index
Displays the current file number.
(11) Info
Displays additional information for
(4) File Info the current file.
rent file.
(12) Copy
Copies the current file into My Music.
(5) Play State
Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time

(7) MENU
Displays USB Menu.
4 182
Using USB Mode ✽ NOTICE Selecting from the List

• Loading may require additional Press the TUNE knob to search
time if there are many files and and select desired files.
Playing/Pausing USB Files
folders within the USB and result
Once a USB is connected, the mode in faulty list display or file search-
will automatically start and begin ing. Normal operations will
playing a USB file. resume once loading is complete.
• The device may not support nor-
mal operation when using a USB
memory type besides (Metal
Cover Type) USB Memory.
Changing Files
Press the SEEK , TRACK keys to Once you find the desired file, press
select the previous or next file. the TUNE knob to start playing.
While playing, press the TUNE ✽ NOTICE Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files

knob to pause and press again to TRACK While playing, press and hold the
play. • Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds TRACK keys (over 0.8 sec-
SEEK ,
will start the current file from the onds) to rewind or fast-forward the
beginning. current file.
• Pressing the TRACK key before the
file has been playing for 1 seconds Scan
will start the previous file.
Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
4 183
Searching Folders USB Mode Menu Shuffle

Select the folder by using the If you press the MENU key, you will Press the MENU key Select Shuffle
FOLDER
FOLDER , keys and press the have access to the Repeat, Shuffle, Each time the button is pressed, the
TUNE knob to select. List, Info and Copy features. feature changes in order of Shuffle
Folder➟Shuffle All➟Off.
• Folder Shuffle : Plays the files in the
current folder in random order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all files in random
order.
✽ NOTICE
• The 1 , 2 keys are short-
cut keys to set the Repeat and
The first file within the selected fold- Shuffle features.
er will begin playing. Repeat
feature changes in order of Repeat➟
Repeat Folder➟ Off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current file.
• Folder Repeat : Repeats all files
within the current folder.
4 184
List ✽ NOTICE Copy Files

Press the MENU key Select List • When the ‘Folder File’ option is Press the MENU key Select Copy
set as the default display within The currently playing file is copied
Display setup, the album/artist/file into My Music.
information are displayed as
detailed file information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ ✽ NOTICE
option is set as the default display, Selecting another feature during
the folder name/file name are dis- copying will display a pop-up asking
played as detailed file information. whether you wish to cancel copying.
• The title, artist and album info are To cancel, select 'Yes’.
displayed only when such infor-
mation are recorded within the
Press the TUNE knob to search MP3 file ID3 tag.
for the desired file and press the
Info
Press the MENU key Select Info
Details for the currently playing file are
displayed.
4 185
iPod MODE (1) Mode (8) Repeat

Basic Mode Screen
From Repeat / Shuffle, displays the Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
currently operating function.
(10) List
(3) Song Index Moves to the list screen.
Displays the current song/total num-
ber of songs.
(4) Song Info

rent song.
(5) Play State

Changes the play/pause state.
(6) Play Time

(7) MENU
Displays the iPod Menu.
4 186
Using iPod Mode Changing Songs Searching Categories

Press the SEEK , TRACK keys to Use the TUNE knob to search
select the previous or next file. categories and press the knob to
Playing/Pausing iPod Songs select.
Once an iPod is connected, the
mode will automatically start and ✽ NOTICE
begin playing an iPod song. • Pressing the TRACK key after the
song has been playing for 2 sec-
onds will start the current song
from the beginning.
• Pressing the TRACK key before
the song has been playing for 1
seconds will start the previous
song. If you press the MENU key within the
• Slight time differences may exist Category Menu, This button is used
depending your iPod product. to move to the previous category.
knob to pause and press again to Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Songs ✽ NOTICE
play. While playing, press and hold the • There are eight categories that can
TRACK keys (over 0.8 sec- be searched, including Playlists,
SEEK ,
✽ NOTICE onds) to rewind or fast-forward the Artists, Albums, Genres, Songs,
• iPods with unsupported communi- current song. Composers, Audiobooks and
cation protocols may not properly Podcasts.
operate in the audio system. • If the search mode is accessed while
playing a song, the most recently
searched category is displayed.
• Search steps upon initial connec-
tion may differ depending on the
type of iPod device.
4 187
iPod Mode Menu List AUX MODE

If you press the MENU key, you will Press the MENU key Select List
have access to the Repeat, Shuffle Using AUX Mode
and List features.
Press the MEDIA key Select [AUX]

Repeat
Press the MENU key Select Repeat An external device can be connected
• Repeat Once : Repeats the current to play music.
song.
Shuffle
• Shuffle Album : Plays songs within
the current category in random
order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all songs in
Random order.
4 188
✽ NOTICE Connecting an External Device

CAUTION
• If an external device connector is
connected with the AUX terminal, • Connecting a connector jack
then AUX mode will automatically to the AUX terminal without an
operate. Once the connector is dis- external device will convert
connected, the previous mode will the system to AUX mode, but
be restored. only output noise. When an
• AUX mode can be used only when external device is not being
an external audio player (cam- used, also remove the connec-
corder, car VCR, etc.) has been tor jack.
connected. • When the external device
• The AUX volume can be con- power is connected to the
power jack, playing the exter- External audio players (Camcorders,
trolled separately from other car VCR, etc.) can be played through
audio modes. nal device may output noise.
In such cases, disconnect the a dedicated cable.
power connection before use.
• Fully insert the AUX cable to
the AUX jack uponuse.
4 189
MY MUSIC MODE (1) Mode (8) Repeat

Basic Mode Screen
tion.
(10) List
(3) File Index
Displays the current file/total number
of files. (11) Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
(4) File Info
rent file. (12) Delete
Deletes the current file.
(5) Play State
(6) Play Time

(7) MENU
Displays the My Music Menu
4 190
Using My Music Mode Changing Files Selecting from the List

Press the SEEK , TRACK keys to Press the TUNE knob to search
select the previous or next file. and select desired files.
Playing/Pausing My Music Files
✽ NOTICE
• Pressing the TRACK key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing thex TRACK key before
the file has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous file.
Once you find the desired file, press
While playing, press the TUNE the TUNE knob to start playing.
knob to pause and press again to
play.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
✽ NOTICE While playing, press and hold the
TRACK keys (over 0.8 sec-
SEEK ,
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the My Music button will be onds) to rewind or fast-forward the
disabled. current file.
Scan
Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
4 191
My Music Mode Menu ✽ NOTICE Info

If you press the MENU key, you will The 1 , 2 keys are shortcut keys Press the MENU key Select Info
have access to the Repeat, Shuffle, to set the Repeat and Shuffle fea- Details for the currently playing file
List, Info and Delete features. tures. are displayed.
List ✽ NOTICE
Press the MENU key Select List The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
tion is recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
Deleting Files
Press the MENU key Select Delete
Repeat The currently playing file is deleted.
Repeat : Repeats the current file.
Shuffle TUNE knob to select.
Shuffle : Plays all files in random
order.
4 192
List Menu Use TUNE knob and the ✽ NOTICE

From the List screen Press the TUNE knob to search and select files • If there is memory available, up to
MENU Select [Edit]. you want to delete and select the 6,000 files can be saved.
Files saved in My Music can be Delete button from the Menu. • Identical files cannot be copied
selected and deleted. more than 1,000 times.
• To check memory information, go
to SETUP [System] [Memory
Information]
(1) : Moves to the previous

screen
(2) Select All: Selects all files
(3) Unselet All: Deselects all select-
ed files
(4) Delete: Deletes selected files
4 193
Bluetooth® Wireless ✽ NOTICE ✽ NOTICE

Technology AUDIO MODE The play/pause feature may operate • If music is not yet playing from
differently depending on the mobile your mobile device after converting
Using Bluetooth® Wireless phone. to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Technology Audio Mode Audio mode, pressing the play but-
Changing Files ton once may start playing the
Press the SEEK , TRACK key to mode. Check to see that music is
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth® move to the previous or next file. playing from the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Audio Wireless Technology device after
Once a Bluetooth® Wireless converting to Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is connected, the Setting Connection Technology Audio Mode.
mode will automatically start. If a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device has not been connected,
press the SETUP key [Phone] but-
ton to display the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology connection
screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete fea-
tures from your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone.
knob to pause and press
TUNE knob to play.
4 194
Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless Pairing PHONE Key / Key

Technology Device on the Steering Remote
Controller
What is Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Pairing? When No Devices have been
Pairing refers to the process of syn- Paired
chronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless 1.Press the PHONE key or the
Technology phone or device with the key on the steering remote con-
car audio system for connection. troller. The following screen is dis-
Pairing is necessary to connect and played. 1) Car Name : Name of device as
use the Bluetooth® Wireless 2.Select the OK button to enter shown when searching from your
Technology feature. the Pair Phone screen. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
3.From your Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.
4 195
[Non SSP supported device] ✽ NOTICE Pairing through [PHONE]

(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing) Setup
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is Press the SETUP key Select
entered. [Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Hear, enter the passkey “0000” to Select TUNE knob
pair your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device with the car
audio system.
[SSP supported device] If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

4. After a few moments, a screen is devices are paired but none are cur-
displayed 6 digits passkey. rently connected, pressing the
Hear, check the passkey on your PHONE key or the key on the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology steering wheel displays the following
device and confirm. screen. Press the [Pair] button to
pair a new device or press the 1.The following steps are the same
[Connect] to connect a previously as those described in the section
paired device. "When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-

lowing screen is displayed.
4 196
✽ NOTICE (Continued) (Continued)

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology • Only Bluetooth® Wireless • After pairing is complete, a con-
features supported within the Technology Handsfree and tacts download request is sent
vehicle are as follows. Some fea- Bluetooth audio related features once to the mobile phone. Some
tures may not be supported are supported. mobile phones may require confir-
depending on your Bluetooth® • Bluetooth related operations are mation upon receiving a download
Wireless Technology device. possible only within devices that request, ensure your mobile phone
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree support Handsfree or audio fea- accepts the connection. Refer to
calls tures, such as a Bluetooth® your phones user’s manual for
- Operations during a call (Switch Wireless Technology mobile phone additional information regarding
to Private, Switch to call waiting, or a Bluetooth audio device. phone pairing and connections.
MIC on/off) • If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless
- Downloading Call History Technology device becomes dis-
- Downloading Mobile Contacts connected due to being out of com-
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology munication range, turning the
device auto connection device OFF, or a Bluetooth®
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming Wireless Technology communica-
• Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless tion error, corresponding
Technology devices can be paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
to the Car Handsfree system. devices are automatically searched
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless and reconnected.
Technology device can be connect- • If the system becomes unstable
ed at a time. due to communication errors
• Other devices cannot be paired between the car Handsfree and the
while a Bluetooth® Wireless Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Technology device is connected. device, reset the device by turning
(Continued) off and back on again. Upon reset-
ting Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device, the system will
be restored.
(Continued)
4 197
Connecting a Device From the paired phone list, select the Changing Priority
Press the SETUP key Select device you want to connect and
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List] Select the Connect button.
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the SETUP key Select

[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
4 198
From the paired phone list, select ✽ NOTICE Disconnecting a Device

the phone you want to switch to the Priority icon will be displayed when
highest priority, then select the the selected phone is set as a priori-
Change priority button from the Menu. Press the SETUP key Select
ty phone.
The selected device will be changed [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
to the highest priority.
From the paired phone list, select the

currently connected device and
select the Disconnect button.
4 199
Deleting a Device ✽ NOTICE

• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
From the paired phone list, select the

device you want to delete and select
the Delete button.
4 200
4) Contacts : Displays the Contacts Favorites

USING Bluetooth® Wireless list screen
Technology Press the PHONE key Select
5) Setup : Displays Phone related [Favorites]
settings.
Phone Menu Screen
✽ NOTICE
Phone Menus • If you press the [Call History] but-
With a Bluetooth® Wireless ton but there is no call history
Technology device connected, press data, a prompt is displayed which
the PHONE key to display the Phone asks to download call history data.
menu screen. • If you press the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data
stored, a prompt is displayed
which asks to download contacts 1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
data. call upon selection
• This feature may not be supported 2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
in some mobile phones. For more tacts be saved as favorite.
information on download support, 3) Delete All : Delete all stored
refer to your mobile phone user’s favorite contacts
manual.
✽ NOTICE
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used • To save Favorite, contacts should
contacts saved for easy access be downloaded.
2) Dial Number : Displays the dial • Contact saved in Favorites will not
screen where numbers can be be automatically updated if the
dialed to make calls contact has been updated in the
3) Call History : Device the call histo- phone. To update Favorites, delete
ry list screen the Favorite and create a new
Favorite.
4 201
Calling by Dialing a Number Answering Calls ✽ NOTICE

• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
Press the PHONE key Select [Dial Answering a Call mode features are disabled. Only
Number] Answering a call with a Bluetooth® the call volume will operate.
Wireless Technology device connect- • The telephone number may not be
ed will display the following screen. properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.
1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone

number
2) Call : If a number has been 1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
entered, calls the number If no name when the incoming caller is
number has been entered, switch- saved within your contacts
es to call history screen 2) Incoming Number : Displays the
3) End : Deletes the entered phone incoming number
number 3) Accept : Accept the incoming call
4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers 4) Reject : Reject the incoming call
one digit at a time
4 202
During a Handsfree Call Call History • Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
Press the PHONE key Select [Call • Calling through the call history is
History] not possible when there is no call
history stored or a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
• Up to 20 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s • Time of received/dialed calls and
name if the incoming caller is call time information are not saved.
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number A list of incoming, outgoing and
3) Call time : Displays the call time missed calls is displayed.
4) End : Ends call Select the Download button to down-
load the call history.
5) Private : Converts to Private mode
6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as
heard by the other party 1) Call History :
7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off - Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
✽ NOTICE 2) Download : Download Recent Call
History
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice. • Call history may not be saved in
the call history list in some mobile
phones.
4 203
Contacts ✽ NOTICE (Continued)

• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your • It is not possible to begin down-
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology loading a contact list when the
Press the PHONE key Select contact download feature has been
phone can be downloaded into the
[Contacts] turned off within the Bluetooth®
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot Wireless Technology device. In
be edited or deleted on the phone. addition, some devices may
• Mobile phone contacts are man- require device authorization upon
aged separately for each paired attempting to download contacts.
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology If downloading does not normally
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con- occur, check the Bluetooth®
tacts each). Previously down- Wireless Technology device set-
loaded data is maintained even if tings or the screen state.
the Bluetooth® Wireless • The contacts download feature
Technology device has been dis- may not be supported in some
connected. mobile phones. For more informa-
The list of saved phone book entries tion of supported Bluetooth®
is displayed. Select the Download (However, the contacts and call
history saved to the phone will be devices and function support,
button to download the call history. refer to your phone’s user manual.
deleted if a paired phone is delet-
ed.)
1) Contacts List : • It is possible to download contacts
-Displays downloaded contacts during Bluetooth streaming audio.
entries • When downloading contacts, the
-Connects call upon selection icon will be displayed within the
status bar.
2) Sort by : Find a contact in an (Continued)
alphabetical order.
3) Download : Download contacts
entries
4 204
VOICE RECOGNITION If prompt feedback is in [ON], then 4) Do not use special characters
the system will say “Please say a (e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”,
Using Voice Recognition command after the beep (BEEP)” “ampersand &”).
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF] 5) If a name is not recognized from
mode, then the system will only the contact list, change it to a
Starting Voice Recognition say “(BEEP)” more descriptive name (e.g., use
Shortly press the key on the • To change Prompt Feedback “Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
steering wheel remote controller. Say [On]/[Off], go to SETUP [System] Joe”).
a command. [Prompt Feedback]
Skipping Prompt Messages
✽ NOTICE While prompt message is being stat-
For proper recognition, say the com- ed Shortly press the key on the
mand after the voice instruction and steering remote controller
beep tone. The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
Contact List Best Practices After the “beep”, say the voice com-
1) Do not store single-name entries mand.
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).
Instead, always use full names Re-starting Voice Recognition
(including first and last names) for
all contacts (e.g., use “Jacob While system waits for a command
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”). Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or The command wait state is immedi-
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”). ately ended and the beep ton will
sound. After the “beep”, say the voice
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use command.
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
4 205
❈ Illustration on using voice commands More Help

Here are some examples of mode commands.
• Starting voice command. You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Please say a command after Additionally, there are phone commands like
the beep (BEEP) Ding~ "Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
More Help manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands. • End voice command.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'. Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'. Please say a command after
Additionally, there are phone commands like the beep (BEEP) Ding~
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's Contacts
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
Contacts
Please say the name of the contacts you want
• Skipping Voice Recognition to call (BEEP)
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
Cancel
Please say a...
Shortly pressing the (BEEP) Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)

key (under 0.8 seconds)
More Help
4 206
Voice Command List

• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command Function Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be • When listening to the radio, displays the
used anywhere in the system. next radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be XM2➟XM3➟FM1)
used within the current mode. Radio • When listening to a different mode, displays
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts the most recently played radio screen.
Ex) Call “John Smith” • When currently listening to the FM radio,
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com- maintains the current state.
mands. After saying this command, say • When listening to a different mode, displays
“Favorites”,“Dial Number”, “Call History” or the most recently played FM screen.
“Contacts” execute corresponding functions. FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
Favorites Display the Favorite screen. FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen. AM Displays the AM screen.
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
(Call by Name) this command, say the name of a contact saved in FM Preset 1~6.
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call. AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
this command, you can say the number that frequency.
you want to call. AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
Redial Connects the most recently called number. frequency.
Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice XM (Satellite) • When currently listening to the XM, main-
recognition and Bluetooth® connections. tains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played XM screen.
4 207

XM (Satellite) 1~3 Displays the selected XM screen. My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
XM Channel Plays the selected XM channel. AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
0~255 Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
Media Moves to the most recently played media device.
screen. Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD. Mute Mutes the sound
USB Plays USB music. Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
iPod® Plays iPod music.
4 208
• FM/AM radio commands: available during FM, AM • Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
radio operation used while listening to Satellite Radio.

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6. Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each. broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
4 209
• Audio CD commands: Commands available during • MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available dur-
Audio CD operation ing USB and MP3 CD operation

Play Plays the currently paused track. Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current track. Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays the tracks within the CD. Shuffle Randomly plays the files within the current
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen- folder.
tial order. Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
Repeat Repeats the current track. order.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen- Repeat Repeats the current file.
tial order. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number. order.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder
4 210
• iPod® Commands: Commands available during iPod® • My Music Commands: Commands available during
operation My Music operation

Play Plays the currently paused song. Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current song. Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays the songs within the current Shuffle Randomly plays all saved files.
category. Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen- order.
tial order. Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Repeats the current song. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen- order.
tial order. Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
4 211
USING SETUP Display Settings Mode Pop-up

Press the SETUP key Select [Display]
Select [Mode Pop up]
Starting Mode Adjusting the Brightness
Press the SETUP key to display the Press the SETUP key Select [Display]
Setup screen.
Select [Brightness]
This feature is used to display the

Mode Pop-up screen when entering
radio and media modes.
You can select and control options When this feature is turned on,
related to [Display], [Sound], [Clock / Use the TUNE knob to adjust the pressing the RADIO or MEDIA key
screen brightness or set the will display the Mode Pop-up screen.
Calendar], [Phone] and [System]. Brightness on Automatic, Daylight, or
Nightmode.
✽ NOTICE (1) Automatic : Adjusts the bright- ✽ NOTICE
Once settings have been changed, ness automatically The media Mode Pop-up screen can
press the MENU key to return to the (2) Day : Always maintains the bright- be displayed only when two or more
previous menu. ness on high media modes have been connected.
(3) Night : Always maintains the
brightness on low
4 212
MP3 Information Display Sound Settings After selecting the Bass / Middle /
Press the SETUP key Select [Display] Treble, use the TUNE knob to
Select [Media Display] adjust the settings.
Sound Settings After selecting the Fader / Balance,
Press the SETUP key Select [Sound] use the TUNE knob to move the
Select [Sound Setting] cursor on the control screen to the
desired position.
This feature is used to change the

information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
(1) Folder File : Displays file name

and folder name
(2) Album Artist Song : Displays
album name/artist name/song
Use TUNE knob to adjust the

Bass/Middle/Treble and Fader/ Balance
settings.
4 213
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume Voice Recognition Setting Blue Link Volume
Control) Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select
Press the SETUP key Select [Sound] Select[Voice Recognition [Sound] Select [Blue Link Voice
[Sound] Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Vol.]
Vol.] Use the TUNE knob to adjust the
Blue Link Voice Recognition volume.
Use the TUNE knob to adjust the

The volume level is controlled auto- Voice Recognition volume.
matically according to the vehicle
speed. ✽ NOTICE
Use the TUNE knob to select This feature may not be available
from On/Off. depending on whether your device
supports Blue Link.
4 214
Clock/Calendar Setting Calendar Setting Time Format

Press the SETUP key Select [Clock/ Press the SETUP key Select [Clock/
Calendar] Select [Calendar Calendar] Select [Time Format]
Clock Setting Settings]
Press the SETUP key Select [Clock/
Calendar] Select [Clock Settings]
This feature is used to change the

Use the TUNE knob to select the clock format between 12hr or 24hr.
Month, Day, and Year and use
Use the TUNE knob to select the TUNE knob to change settings.
Hour, Minutes and AM/PM setting Clock Display
and use TUNE knob to change Press the SETUP key Select [Clock/
settings. Calendar] Select [Clock Display
(Power off)]
This feature is used to display a clock

on the screen when the audio sys-
tem is turned off.
4 215
Bluetooth® Wireless Viewing Paired Phone List 2) Delete : Deletes the currently
Technology Setting Press the SETUP key Select selected phone
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List] 3) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
Pairing a New Device tion priority
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
This feature is used to view mobile

phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology played.
devices can be paired with the audio For more information, refer to the
system. “Setting Bluetooth® Wireless
For more information, refer to the Technology Connection” section
“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec- within Bluetooth® Wireless
tion within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.
Technology.
1) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
4 216
✽ NOTICE BEFORE DOWN- Downloading Contacts Auto Download (Contacts)

LOADING CONTACTS Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select
• Only contacts within connected [Phone] Select [Contacts [Phone] Select [Auto Download]
phones can be downloaded. Also Download]
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the download fea-
ture.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connect-
ed phone can be downloaded.
This feature is used to automatically
As the contacts are downloaded download mobile contacts entries
from the mobile phone, a download once a Bluetooth® Wireless
progress bar is displayed. Technology phone is connected.
✽ NOTICE ✽ NOTICE
• Upon downloading phone con- • The Auto Download feature will
tacts, the previous corresponding download mobile contacts entries
data is deleted. every time the phone is connected.
• This feature may not be supported The download time may differ
in some mobile phones. depending on the number of saved
• Voice Recognition may not oper- contacts entries and the communi-
ate while contacts are being down- cation state.
loaded. • Before downloading contacts, first
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the contacts
download feature.
4 217
Streaming Audio Outgoing Volume Turning Bluetooth System Off

Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select
[Phone] Select [Streaming Audio] [Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume] [Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology is turned off, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology related features
will not be supported within the audio
system.
When Streaming Audio is turned on, Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-
you can play music files saved in going volume level.
your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device through the audio
system. ✽ NOTICE
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the SEEK ,
TRACK key.
4 218
✽ NOTICE
To turn Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology back on, go to SETUP
[Phone] and press “Yes”.
4 219
System Setting Voice Recognition Mode Setting Language

Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select [System]
[System] Select [Prompt Feedback] Select [Language]
Memory Information
Press the SETUP key Select [System]
Select [Memory Information]
This feature is used to select the This feature is used to change the
desired prompt feedback option from system and voice recognition lan-
Normal and Expert. guage.
This feature displays information If the language is changed, the sys-
related to system memory. (1) ON : When using voice recogni- tem will restart and apply the select-
tion, provides detailed guidance ed language.
(1) Using : Displays capacity current- prompts
ly in use (2) OFF : When using voice recogni-
(2) Capacity : Displays total capacity tion, omits some guidance
prompts
4 220
REAR VIEW CAMERA

(if equipped)
• The system has been equipped

with a rear view camera for user
safety by allowing a wider rear
range of vision.
• The rear view camera will automat-
ically operate when the ignition key
is turned ON and the transmission
lever is set to R.
• The rear view camera will automat-
ically stop operating when set to a
different lever.
CAUTION
The rear view camera has been
equipped with an optical lens to
provide a wider range of vision
and may appear different from
the actual distance. For safety,
directly check the rear and
left/right sides.
4 221
Blue Link® (if equipped) ble to changes in IT technology, (1) (Blue Link® Center)
cooperating with global IT compa- Makes requests for Blue Link® serv-
nies, creating an eco-system and ice related inquiries and consulta-
Hyundai aims to offer differentiated providing the latest contents & serv- tions.
customer values through a ices based on an open environment.
‘Connected Car Life,’ which is to pro- A call is connected to the Blue Link®
vide consumers with fast and reliable ser-vice center employee.
IT technology. As consumers’ Using the Room Mirror Key Re-pressing the key will end the call.
lifestyles become more and more Selecting the room mirror key will This feature does not operate when
mobile in thanks to remarkable allow you to make service required you are on a Bluetooth® phone call.
advances in smart phones, tablet inquiries, POI info searches, and
PCs and overall wireless telecommu- emergency rescues by connecting to
nication, new lifestyle patterns the Blue Link® Center. (2) (Blue Link® for POI)
demand seamless connection Such features can be used only after • Blue Link® for Voice command
between one’s office, home, out- subscribing to the Blue Link® service. Starts Blue Link® voice command.
doors and automobiles. Voice receiving voice guidance,
Automobile companies are now shortly press the button to convert to
faced with the task of shifting their voice command mode. Press and
paradigm from vehicle-centered hold the button to end voice com-
services to customer value-centered mand.
services, with the ultimate goal of
securing global leadership in the
field of vehicle IT and telematics. • TBT VR Commands
Hyundai Motor plans to achieve this 1. Navigate to
by realizing a terminal platform flexi- “Navigate to” voice command is used
to request the download of route
data for a new destination, saved
destinations, daily routes and previ-
ous destinations.
4 222
2. Save Destination 5. Voice Guidance

“Save Destination” VR command is “Voice Guidance” VR command CAUTION
used to assign a voice tag to the last allows the user to mute/unmute the • You cannot talk simultaneous-
downloaded destination and store it Turn by Turn(TBT) direction ly on the Bluetooth® phone
in a destination directory. announcements. and Blue Link® phone.
6. Suspend Route • While on a Bluetooth® call,
pressing the key or
NOTE: “Suspend Route” VR command key will display a message
The Turn by Turn(TBT) feature sup- allows the user to suspend and indicating that you are cur-
ports the store of ten(10) destina- pause Turn by Turn(TBT) route guid- rently on a call.
tions in the TBT destinations ance while in the guidance mode.
• A message will be displayed if
directory. you receive a Bluetooth®
7. Resume Route Wireless Technology call
3. Route Preview “Resume Route” VR command while already on a Blue Link®
“Route Preview” VR command allows allows the user to resume Turn by call. At this time, press the
the user to preview the route instruc- Turn(TBT) route guidance. key on the steering wheel
tions (upcoming maneuver instruc- remote controller to accept
tions) at any time during the route the call.The phone bell will not
(3) (Blue Link® for SOS) ring.
guidance.
In the case of an emergency,
requests for help to the Blue Link®
4. Destinations List center.
“Destinations List” VR command Call is connected to the Blue Link®
allows the user to preview and delete emergency rescue center. Re-press-
the stored destinations with their ing the key will end the call.
associated voice tags in the Turn by If already on a Bluetooth® phone call,
Turn destinations directory. the call will end to connect you to the
Blue Link® Emergency Rescue Center.
4 223
Eco Coach • What does the bar graph and hori- Turn by Turn
zontal line mean? The Turn by Turn feature can be used
The horizontal line is adjusted once through Blue Link®.
per month or at each tank full, based
on your preference; it represents the
EPA combined average or communi-
ty average fuel economy target.
• What is My Eco MPG?

Your actual fuel economy average
• What is Eco Coach? over 2.5 minutes.
Every 2.5 minutes, Eco Coach com- This value is also shown in bar graph
pares your fuel economy against the as your “now” rating. (1) Direction Indicator Image
government tested average (EPA) or (2) Remaining distance until next
other similar Hyundai models (com- • What are Eco Rewards? point
munity), based on your preference. If you beat the average (the EPA or
Each month, or after every tank fill (3) The Count bar is divided into a
community), you will receive an Eco total of 9 levels.
up, Eco Coach rates your extended Reward point.
average and gives you a reward star
if you best the average. See your my Hyundai web page for 9 Level 0.5mi 8 Level 0.4mi
more information. 7 Level 0.3mi 6 Level 0.2mi
See your My Hyundai web page for
more information. [Eco Driving] will not operate if the 5 Level 0.1mi 4 Level 400ft
vehicle ignition is not turned on. 3 Level 300ft 2 Level 200ft
Please operate with the ignition 1 Level 100ft
turned on.
4 224
(4) Next Street name

(5) Distance to destination
(6) Expected Time Arrival
(7) Current Street name
❈ For information on specific

Blue Link® operations, please
refer to a separate manual.
4 225
Driving your vehicle
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Lane departure warning system (LDWS) . . . . . . 5-65

Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Forward collision warning system (FCWS). . . . . 5-69
• Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . 5-5 Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
• ENGINE START/STOP button position. . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 • Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 • Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
• Automatic transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 • Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 • Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 • Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
• Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 • Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
• Electronic parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 • Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
• Auto hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 • Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83 5
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 • Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 • Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 • Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Smart cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 • Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Active ECO system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56 • Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 • GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
• BSD (Blind Spot Detection) / • GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
LCA (Lane Change Assist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58 • GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
• RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 • GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
• Driver's Attention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
Be sure the exhaust system does

not leak. WARNING - Open trunk WARNING - California
The exhaust system should be Do not drive with the trunk proposition 65
checked whenever the vehicle is open. Poisonous exhaust gases Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
raised to change the oil or for any can enter the passenger com- ety of automobile components
other purpose. If you hear a change in partment. and parts, including compo-
the sound of the exhaust or if you If you must drive with the trunk nents found in the interior fur-
drive over something that strikes the open proceed as follows: nishings in a vehicle, contain or
underside of the vehicle, have the 1. Close all windows. emit chemicals known to the
exhaust system checked as soon as 2. Open side vents. State of California to cause can-
possible by an authorized HYUNDAI cer and birth defects and repro-
dealer. 3. Set the air intake control at
ductive harm. In addition, cer-
"Fresh", the air flow control at
tain fluids contained in vehicles
"Floor" or "Face" and the fan
and certain products of compo-
WARNING - Engine at the highest speed.
nent wear contain or emit chem-
exhaust To assure proper operation of icals known to the State of
Do not inhale exhaust fumes or the ventilation system, be sure California to cause cancer and
leave your engine running in a the ventilation air intakes locat- birth defects or other reproduc-
enclosed area for a prolonged ed just in front of the windshield tive harm.
time. Exhaust fumes contain are kept clear of snow, ice,
carbon monoxide, a colorless, leaves or other obstructions.
odorless gas that can cause
unconsciousness and death by
asphyxiation.
5 2
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle Necessary inspections Before starting
• Be sure that all windows, outside Fluid levels, such as engine oil, • Close and lock all doors.
mirror(s), and outside lights are engine coolant, brake fluid, and • Position the seat so that all con-
clean. washer fluid should be checked on a trols are easily reached.
• Check the condition of the tires. regular basis, with the exact interval • Adjust the inside and outside
• Check under the vehicle for any depending on the fluid. Further rearview mirrors.
sign of leaks. details are provided in section 7, • Be sure that all lights work.
• Be sure there are no obstacles “Maintenance”.
• Check all gauges.
behind you if you intend to back up. • Check the operation of warning
WARNING - Distracted lights when the ignition switch is
driving changed to the ON position.
Focus on the road while driving. • Release the parking brake and
The driver's primary responsi- make sure the brake warning light
bility is in the safe and legal goes out.
operation of the vehicle. Use of For safe operation, be sure you are
any hand-held devices, other familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment or vehicle systems equipment.
that distract the driver should
not be used during vehicle
operation. Distracted driving WARNING
can result in injuries or death. All passengers must be proper-
ly belted whenever the vehicle
is moving. Refer to “Seat belts”
in section 3 for more informa-
tion on their proper use.
5 3
WARNING - Check WARNING - Loose object WARNING - Fire risk

surroundings Securely store items in your When you intend to park or stop
Always check the surrounding vehicle. When you make a sud- the vehicle with the engine on,
areas near your vehicle for peo- den stop or turn the steering be careful not to depress the
ple, especially children, before wheel rapidly, loose objects accelerator pedal for a long
putting a vehicle into D (Drive) may drop on the floor and it period of time. It may overheat
or R (Reverse). Otherwise, an could interfere with the opera- the engine or exhaust system
accident may occur hurting or tion of the foot pedals, possibly and cause fire.
killing people or children around causing an accident.
the vehicle.
WARNING - Driving while

intoxicated
Do not drive while intoxicated.
Drinking and driving is danger-
ous. Even a small amount of
alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment.
Driving while under the influence
of drugs is as dangerous as or
more dangerous than driving
drunk. Driving while intoxicated
can result in a serious accident.
5 4
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON

ENGINE START/STOP button ✽ NOTICE
position In an emergency situation while the
OFF vehicle is in motion, you are able to
turn the engine off and to the ACC
position by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for more than
2 seconds or 3 times successively
White within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still
moving, you can restart the engine
To turn off the engine (START/RUN without depressing the brake pedal
position) or vehicle power (ON posi- by pressing the ENGINE START/
OHG055004N tion), press the ENGINE START/ STOP button with the shift lever in
Illuminated ENGINE STOP button with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
START/STOP button the P (Park) position. When you
(if equipped) press the ENGINE START/STOP
button without the shift lever in the P
Whenever the front door is opened, (Park) position, the ENGINE
the ENGINE START/STOP button START/STOP button will not change
will illuminate for your convenience. to the OFF position but to the ACC
The light will go off after about 30 position.
seconds when the door is closed. It
will also go off immediately when the
theft-alarm system is armed.
5 5
ACC(Accessory) ON START/RUN
Orange Blue Not illuminated
Press the ENGINE START/STOP Press the ENGINE START/STOP To start the engine, depress the
button while it is in the OFF position button while it is in the ACC position brake pedal and press the ENGINE
without depressing the brake pedal. without depressing the brake pedal. START/ STOP button with the shift
The electrical accessories are opera- The warning lights can be checked lever in the P (Park) or the N
tional. before the engine is started. Do not (Neutral) position. For your safety,
If the ENGINE START/STOP button leave the ENGINE START/STOP start the engine with the shift lever in
is in the ACC position for more than button in the ON position for a long the P (Park) position.
1 hour, the button turns off automati- time. The battery may discharge
cally to prevent battery discharge. because the engine is not running.
5 6
✽ NOTICE Starting the engine 1.Carry the smart key or leave it

• If you press the ENGINE START/ inside the vehicle.
STOP button without depressing WARNING - Proper 2.Make sure the parking brake is
the brake pedal the engine will not firmly applied.
footwear
start and the ENGINE START/ 3.Place the shift lever in the P (Park)
Always wear appropriate shoes position.
STOP button changes as follows: when operating your vehicle.
OFF ➔ ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF Unsuitable shoes (high heels,
4.Press the ENGINE START/STOP
• If you leave the ENGINE START/ button while depressing the brake
ski boots, sandals, etc.) may
STOP button in the ACC or ON pedal.
interfere with your ability to use
position for a long time, the bat- the brake and accelerator pedal. It should be started without depress-
tery will discharge. The inability to properly operate ing the accelerator pedal.
the pedals could result in seri- 5.Do not wait for the engine to warm
WARNING ous injuries or death. up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary.
Never press the ENGINE START/
STOP button while the vehicle is Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
in motion. This would result in ✽ NOTICE - Kick down switch decelerating should be avoided.)
loss of directional control and If your vehicle is equipped with a
braking function, which could kick down switch in the accelerator
cause an accident. pedal, it prevents you from driving
at full throttle unintentionally by
making the driver require increased
effort to depress the accelerator
pedal. However, if you depress the
pedal more than approximately
80%, the accelerator pedal can be
depressed down further to full throt-
tle. This is not a malfunction but a
normal condition.
5 7
• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-

cle, if it is far away from you, the WARNING - Unintended
engine may not start. vehicle movement
• When the ENGINE START/STOP Never leave the smart key in the
button is in the ACC or ON posi- vehicle with children or vehicle
tion, if any door is opened, the sys- occupants who are unfamiliar
tem checks for the smart key. If the with the vehicle operation.
smart key is not in the vehicle, the Pushing the ENGINE START/
warning "Key not in vehicle" will STOP button while the smart key
illuminate on the LCD display. If all is in the vehicle may result in
doors are closed, the chime will unintended engine activation
sound for 5 seconds. The warning and/or unintended vehicle move- OHG055009N
will turn off while the vehicle is ment which could result in seri- • If the battery is weak or the smart
moving or the smart key is detect- ous injuries or death. key does not work correctly, you
ed in the vehicle. Always have the
can start the engine by pressing
smart key with you.
If the engine stalls while the vehicle the ENGINE START/STOP button
The engine will start, only when the directly with the smart key.
smart key is in the vehicle. is in motion, do not attempt to move
the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion. If the traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift lever in
the N (Neutral) position while the
vehicle is still moving and press the
ENGINE START/STOP button in an
attempt to restart the engine.
5 8
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,

you cannot start the engine nor-
mally. Replace the fuse with a new
one. If you are not able to replace
the fuse, you can start the engine
by pressing the ENGINE START/
STOP button for 10 seconds while
the ENGINE START/STOP button
is in the ACC position. The engine
can start without depressing the
brake pedal. But for your safety
always depress the brake pedal
before starting the engine.
Do not press the ENGINE START/

STOP button for more than 5 sec-
onds except when the stop lamp fuse
is disconnected.
5 9
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Automatic transaxle operation
The automatic transaxle has 6 for-
ward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically, depending on the
position of the shift lever.
Lock release
button
✽ NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle,
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
+ (UP) cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transaxle Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
- ( D OW N )
Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.
Press the lock release button when shifting.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
OHG051012A
5 10
For smooth operation, depress the Transaxle ranges

brake pedal when shifting from N CAUTION - Transaxle The indicator in the instrument clus-
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse gear. • To avoid damage to your ter displays the shift lever position
transaxle, do not accelerate when the ignition switch is in the ON
the engine in R (Reverse) or position.
WARNING - Automatic any forward gear position with
transaxle the brakes on. P (Park)
Before leaving the driver’s seat, • The transaxle may be dam- Always come to a complete stop
always make sure the shift lever aged if you shift into P (Park) before shifting into P (Park). This
is in the P (Park) position; then while the vehicle is in motion. position locks the transaxle and pre-
set the parking brake fully and vents the drive wheels from rotating.
shut the engine off. Always
make sure the shift lever is When stopped on an upgrade, do not
latched in the P (Park) position hold the vehicle with engine power. WARNING
and set the parking brake fully. Use the service brake or the parking • Shifting into P (Park) while the
Unexpected and sudden vehicle brake. vehicle is in motion will cause
movement can occur if these the drive wheels to lock which
precautions are not followed, will cause you to lose control
which could result in serious of the vehicle.
injury or death.
• Do not use the P (Park) posi-
tion in place of the parking
brake. Always make sure the
shift lever is latched in the P
(Park) position and set the
parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattend-
ed in a vehicle.
5 11
R (Reverse) N (Neutral)
Use this position to drive the vehicle The wheels and transaxle are not
backward. engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
CAUTION - Shifting are applied.
Always come to a complete stop
+ (UP)
before shifting into or out of R D (Drive)
(Reverse); you may damage the M a nu a l s h i f t
transaxle if you shift into R This is the normal forward driving mode
- ( D OW N )
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in position. The transaxle will automati-
motion, except when “Rocking cally shift through a 6-gear
the Vehicle” explained in this sequence, providing the best fuel OHG051014A
section. economy and power. Manual shift mode

Whether the vehicle is stopped or in
For extra power when passing anoth- motion, manual shift mode is select-
er vehicle or climbing grades, ed by pushing the shift lever from the
depress the accelerator pedal fully D (Drive) position into the manual
(more than 80%) until the kick down gate. To return to D (Drive) range
switch operates with a clicking noise, operation, push the shift lever back
at which time the transaxle will auto- into the main gate.
matically downshift to the next lower
gear.
5 12
In manual shift mode, moving the ✽ NOTICE Shift lock system

shift lever backwards and forwards • In manual shift mode, the driver For your safety, the automatic
will allow you to make gearshifts rap- must execute upshifts in accor- transaxle has a shift lock system
idly. dance with road conditions, taking which prevents shifting the transaxle
In contrast to a manual transaxle, the care to keep the engine speed from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
manual shift mode allows gearshifts below the red zone. unless the brake pedal is depressed.
with the accelerator pedal • In manual shift mode, only the 6 To shift the transaxle from P (Park)
depressed. forward gears can be selected. To into R (Reverse):
Up (+) : Push the lever forward reverse or park the vehicle, move 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
once to shift up one gear. the shift lever to the R (Reverse) 2. Start the engine or change the
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards or P (Park) position as required. ignition switch to the ON position.
once to shift down one • In manual shift mode, downshifts 3. Move the shift lever.
gear. are made automatically when the
vehicle slows down. When the
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automati- WARNING - Shifting from
cally selected. park
• In manual shift mode, when the Always fully depress the brake
engine rpm approaches the red pedal before and while shifting
zone, the transaxle will upshift out of the P (Park) position into
automatically to the next higher another position to avoid inad-
gear. vertent motion of the vehicle
• To maintain the required levels of which could injure persons in
vehicle performance and safety, or around the vehicle.
the system may not execute cer-
tain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
5 13
Good driving practices

• Never move the shift lever from P
WARNING
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other • Always buckle-up! In a colli-
position with the accelerator pedal sion, an unbelted occupant is
depressed. significantly more likely to be
• Never move the shift lever into P seriously injured or killed than
(Park) when the vehicle is in motion. a properly belted occupant.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely • Avoid high speeds when cor-
stopped before you attempt to shift nering or turning.
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive). • Do not make quick steering
• When using manual shift mode, wheel movements, such as
OHG053082A
slow down before shifting to a sharp lane changes or fast,
Shift-lock override lower gear. Otherwise, the lower sharp turns.
If the shift lever cannot be moved from gear may not be engaged. • The risk of rollover is greatly
the P (Park) position into R (Reverse) • Always use the parking brake. Do increased if you lose control
position with the brake pedal not depend on placing the of your vehicle at highway
depressed, continue depressing the transaxle in P (Park) to keep the speeds.
brake pedal, then do the following: vehicle from moving. • Loss of control often occurs if
1. Carefully remove the cap (1) cov- • Exercise extreme caution when two or more wheels drop off
ering the shift-lock override access driving on a slippery surface. Be the roadway and the driver
hole. especially careful when braking, oversteers to reenter the road-
2. Insert a screwdriver into the accelerating or shifting gears. On a way.
access hole and press down on slippery surface, an abrupt change • In the event your vehicle
the screwdriver. in vehicle speed can cause the leaves the roadway, do not
3. Move the shift lever. drive wheels to lose traction and steer sharply. Instead, slow
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an the vehicle to go out of control. down before pulling back into
authorized HYUNDAI dealer • Optimum vehicle performance and the travel lanes.
immediately. economy is obtained by smoothly • Never exceed posted speed
depressing and releasing the limits.
accelerator pedal.
5 14
Moving up a steep grade from a

WARNING standing start
If your vehicle becomes stuck in To move up a steep grade from a
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you standing start, depress the brake
may attempt to rock the vehicle pedal, move the shift lever to D
free by moving it forward and (Drive) and release the parking
backward. Do not attempt this brake. Depress the accelerator pedal
procedure if people or objects gradually while releasing the service
are anywhere near the vehicle. brakes.
During the rocking operation
the vehicle may suddenly move
forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing
injury or damage to nearby peo-
ple or objects.
5 15
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s
Your vehicle has power-assisted
CAUTION - Brake pedal ability to safely slow down; the vehi-
brakes that adjust automatically Do not drive with your foot rest- cle may also pull to one side when
through normal usage. ing on the brake pedal. This will the brakes are applied. Applying the
In the event that the power-assisted create abnormally high brake brakes lightly will indicate whether
brakes lose power because of a stalled temperatures which can cause they have been affected in this way.
engine or some other reason, you can excessive brake lining and pad To dry the brakes, apply them lightly
still stop your vehicle by applying wear. while maintaining a safe forward
greater force to the brake pedal than speed until brake performance returns
you normally would. The stopping dis- to normal.
tance, however, will be longer. WARNING - Steep hill
When the engine is not running, the braking
reserve brake power is partially Avoid continuous application of
depleted each time the brake pedal the brakes when descending a
is applied. Do not pump the brake long or steep hill by shifting to a
pedal when the power assist has lower gear. Continuous brake
been interrupted. application will cause the
Pump the brake pedal only when brakes to overheat and could
necessary to maintain steering con- result in a temporary loss of
trol on slippery surfaces. braking performance. Not hav-
ing braking power could result
in an accident and serious
injuries or death.
5 16
In the event of brake failure Disc brakes wear indicator

If service brakes fail to operate while When your brake pads are worn and WARNING - Brake wear
the vehicle is in motion, you can new pads are required, you may hear Do not ignore high pitch wear
make an emergency stop with the a high-pitched warning sound from sounds from your brakes. If you
parking brake. The stopping dis- your front brakes or rear brakes. You ignore this audible warning, you
tance, however, will be much greater may hear this sound come and go or will eventually lose braking per-
than normal. it may occur whenever you depress formance, which could lead to a
the brake pedal. serious accident.
WARNING - Parking brake Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
Avoid applying the parking brake squeal when you first apply (or
brake to stop the vehicle while it lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-
is moving except in an emer- mal and does not indicate a problem
gency situation. Applying the with your brakes.
parking brake while the vehicle
is moving at normal speeds can
cause a sudden loss of control CAUTION - Replace brake
of the vehicle. If you must use pads
the parking brake to stop the Do not continue to drive with
vehicle, use great caution in worn brake pads. Continuing to
applying the brake. drive with worn brake pads can
damage the braking system and
result in costly brake repairs.
Always replace the front or rear

brake pads as pairs.
5 17
WARNING - Parking
brake use
• All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
• Never allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
OHG051085 OHG051084 touch the parking brake. If the
Parking brake Releasing the parking brake parking brake is released
To release the parking brake, depress unintentionally, serious injury
Applying the parking brake may occur.
To engage the parking brake, first the parking brake pedal a second
apply the foot brake and then time while applying the foot brake.
depress the parking brake pedal The pedal will automatically extend to
down as far as possible. the fully released position.
In addition it is recommended that If the parking brake does not release
when parking the vehicle on a or does not release all the way, have
incline, the shift lever should be in the system checked by an authorized
the P (Park) position. HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION - Parking brake

Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad (or lining) and brake
rotor wear.
5 18
If the brake warning light remains on

after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction in the brake
system. Immediate attention is nec-
essary. If at all possible, cease driving
the vehicle immediately. If that is not
possible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only contin-
ue to drive the vehicle until you can
reach a safe location or repair shop.
W-75 OHG056095N
Check the brake warning light by Electronic parking brake (EPB)
changing the ignition switch to ON (if equipped)
(do not start the engine). This light Applying the parking brake
will be illuminated when the parking To apply the EPB (Electronic parking
brake is applied with the ignition brake):
switch in the START or ON position. 1. Make sure the vehicle is station-
Before driving, be sure the parking ary.
brake is fully released and the brake 2. Pull the EPB switch. Make sure
warning light is off. the warning light comes on.
Also, the EPB is applied automatical-

ly if the Auto Hold button is on when
the engine is turned off. However, if
you press the EPB switch for about
one second within 3 seconds after
the engine is turned off, the EPB will
not be applied.
5 19
To release EPB (electronic parking

CAUTION brake) automatically:
Do not operate the parking • Shift lever in P (Park)
brake while the vehicle is mov- With the engine running depress
ing except in an emergency sit- the brake pedal and shift out of P
uation. It could damage the (Park) to R (Rear), N (Neutral) or D
vehicle system and endanger (Drive).
driving safety. • Shift lever in N (Neutral)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of N
(Neutral) to R (Rear) or D (Drive).
OHG056096N • Depress the accelerator pedal sat-
Releasing the parking brake isfying the following conditions.
To release the EPB (electronic park- 1. Engine running
ing brake), press the EPB switch in 2. Driver's seat belt fastened
the following condition: 3. Driver's door, engine hood and
• Have the ignition switch or trunk closed
ENGINE START/STOP button in 4. Shift lever in R (Rear), D (Drive)
the ON position. or Sports mode
• Depress the brake pedal or accel- Make sure the brake warning light
erator pedal (or accelerator pedal goes off.
slightly to avoid abrupt vehicle
movement.)
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
5 20
✽ NOTICE When the EPB (Electronic Parking

• For your safety, you can engage Brake) does not release:
the EPB even though the ignition We recommend that you contact an
switch or ENGINE STOP/START authorized HYUNDAI dealer by load-
button is in the OFF position, but ing the vehicle on a flatbed tow truck
you cannot release it. and have the system checked.
• For your safety, depress the brake
pedal and release the parking EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) may
brake manually with the EPB be automatically applied when:
switch when you drive downhill or • The rear brake is overheated
when backing up the vehicle. • Requested by other systems
• The engine is turned off with the OHG055179N
CAUTION EPB applied Warning messages

• If the parking brake warning To disengage EPB, fasten seat-
light is still on even though ✽ NOTICE belt, close door, hood, and trunk
the EPB has been released, If the driver turns the engine off • If you try to drive with the EPB
we recommend that the vehi- while Auto Hold is operating, EPB applied, a warning will sound and a
cle be checked by an author- will be automatically applied. message will appear.
ized HYUNDAI dealer. However, if you press the EPB • If the driver's seat belt is not fas-
• Do not drive your vehicle with switch for about one second within 3 tened or the engine hood or trunk
the EPB applied. It may cause seconds after the engine is turned is opened, a warning will sound
excessive brake pad and off, the EPB will not be applied. and a message will appear.
brake rotor wear. • If there is a problem with the vehi-
cle, a warning may sound and a
message may appear.
If the above situation occurs,
depress the brake pedal and release
EPB by pressing the EPB switch.
5 21
WARNING CAUTION
• To prevent unintentional • A click sound may be heard
movement when stopped and while operating or releasing
leaving the vehicle, do not use the EPB, but these conditions
the shift lever in place of the are normal and indicate that
parking brake. Set the parking the EPB is functioning proper-
brake and make sure the shift ly.
lever is securely positioned in • When leaving your keys with a
P (Park). parking lot attendant or valet,
• Never allow anyone who is make sure to inform him/her
unfamiliar with the vehicle to how to operate the EPB. OHG045236L
touch the parking brake. If the • The EPB may malfunction if AUTO HOLD deactivating. Press
parking brake is released you drive with the EPB brake pedal
unintentionally, serious injury applied. When the conversion from Auto Hold
may occur. • When you automatically to EPB is not working properly a
• All vehicles should always release EPB by depressing warning will sound and a message
have the parking brake fully the accelerator pedal, depress will appear.
engaged when parking to it slowly.
avoid inadvertent movement
of the car which can injure CAUTION
occupants or pedestrians. Depress the brake pedal when
the above message appears, for
the Auto Hold and EPB may not
activate.
5 22
■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B If this occurs, we recommend that

the system be checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
The EPB malfunction indicator may
illuminate when the ESC indicator
comes on to indicate that the ESC is
not working properly, but it does not
indicate a malfunction of the EPB.
OHG045240L OHG050060
Parking brake automatically EPB malfunction indicator
locked (if equipped)
If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold This warning light illuminates if the
is activated, a warning will sound and engine start/stop button is turned to
a message will appear. the ON position and goes off in
approximately 3 seconds if the sys-
tem is operation normally.
If the EPB malfunction indicator
remains on, comes on while driving,
or does not come on when the igni-
tion switch or the engine start/stop
button is turned to the ON position,
this indicates that the EPB may have
malfunctioned.
5 23
(Continued) Emergency braking

CAUTION If there is a problem with the brake
• The EPB warning light may • If the parking brake warning
light blinks when the EPB pedal while driving, emergency brak-
illuminate if the EPB switch is ing is possible by pulling up and
operated abnormally or EPB is warning light is on, press the
switch firmly then let it go holding the EPB switch. Braking is
operated while the battery is possible only while you are holding
weak due to personally back to its original position
and pull it up. If the EPB warn- the EPB switch.
installed equipment and so
on. Shut the engine off and ing does not go off, we recom-
turn it on again after a few mend that the system be WARNING
seconds.Then wait for a while, checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Do not operate the parking
pull the EPB switch and push brake while the vehicle is mov-
the EPB switch with brake ing except in an emergency sit-
pedal depressed. The warning uation.
light will go off and the EPB
will operate normally. If Auto
Hold lamp is yellow, then shut ✽ NOTICE
the engine off and turn it on During emergency braking by the
once more. However, if the EPB, the parking brake warning
EPB warning light is still on, light will illuminate to indicate that
we recommend that the sys- the system is operating.
tem be checked by an author-
• If the parking brake warning CAUTION
light does not illuminate or If you continuously notice a
blinks even though the EPB noise or burning smell when the
switch was pulled, the EPB is EPB is used for emergency
not applied. braking, we recommend that the
(Continued) system be checked by an
5 24
■ Type A
■ Type A 2. When you stop the vehicle com-
pletely by depressing the brake
pedal, the AUTO HOLD indicator
changes from white to green.
3. The vehicle will remain stationary
even if you release the brake
■ Type B pedal.
4. If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be
released.
OHG056023N
■ Type B
Leaving
OHG056022N • If you press the accelerator pedal
AUTO HOLD (if equipped) with the shift lever in R (Reverse),
The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle D (Drive) or sports mode, the Auto
in a standstill even though the brake Hold will be released automatically
pedal is not depressed after the driv- and the vehicle will start to move.
er brings the vehicle to a complete The indicator changes from green
stop by depressing the brake pedal. to white.
• If the vehicle is restarted using the
Smart cruise control switch (RES+
OHG056024N or SET-) while Auto Hold and
Set up Smart cruise control is operating
(The green AUTO HOLD indicator),
1. With the driver's door, engine the Auto Hold will be released
hood and trunk closed, fasten the regardless of accelerator pedal
driver's seat belt or depress the operation.
brake pedal and then press the
Auto Hold button. The white AUTO
HOLD indicator will come on and
the system will be in the standby
position.
5 25
■ Type A
✽ NOTICE
WARNING • The Auto Hold does not operate
When driving off from Auto when:
Hold by depressing the acceler- - The driver's seat belt is unfas-
ator pedal, always check the tened and driver's door is opened
surrounding area near your - The engine hood is opened
vehicle. ■ Type B - The trunk is opened
Slowly depress the accelerator - The shift lever is in P (Park)
pedal for a smooth launch. - The EPB is applied
• For your safety, the Auto Hold
automatically switches to EPB in
OHG055027N such cases:
Cancel - The driver's seat belt is unfas-
To cancel the Auto Hold operation, tened and driver's door is opened
press the Auto Hold switch while - The engine hood is opened
depressing the brake pedal. The - The trunk is opened
AUTO HOLD indicator will go out. - The vehicle is in a standstill for
If you want to release it manually, pull
more than 10 minutes
the EPB switch while depressing the
- The vehicle is standing on a steep
brake pedal. The AUTO HOLD indi-
slope for a long period of time
cator changes from green to white
- The vehicle moved several times
and the system changes to the
(Continued)
standby position.
For your safety, release the Auto
Hold operation manually if the vehi-
cle ahead is too close or during
downhill driving.
5 26
(Continued) ■ Type A ■ Type B

In these cases, the brake warning WARNING
light comes on, the AUTO HOLD • Press the accelerator pedal
indicator changes from green to slowly when you start the
white, and a warning sounds and a vehicle.
message will appear to inform you • For your safety, cancel the
that EPB has been automatically Auto Hold when you drive
engaged. Before driving off again, downhill or back up the vehi-
press foot brake pedal, check the cle or park the vehicle.
surrounding area near your vehi-
cle and release parking brake
manually with the EPB switch. OHG045240L
• If the AUTO HOLD indicator CAUTION
changes to yellow, the Auto Hold If there is a malfunction with the Warning messages
is not working properly. We rec- driver’s door, hood or trunk Parking brake automatically
ommend that you contact an open detection system, the Auto locked
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Hold may not work properly. When the EPB is applied from Auto
• While operating Auto Hold, you We recommend that you contact Hold, a warning will sound and a
may hear mechanical noise. an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. message will appear.
However, it is normal operating
noise.
5 27
■ Type A ■ Type B Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

CAUTION ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
Depress the brake pedal when dents due to improper or dangerous
the above message appears for driving maneuvers. Even though
the Auto Hold and EPB may not vehicle control is improved during
activate. emergency braking, always maintain
a safe distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during
extreme road conditions.
The vehicle should be driven at
OHG045236L reduced speeds in the following cir-
AUTO HOLD deactivating. cumstances:
Press brake pedal • When driving on rough, gravel or
When the conversion from Auto Hold snow-covered roads.
to EPB is not working properly a • When driving with tire chains
warning will sound and a message installed.
will appear. • When driving on roads where the
road surface is pitted or has differ-
ent surface heights.
Driving in these conditions increases
the stopping distance for your vehi-
cle.
5 28
The ABS continuously senses the ✽ NOTICE • Even with the anti-lock brake sys-
speed of the wheels. If the wheels A click sound may be heard in the tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
are going to lock, the ABS system engine compartment when the vehi- ficient stopping distance. Always
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic cle begins to move after the engine is maintain a safe distance from the
brake pressure to the wheels. started. This condition is normal vehicle in front of you.
When you apply your brakes under and indicates that the anti-lock • Always slow down when cornering.
conditions which may lock the brake system is functioning proper- The anti-lock brake system cannot
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’ ly. prevent accidents resulting from
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor- excessive speeds.
responding sensation in the brake • On loose or uneven road surfaces,
pedal. This is normal and it means operation of the anti-lock brake
your ABS is active. system may result in a longer stop-
In order to obtain the maximum ben- ping distance than for vehicles
efit from your ABS in an emergency equipped with a conventional
situation, do not attempt to modulate brake system.
your brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Depress your
brake pedal as hard as possible or
as hard as the situation warrants and
allow the ABS to control the force
being delivered to the brakes.
5 29
• When you drive on a road having

poor traction, such as an icy road,
and have operated your brakes
continuously, the ABS will be active
continuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your vehi-
cle over to a safe place and stop
the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light goes off, then your
ABS is normal. Otherwise, you
W-78 may have a problem with the ABS. OHG051028A
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI
The ABS warning light will stay on for Electronic stability control
dealer as soon as possible.
approximately 3 seconds after the (ESC)
ignition switch is ON. During that The Electronic Stability Control
time, the ABS will go through self- ✽ NOTICE (ESC) system is designed to help
diagnosis and the light will go off if When you jump start your vehicle stabilize the vehicle during cornering
everything is normal. If the light stays because of a drained battery, the maneuvers. ESC checks where you
on, you may have a problem with engine may not run as smoothly and are steering and where the vehicle is
your ABS but your regular brakes will the ABS warning light may turn on actually going.
work normally. Contact an authorized at the same time. This happens ESC applies the brakes at individual
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi- because of low battery voltage. It wheels and intervenes with the
ble. does not mean your ABS has mal- engine management system to help
functioned. stabilize the vehicle.
• Do not pump your brakes!
Electronic stability control (ESC) will
• Have the battery recharged before
not prevent accidents. Excessive
driving the vehicle.
speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers
and hydroplaning on wet surfaces
can still result in serious accidents.
5 30
Only a safe and attentive driver can ESC operation When operating
prevent accidents by avoiding maneu- ESC ON condition When the ESC is in opera-
vers that cause the vehicle to lose • When the ignition is turned ON, tion, the ESC indicator light
traction. Even with ESC installed, ESC and ESC OFF indicator lights blinks.
always follow all the normal precau- illuminate for approximately 3 sec- • When the Electronic
tions for driving - including driving at onds, then ESC is turned on. Stability Control is operat-
safe speeds for the conditions. • Press the ESC OFF button after ing properly, you can feel a
The Electronic Stability Control turning the ignition ON to turn ESC slight pulsation in the vehi-
(ESC) system is an electronic sys- off. (ESC OFF indicator will illumi- cle. This is only the effect
tem designed to help the driver main- nate). To turn the ESC on, press of driving on a brake con-
tain vehicle control under adverse the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF trol and indicates nothing
conditions. It is not a substitute for indicator light will go off). unusual.
safe driving practices. Factors includ- • When starting the engine, you may • When moving out of mud
ing speed, road conditions and driv- hear a slight ticking sound. This is or driving on a slippery
er steering input can all affect the ESC performing an automatic road, depressing the accel-
whether ESC will be effective in pre- system self-check and does not erator pedal may not cause
venting a loss of control. It is still your indicate a problem. the rpm (revolutions per
responsibility to drive and corner at minute) to increase. This is
reasonable speeds and to leave a to maintain the stability of
sufficient margin of safety. the vehicle and is a normal
When you apply your brakes under condition.
conditions which may lock the • When the ESC activates,
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’ the engine may not
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor- respond to the accelerator
responding sensation in the brake as it does under routine
pedal. This is normal and it means conditions.
your ESC is active.
5 31
• If the Cruise Control was ESC operation off • State 2

in use when the ESC acti- ESC OFF condition ■ Type A ■ Type B
vates, the Cruise Control To cancel ESC operation :
automatically disengages.
The Cruise Control can be
reengaged when the road
conditions allow. See
“Cruise Control System” • State 1
later in this chapter. (if ■ Type A ■ Type B
equipped)
OHG045262L
Press the ESC OFF button for more

than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indicator
light and message illuminates and
ESC OFF warning chime will sound.
At this state, the engine control func-
OHG045263L tion and brake control function does
not operate. In other words, the vehi-
Press the ESC OFF button shortly cle stability control function does not
(ESC OFF indicator light and mes- operate any more.
sage illuminates). At this state, the If the Engnine Start/Stop button is
engine control function does not pressed to the OFF position when
operate. In other words, the traction ESC is off, ESC remains off. Upon
control function does not operate but restarting the engine, the ESC will
only the brake control function oper- automatically turn on again.
ates.
5 32
■ ESC indicator light

ESC OFF usage
WARNING - Electronic When driving
stability control
• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC
Drive carefully even though turned on for daily driving whenev-
your vehicle has Electronic er possible.
■ ESC OFF indicator light
Stability Control. It can only
assist you in maintaining con- • To turn ESC off while driving, press
trol under certain circum- the ESC OFF button while driving
stances. on a flat road surface.
WARNING - Operating
Indicator light CAUTION ESC
When ignition switch is turned ON, Driving with varying tire or wheel Never press the ESC OFF but-
the indicator light illuminates, then sizes may cause the ESC system ton while ESC is operating (ESC
goes off if the ESC system is operat- to malfunction. When replacing indicator light blinks).
ing normally. tires, make sure they are the If ESC is turned off while ESC is
The ESC indicator light blinks when- same size as your original tires. operating, the vehicle may slip
ever ESC is operating or illuminates Never operate the vehicle with out of control.
when ESC fails to operate. The ESC different diameter tires installed
indicator stays on when the ESC at the same time.
may have a malfunction. Take your ✽ NOTICE
vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI • When operating the vehicle on a
dealer and have the system dynamometer, ensure that the
checked. ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
ESC OFF indicator light comes on illuminated).
when the ESC is turned off with the • Turning the ESC off does not affect
button. ABS or brake system operation.
5 33
Vehicle stability management The VSM does not operate when: Malfunction indicator
(VSM) • Driving on banked roads such as The VSM can be deactivated even if
This system provides further gradients or inclines you do not cancel the VSM operation
enhancements to vehicle stability and • Driving rearward by pressing the ESC OFF button. It
steering responses when a vehicle is • ESC OFF indicator light ( ) indicates that a malfunction has
driven on a slippery road or a vehicle remains illuminated on the instru- been detected somewhere in the
detects changes in coefficient of fric- ment cluster EPS (Electronic Power Steering)
tion between right wheels and left • EPS (Electronic Power Steering) system or VSM system. If the ESC
wheels when braking. indicator light remains illuminated indicator light ( ) or EPS warning
on the instrument cluster light remains on, take your vehicle to
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
VSM operation have the system checked.
When the VSM is operating: VSM operation off • The VSM is designed to function
• ESC (Electronic Stability Control) If you press the ESC OFF button to above approximately 9 mph (15
light will blink. turn off the ESC, the VSM will also km/h) on curves.
• The steering wheel may be con- cancel and the ESC OFF indicator • The VSM is designed to function
trolled. light ( ) will illuminate. above approximately 18 mph (30
When the vehicle stability manage- To turn on the VSM, press the button km/h) when a vehicle is driving or
ment is operating properly, you can again. The ESC OFF indicator light braking on a road with different grip
feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. goes out. under the individual wheels, such as
This is only the effect of brake control having one or more tires on ice or
and indicates nothing unusual. mud and the others on dry asphalt.
• The VSM system is not a substitute
for safe driving practices but a sup-
plementary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the speed and the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Always hold the steering wheel
firmly while driving.
5 34
• Your vehicle is designed to activate Hill-start assist control (HAC) • The HAC does not operate when
according to the driver’s intention, The main intent is to help prevent the the transaxle shift lever is in the P
even with the VSM installed. vehicle from rolling backwards while (Park) or N (Neutral) position.
Always follow all the normal pre- driving uphill on an inclined surface. • The HAC activates even though
cautions for driving at safe speeds HAC holds the braking pressure built the ESC is off but it does not acti-
for the conditions – including driv- up by the driver when the vehicle is vate when the ESC has malfunc-
ing in inclement weather and on a stopped for 2 seconds after releasing tioned.
slippery road. the brake pedal.
During the pressure-hold period, the
WARNING - Tire/wheel driver has enough time to depress
sizes the accelerator pedal to drive off.
When replacing tires and The braking pressure is reduced as
wheels, make sure they are the soon as the system detects the dri-
same size as the original tires ver’s intention to drive off.
and wheels installed. Driving
with varying tire or wheel sizes WARNING - Rolling
may diminish any supplemental backward
safety benefits of the VSM sys-
tem. Drivers should pay close atten-
tion when activating the HAC.
The vehicle may roll backward
causing an accident due to
insufficient brake hold pressure,
causing injury or death.
5 35
Good braking practices • Check to be sure the parking brake • Do not "ride" the brake pedal.
is not engaged and that the park- Resting your foot on the brake
ing brake indicator light is out pedal while driving can be danger-
WARNING before driving away. ous because the brakes might
• Whenever leaving the vehicle • Driving through water may get the overheat and lose their effective-
or parking, always set the brakes wet. They can also get wet ness. It also increases the wear of
parking brake as far as possi- when the car is washed. Wet brakes the brake components.
ble and fully engage the vehi- can be dangerous! Your vehicle will • If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
cle's transaxle into the P not stop as quickly if the brakes are ing, apply the brakes gently and
(Park) position. Vehicles not wet. Wet brakes may cause the keep the vehicle pointed straight
fully engaged in P (Park) with vehicle to pull to one side. ahead while you slow down. When
the parking brake set are at To dry the brakes, apply the brakes you are moving slowly enough for it
risk for moving inadvertently lightly until the braking action to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and injuring yourself or oth- returns to normal, taking care to and stop in a safe place.
ers. keep the vehicle under control at • If your vehicle is equipped with an
• All vehicles should always all times. If the braking action does automatic transaxle, do not let your
have the parking brake fully not return to normal, stop as soon vehicle creep forward. To avoid
engaged when parking to as it is safe to do so and call an creeping forward, keep your foot
avoid inadvertent movement authorized HYUNDAI dealer for firmly on the brake pedal when the
of the vehicle which can injure assistance. vehicle is stopped.
occupants or pedestrians. • Do not coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear. This is extreme-
ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
5 36
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.

Firmly engage the parking brake
and place the shift lever in P
(Park). If your vehicle is facing
downhill, turn the front wheels into
the curb to help keep the vehicle
from rolling. If your vehicle is facing
uphill, turn the front wheels away
from the curb to help keep the vehi-
cle from rolling. If there is no curb
or if it is required by other condi-
tions to keep the vehicle from
rolling, block the wheels.
• Under some conditions your park-
ing brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to hap-
pen when there is an accumulation
of snow or ice around or near the
rear brakes or if the brakes are wet.
If there is a risk that the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only tem-
porarily while you put the shift lever
in P (Park) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.
Then release the parking brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the
upgrade with the accelerator
pedal. This can cause the transaxle
to overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
5 37
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

• If the cruise control is left on ✽ NOTICE
(CRUISE indicator light in the • During normal cruise control
instrument cluster illuminated), the operation, when the SET switch is
cruise control can be switched on activated or reactivated after
accidentally. Keep the cruise con- applying the brakes, the cruise
trol system off (CRUISE indicator control will energize after approx-
light OFF) when the cruise control imately 3 seconds. This delay is
is not in use, to avoid inadvertently normal.
setting a speed. • To activate cruise control, depress
• Use the cruise control system only the brake pedal at least once after
when traveling on open highways turning the ignition switch to the
OHG055032 in good weather. ON position or starting the engine.
➀ Cruise indicator • Do not use the Cruise Control This is to check if the brake switch
when it may not be safe to keep the which is important part to cancel
➁ SET indicator
vehicle at a constant speed: cruise control is in normal condi-
- When driving in rainy, icy, or tion.
The cruise control system allows you snow-covered roads.
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without depressing - When driving with limited view
(possibly due to bad weather, WARNING - Misuse of
the accelerator pedal. cruise control
such as fog, snow, rain or sand-
This system is designed to function storm) • Do not use cruise control if
above approximately 20 mph. the traffic situation does not
allow you to drive safely at a
constant speed and with suffi-
cient distance to the vehicle in
front.
• Do not use cruise control
when towing a trailer.
5 38
OHG055033 OHG055035 OHG055034
To set cruise control speed: 3. Push the SET- switch, and release To increase cruise control set
1. Push the CRUISE button on the it at the desired speed. The SET speed:
steering wheel to turn the system indicator light in the instrument Follow either of these procedures:
on. The CRUISE indicator light in cluster will illuminate. Release the • Push the RES+ switch and hold it.
the instrument cluster will illumi- accelerator pedal. The desired Your vehicle will accelerate.
nate. speed will automatically be main- Release the switch at the speed
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, tained. you want.
which must be more than 20 mph. On a steep grade, the vehicle may • Push the RES+ switch and release
slow down or speed up slightly while it immediately. The cruising speed
going uphill or downhill. will increase by 1.0 mph each time
the RES+ switch is operated in this
manner.
5 39
To temporarily accelerate with

the cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on, depress
the accelerator pedal. Increased speed
will not interfere with cruise control
operation or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If you press the SET- switch at
increased speed, the cruising speed
OHG055035 will be set again. OHG055036
To decrease cruise control set To cancel cruise control, do

speed: one of the following:
Follow either of these procedures: • Depress the brake pedal.
• Push the SET- switch and hold it. • Shift into N (Neutral) with an auto-
Your vehicle will gradually slow matic transaxle.
down. Release the switch at the • Press the CANCEL switch located
speed you want to maintain. on the steering wheel.
• Push the SET- switch and release • Decrease the vehicle speed lower
it immediately. The cruising speed than the memory speed by 9 mph.
will decrease by 1.0 mph each time • Decrease the vehicle speed to less
the SET- switch is operated in this than approximately 20 mph.
manner.
5 40
Each of these actions will cancel

cruise control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, push the
RES+ switch located on your steer-
ing wheel. You will return to your pre-
viously preset speed.
OHG055034 OHG055033
To resume cruising speed at To turn cruise control off, do

more than approximately 25 one of the following:
mph: • Push the CRUISE button (the
If any method other than the CRUISE CRUISE indicator light in the
switch was used to cancel cruising instrument cluster will go off).
speed and the system is still activat- • Turn the ignition off.
ed, the most recent set speed will Both of these actions cancel cruise
automatically resume when the control operation. If you want to
RES+ switch is pushed. resume cruise control operation,
It will not resume, however, if the repeat the steps provided in “To set
vehicle speed has dropped below cruise control speed” on the previous
approximately 20 mph. page.
5 41
SMART CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The smart cruise control system
(Continued)
allows you to program the vehicle to
maintain constant speed and dis- • Use the smart cruise control
tance detecting the vehicle ahead system only when traveling
without depressing the accelerator/ on open highways in good
brake pedal. weather.
• Do not use the smart cruise
control when it may not be
WARNING safe to keep the car at a con-
For your safety, please read the stant speed. For instance,
owner's manual before using driving in heavy or varying
the smart cruise control sys- traffic, or on slippery (rainy,
OHG056167N
tem. icy or snow-covered) or wind-
(1) Cruise indicator ing roads or steep hills.
(2) Set speed • Pay particular attention to the
(3) Vehicle-to-vehicle distance driving conditions whenever
WARNING using the smart cruise control
• If the smart cruise control is system.
left on, (cruise indicator light • The smart cruise control sys-
in the instrument cluster illu- tem is not a substitute for safe
minated) the smart cruise driving. It is the responsibility
control can be activated unin- of the driver to always check
tentionally. Keep the smart the speed and distance of the
cruise control system off vehicle ahead.
(cruise indicator light off)
when the smart cruise control
is not used.
(Continued)
5 42
OHG055053L OHG055054L OHG055055L
Smart cruise control speed 3. Push the SET- switch, and release To increase cruise control set
To set cruise control speed: it at the desired speed. The SET speed:
1. Push the [cruise] button on the indicator light, set speed and vehi- Follow either of these procedures:
steering wheel to turn the system cle to vehicle distance on the LCD • Push the RES+ switch and hold it.
on. The CRUISE indicator light in screen will illuminate. Your vehicle set speed will
the instrument cluster will illumi- 4. Release the accelerator pedal. increase by 5 mph (10 km/h).
nate. The desired speed will automati- Release the switch at the speed
2. Accelerate to the desired speed. cally be maintained. you want.
The smart cruise control speed If there is a vehicle in front of you, the • Push the RES+ switch and release
can be set as follows: speed may decrease to maintain the it immediately. The cruising speed
distance to the vehicle ahead. will increase by 1.0 mph (1.0 km/h)
• 20 mph (30 km/h) ~ 110 mph
(180 km/h): when there is no On a steep grade, the vehicle may each time the RES+ switch is oper-
vehicle in front slow down or speed up slightly while ated in this manner.
going uphill or downhill. • You can set the speed to 110 mph
• 0 mph (0 km/h) ~ 110 mph (180
km/h): when there is a vehicle in (180 km/h).
front
5 43
To temporarily accelerate with the

cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
If you press the SET- switch the
OHG055054L increased cruising speed will return OHG055056L
To decrease the crusie control to it’s set speed. Smart Cruise control will be tem-
set speed: porarily canceled when:
Follow either of these procedures: ✽ NOTICE Cancelled manually
• Push the SET- switch and hold it. Be careful when accelerating tem- • Depressing the brake pedal.
Your vehicle set speed will porarily, because the speed is not • Pressing the CANCEL button
decrease by 5 mph (10 km/h). controlled automatically at this locatedon the steering wheel.
Release the switch at the speed time even if there is a vehicle in front
you want. of you. The Smart Cruise Control turns off
• Push the SET- switch and release tem-porarily when the indicator on
it immediately. The cruising speed the LCDdisplay turns off.The
will decrease by 1.0 mph (1.0 CRUISE indicator is illuminated con-
km/h) each time the SET- switch is tinuously.
operated in this manner.
• You can set the speed to 20 mph
(30 km/h).
5 44
Cancelled automatically • The accelerator pedal is continu-

• The driver's door is opened. ously depressed for more than 1
• The EPB (electronic parking brake) minute.
is applied. Each of these actions will cancel
• The vehicle speed is over 110 mph the smart cruise control operation.
(180 km/h) (The SET indicator, set speed and
• The vehicle stops on a steep vehicle to vehicle distance on the
incline. LCD display will go off.)
• The ESC or ABS is operating. In a condition the smart cruise con-
• The ESC is turned off. trol is cancelled automatically, the
• The sensor or the cover is dirty or smart cruise control will not
resume even though the RES+ or OHG045232L
blocked with foreign matter.
• The vehicle stops and go repeat- SET- switch is pushed. Also, the If the system is cancelled, the warn-
edly for a long period of time. EPB (electronic parking brake) will ing chime will sound and a message
be applied. will appear for a few seconds. You
• The driver starts driving by must adjust the vehicle speed, as
depressing the accelerator pedal well as the distance to the vehicle
or pushing the RES+ switch if a CAUTION ahead by depressing the accelerator
vehicle stops far away ahead of the If the smart cruise control is or brake pedal.
your vehicle. cancelled by other than the rea- Always check the road conditions.
• The shift lever is shifted to N sons mentioned, have the sys- Do not rely on the warning chime.
(Neutral), R (Reverse), D (Drive). tem checked by an authorized
• The vehicle stops on a steep HYUNDAI dealer.
incline.
• The vehicle stops and go repeat-
edly for a long period of time.
• The Smart Cruise Control has mal-
functioned.
5 45
✽ NOTICE
Always check the road conditions
when pressing the RES+ switch to
resume speed.
OHG055055L OHG055053L
To resume cruise control set To turn cruise control off:

speed: Push the [CRUISE] button (the
If any method other than the [cruise] CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
switch was used to cancel cruising ment cluster will go off).
speed and the system is still activat-
ed, the cruising speed will automati-
cally resume when the SET- or RES+
switch is pushed.
If the RES+ switch is pushed, the
speed will resume to the recently set
speed. It will not resume if the vehicle
speed has dropped below approxi-
mately 20 mph (30 km/h), when
there is no vehicle ahead in a close
distance. It will resume when a vehi-
cle in front of your vehicle is detected
even when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph (30 km/h).
5 46

vehicle to vehicle distance changes
as follows:
Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2
Distance 1
For example, if you drive at 55 mph
Distance 4 Distance 3
(90 km/h), the distance maintain as
OHG056167N/OHG056166N
follows;
OHG055057K
Distance 4 - approximately 172 feet
Smart cruise control vehicle to (52 m)
vehicle distance Distance 3 - approximately 130 feet
To set vehicle to vehicle distance: (40 m)
This function allows you to program Distance 2 - approximately 106 feet
the vehicle to maintain relative dis- (32 m)
tance to the vehicle ahead without Distance 1 - approximately 82 feet Distance 2 Distance 1
depressing the accelerator pedal or (25 m) OHG056165N/OHG056164N
brake pedal. • The vehicle will maintain the set
The vehicle to vehicle distance will ✽ NOTICE speed, when the lane ahead is
automatically activate when the clear.
smart cruise control system is on.
The 'Distance 4' is always set when
the system is used for the first time • The vehicle will slow down or
Select the appropriate distance after starting the engine. speed up to maintain the selected
according to road conditions and distance, when there is a vehicle
vehicle speed. ahead of you in the lane. (A vehicle
will appear in front of your vehicle
in the LCD display only when there
is an actual vehicle in front of you)
5 47
• If the vehicle ahead speeds up,

your vehicle will travel at a steady CAUTION
cruising speed after accelerating to • The warning chime sounds
the selected speed. and malfunction indicator
blinks if it is hard to maintain
the selected distance to the
vehicle ahead.
• If the warning chime sounds,
actively adjust the vehicle
speed, as well as the distance
to the vehicle ahead by
depressing the accelerator or OHG045233L
brake pedal.
• Even if the warning chime is
not activated, always pay CAUTION
attention to the driving condi- If the vehicle ahead (vehicle
tions to prevent dangerous speed: less than 20 mph (30
situations from occurring. km/h)) disappears to the next
lane, the warning chime will
sound and a message will
appear. Adjust your vehicle
speed for vehicles or objects
that can suddenly appear in
front of you by depressing the
brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and driv-
ing condition.
5 48
OHG045234L OHG055059 OHG045525L

In traffic situation Sensor to detect distance to Sensor warning message
• In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the the vehicle ahead If the sensor or cover is dirty or
vehicle ahead of you stops. Also, if The sensor detects the distance to obscured with foreign matter such as
the vehicle ahead of you starts the vehicle ahead. snow, this message will appear.
moving, your vehicle will start as If the sensor is covered with dirt or In this case, the system may not
well. However, if the vehicle stops other foreign matter, the vehicle to function temporarily, but it does not
for more than 3 seconds, you must vehicle distance control may not indicate a malfunction of the Smart
depress the accelerator pedal or operate correctly. Cruise Control System.
push the (RES+ or SET-) switch to Always keep the area in front of the Clean the sensor or cover by using a
start driving. sensor clean. soft cloth.
• If you push the Smart cruise con-
trol switch (RES+ or SET-) while
Auto Hold and Smart cruise control
is operating (The green AUTO
HOLD indicator), Auto Hold will be
released regardless of accelerator
pedal operation and the vehicle will
start to move.
5 49
CAUTION
• Do not install accessories
around the sensor and do not
replace the bumper by your-
self. It may interfere with the
sensor performance.
• Always keep the sensor and
bumper clean.
• To prevent sensor cover dam-
OHG045330L
age from occurring, wash the
OHG055171L car with a soft cloth.
SCC (Smart Cruise Control) mal- • Do not damage the sensor or
function message sensor area by a strong
The message will appear when the impact. If the sensor moves
vehicle to vehicle distance control slightly off position, the smart
system is not functioning normally. cruise control system will not
We recommend that you take your operate correctly.
vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI If this occurs, we recommend
dealer and have the system that the system be inspected
checked. by an authorized HYUNDAI OHG045329L
dealer.
To convert to cruise control
• Use only a genuine HYUNDAI mode:
sensor cover for your vehicle.
The driver may choose to only use
the cruise control mode (speed con-
trol function) by doing as follows:
5 50
1. Turn the smart cruise control sys-

tem on (the cruise indicator light
will be on but the system will not
be activated).
2. Push the distance to distance
switch for more than 2 seconds.
3. Choose between "Smart cruise
control(SCC) mode" and "Cruise
control(CC) mode".
WARNING OBH058029 OBH058030

When using the cruise control Limitations of the system • Your vehicle speed can be reduced
mode, you must manually due to a vehicle in the adjacent
access the distance to other The smart cruise control system may
have limits to its ability to detect dis- lane. Apply the accelerator pedal
vehicles as the system will not and select the appropriate set
automatically brake to slow tance to the vehicle ahead due to
road and traffic conditions. speed. Check to be sure that the
down for other vehicles. road conditions permit safe opera-
tion of the smart cruise control.
On curves
• On curves, the smart cruise control
system may not detect a moving
vehicle in your lane, and then your
vehicle could accelerate to the set
speed. Also, the vehicle speed will
slow down when the vehicle ahead
is recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on curves and apply the brakes or
accelerator pedal if necessary.
5 51
OBH058053 OBH058045 OHG050074

On inclines Lane changing • Your vehicle may accelerate when
• During uphill or downhill driving, • A vehicle which moves into your a vehicle ahead of you disappears.
the smart cruise control system lane from an adjacent lane cannot • When you are warned that the
may not detect a moving vehicle in be recognized by the sensor until it vehicle ahead of you is not detect-
your lane, and cause your vehicle is in the sensor's detection range. ed, drive with caution.
to accelerate to the set speed. • The sensor may not detect imme-
Also, the vehicle speed will slow diately when a vehicle cuts in sud-
down when the vehicle ahead is denly. Always pay attention to the
recognized suddenly. traffic, road and driving conditions.
• Select the appropriate set speed • If a vehicle which moves into your
on inclines and apply the brakes or lane is slower than your vehicle,
accelerator pedal if necessary. your speed may decrease to main-
tain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
• If a vehicle which moves into your
lane is faster than your vehicle,
your vehicle will accelerate to the
selected speed.
5 52
A vehicle ahead cannot be recog-

nized correctly by the sensor if any of
following occurs:
- When the vehicle is pointing
upwards due to overloading in the
trunk
- While making turns by steering
- When driving to one side of the lane
- When driving on narrow lanes or on
curves
Apply the brakes or accelerator
OBH058046 OHG050075
pedal if necessary.
Vehicle recognition • When vehicles are at a standstill
Some vehicles ahead in your lane and the vehicle in front of you
cannot be recognized by the sensor changes to the next lane, be care-
as follows: ful when your vehicle starts to
- Narrow vehicles such as motorcy- move because it may not recog-
cles or bicycles nize the stopped vehicle in front of
- Vehicles offset to one side you.
- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-
decelerating vehicles
- Stopped vehicles
- Vehicles with small rear profile such
as trailers with no loads
5 53
WARNING
• The smart cruise control sys-
tem cannot guarantee the
stop for every emergency sit-
uation.
If an emergency stop is nec-
essary, you must apply the
brakes.
• Keep a safe distance accord-
ing to road conditions and
OHG050076 OHG050077 vehicle speed. If the vehicle to
• Always look out for pedestrians • Always be cautious for vehicles vehicle distance is too close
when your vehicle is maintaining a with higher height or vehicles car- during a high-speed driving, a
distance with the vehicle ahead. rying loads that sticks out to the serious collision may result.
back of the vehicle. • The smart cruise control sys-
tem cannot recognize a
stopped vehicle, pedestrians
or an oncoming vehicle.
Always look ahead cautiously
to prevent unexpected and
sudden situations from occur-
ring.
(Continued)
5 54
This device complies with Part 15

(Continued) (Continued) of the FCC rules.
• When other vehicles are • As the smart cruise control Operation is subject to the following
changing lanes in front of you system may not recognize three conditions:
frequently, the smart cruise complex driving situations,
control system may not oper- always pay attention to driv- 1. This device may not cause harm-
ate appropriately. Always look ing conditions and control ful interference, and
ahead cautiously to prevent your vehicle speed. 2. This device must accept any inter-
unexpected and sudden situa- • For safe operation, carefully ference received, including inter-
tions from occurring. read and follow the instruc- ference that may cause undesired
• The smart cruise control sys- tions in this manual before operation.
tem is not a substitute for safe use. 3. Changes or modifications not
driving practices but a con- expressly approved by the party
venience function only. It is responsible for compliance could
the responsibility of the driver ✽ NOTICE void the user’s authority to operate
to always check the speed The Smart Cruise Control System the device.
and the distance to the vehi- may not operate temporarily due to:
cle ahead. • Electrical interference Radio frequency radiation exposure
• Always be aware of the select- • Modifying the suspension information:
ed speed and vehicle to vehi- • Differences of tire abrasion or tire This equipment complies with FCC
cle distance. pressure radiation exposure limits set forth for
• Always maintain sufficient • Installing different type of tires an uncontrolled environment.
braking distance and deceler- This equipment should be installed
ate your vehicle by applying and operated with minimum distance
the brakes if necessary. of 20 cm between the radiator
(Continued) (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-
located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmit-
ter.
5 55
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM

• When the Active ECO button is Limitation of Active ECO oper-
pressed the ECO indicator (green) ation:
will illuminate to show that the If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating. Active ECO is operating, the system
• When the Active ECO is activated, operation is limited even though
it will remain on until the Active there is no change in the ECO indi-
ECO button is pressed again. cator.
Active ECO does not turn off when • When the coolant temperature is
the engine is restarted. To turn off low: The system will be limited until
Active ECO, press the Active ECO engine temperature becomes nor-
button again. mal.
OHG051070A • If Active ECO is turned off, the sys- • When driving up a hill: The system
Active ECO operation tem will return to normal mode. will be limited to gain power when
Active ECO helps improve fuel effi- driving uphill because the engine
ciency by controlling certain engine torque is required.
and transaxle system operating • When using sports mode: The sys-
parameters. Fuel efficiency depends tem will be limited according to the
on the driver's driving habit and road manually selected gear.
condition. • When the accelerator pedal is
deeply depressed for a few sec-
onds: The system will be limited,
judging that the driver desires addi-
tional acceleration.
5 56
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)

(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
(Continued)
The warning range depends on
• The Blind Spot Detection
your vehicle speed. However, if
System (BSD) is a supplemen-
Blind spot area your vehicle is much faster than
tal system to assist you. Do
the other vehicle, the system will
not solely rely on the system
not warn you.
and always pay attention and
(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist) drive safely.
If the system detects a vehicle • The Blind Spot Detection
Closing at approaching you at high speed, System (BSD) is not a substi-
high speed
the system will warn you. tute for proper and safe driv-
(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ing. Always drive safely and
If the sensor detects an use caution when changing
approaching vehicle from the left lanes or backing the vehicle
and right side as your vehicle up. The Blind Spot Detection
moves rearward, the system will System (BSD) may not detect
warn you. every object alongside the
vehicle.
OVI053129 WARNING
The Blind Spot Detection System • Always check the road condi-
(BSD) uses a radar sensor to alert tion while driving for unex- WARNING
the driver. pected situations even As the Blind Spot Detection
It senses the rear side territory of the though the Blind Spot (BSD) system is a supplemental
vehicle and provides an indication to Detection System (BSD) is device for your safe driving, it
the driver if it detects an object operating. may be dangerous to rely on
approaching from these areas. (Continued) only the BSD information when
changing the lane. Always pay
attention to drive safely.
5 57
To cancel: Warning type

Press the BSD switch again. The The system will activate when:
indicator on the switch will go off. 1.The system is on.
When the system is not used, turn 2.Vehicle speed is above about 20
the system off by turning off the mph (30 km/h).
switch. 3.Other vehicles are detected in the
rear side.
✽ NOTICE
• If the engine is turned off and on,
the system returns to the previous
OHG055101
state.
• When the system is turned on, the
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) / warning light will illuminate for 3
LCA (Lane Change Assist) seconds on the outside rearview
Operating conditions mirror.
To operate:
Press the BSD switch with the
Ignition switch in the ON position.
The indicator illuminates on the
switch. If vehicle speed exceeds 20
mph (30 km/h) the system will acti-
vate.
5 58
■ Left side ■ Left side ■ Right side
■ Right side
OHG055176 OHG055175 OHG055174

First stage alert Second stage alert
If a vehicle is detected within the The second stage alarm will activate when:
boundary of the system, a warning 1. The first stage alert is on.
light will illuminate on the outside 2. The turn signal light is on to change a lane.
rearview mirror. When the second stage alert is activated, a warning light will blink on the
If the detected vehicle is not in warn- outside rearview mirror.
ing range, the warning will turn off If you turn off the turn signal light, the second stage alert will be deacti-
according to driving conditions. vated.
5 59
OHG055102 OHG045255L OHG045254L

Detecting sensor Warning message If the system does not work properly,
The sensors are located inside of the The message will appear to notify a warning message will appear and
rear bumper. the driver if there are foreign sub- the light on the switch will turn off.
Always keep the rear bumper clean stances on the rear bumper. The light The system will turn off automatical-
for the system to work properly. on the switch and the system will ly. Have your vehicle inspected by an
turn off automatically. authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Remove the foreign substance on
the rear bumper. After the foreign
substance is removed, if you drive for
approximately 10 minutes, the sys-
tem will work normally.
If the system does not work normally
even though the foreign substance is
removed, take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
5 60
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ■ Type A ■ Type B ✽ NOTICE

Operating conditions • If the detected vehicle is got out
To operate: from sensing range, behind your
Go to the User Settings Mode vehicle, moving opposite direction
(Driving Assist) and select RCTA away from your vehicle or moving
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert) on the LCD slow, the warning is cancelled.
display (For more details, refer to • The system may not operate prop-
"LCD Display" in chapter 4.). The erly due to other factors or cir-
system will turn on and standby to cumstances. Always pay attention
activate. The system will activate to your surrounding.
when vehicle speed is below 6.2 • If your vehicle's left or right side
mph (10 km/h) with the shift lever in OHG045334L bumper is blinded by barrier or
R (Reverse). Warning type vehicles, the system sensing ability
If the vehicle detected by the sensors may be reduced.
✽ NOTICE approaches your vehicle, the warn-
The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic ing chime will sound, the warning
Alert) detecting range is about 1.64 light on the outside rearview mirror
ft (0.5m) ~ 65 ft (20m). A vehicle will will blink and a message will appear
be detected if the vehicle speed is 2.5 on the LCD display.
mph (4 km/h) ~ 22.4 mph (36 km/h)
within the detecting range. However,
the detecting range may change
under different conditions. Always
pay attention to the surroundings.
5 61
WARNING (Continued) CAUTION

• The Blind Spot Detection • The system may not work
• The warning light on the out- System (BSD) and Rear Cross
side rearview mirror will illu- properly if the bumper has
Traffic Alert (RCTA) are not a been replaced or if repair work
minate whenever a vehicle is substitute for proper and safe
detected at the rear side by has been done near the sen-
driving practices. Always sor.
the system. drive safely and use caution
To avoid accidents, do not when changing lanes or back- • The detection area differs
focus only on the warning ing the vehicles up. The Blind according to the roads width.
light and neglect to see the Spot Detection System (BSD) If the road is narrow the sys-
surrounding of the vehicle. may not detect every object tem may detect other vehicles
• Drive safely even though the alongside the vehicle. in the next lane. In addition, if
vehicle is equipped with a the road is very wide the sys-
Blind Spot Detection System tem may not detect other vehi-
(BSD) and Rear Cross Traffic cles.
Alert (RCTA). Do not solely • The system may turn off due
rely on the system but check to strong electromagnetic
your surrounding before waves.
changing lanes or backing the
vehicle up.
The system may not alert the
driver in some conditions so
always check the surround-
ings while driving.
(Continued)
5 62
Non-operating condition DRIVER'S ATTENTION (Continued)

Outside rearview mirror may not The driver must be cautious in the - A big vehicle is near such as a
alert the driver when: below situations for the system bus or truck.
- The outside rearview mirror hous- may not detect other vehicles or - A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
ing is damaged or covered with objects in certain circumstances. - A flat trailer is near.
debris. - If the vehicle has started at the
- The window is covered with debris. - Curved roads, tollgates, etc. same time as the vehicle next to
- The windows are severely tinted. - The surrounding of the sensor is you and has accelerated.
polluted with rain, snow, mud, - When the other vehicle passes
etc by at a higher rate of speed.
- The rear bumper near the sensor - When changing lanes.
is covered or hidden with a for- - When going down or up a steep
eign matter such as a sticker, road where the height of the lane
bumper guard, bicycle stand etc. is different.
- The rear bumper is damaged or - When the other vehicle drives
the sensor is out of place. very close.
- The height of the vehicle is - When a trailer or carrier is
altered such as when the trunk is installed.
loaded with heavy objects, or - When the temperature near the
there is low tire pressure etc. rear bumper is high or low.
- Bad weather such as heavy rain - When the sensors are covered
or snow. by a wall or a pillar of a parking
- A fixed object is near such as a lot.
guardrail, tunnel, human and ani- - When your vehicle is backing up,
mal etc. if the detected vehicle also backs
- Metal substances are near the up.
vehicles such as in a construc- (Continued)
tion area.
(Continued)
5 63
(Continued) This device complies with Part 15

- Small objects like shopping of the FCC rules.
carts and strollers. Operation is subject to the following
- If there is a vehicle with two conditions:
decreased ride height (lowered). 1. This device may not cause harm-
- When the vehicle is close to ful interference, and
another vehicle. 2. This device must accept any inter-
- When the vehicle in the next lane ference received, including inter-
moves two lanes away from you ference that may cause undesired
OR when the vehicle two lanes operation.
away moves to the next lane
from you.
- When driving through a narrow
road with many trees or bushes.
- When driving on wet surface.
5 64
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)

• The LDWS does not make the
WARNING - LDWS Alert vehicle change lanes. It is the dri-
The LDWS is only intended to ver's responsibility to always check
provide you with information the road conditions.
regarding your vehicle's posi- • If the sensor cannot detect the lane
tion on the roadway. Upon or if the vehicle speed does not
receiving an LDWS alert, you exceed 38 mph (60 km/h), the
must take the necessary steps LDWS will not be able to notify you
to maintain control of your vehi- if the vehicle departs the lane.
cle. The LDWS does not provide • If your vehicle has window tint or
OHG052091
any steering inputs into the other types of coating on the front
vehicle for you. It can be dan- windshield, the LDWS may not
gerous to make a large sudden work properly.
steering input in response to an • Do not allow any water or liquid to
alert, since that could result in contact the LDWS sensor, or it may
loss of control. be damaged.
• Do not remove the LDWS parts
and do not damage the sensor by
a strong impact.
• Do not put objects that reflect light
OHG052057 on the dash board.
This system detects the lane with a • The operation of the LDWS can be
sensor at the front windshield and affected by several factors (includ-
notifies you if it detects that your ing environmental conditions). It is
vehicle departs from the lane. the responsibility of the driver to
pay attention to the roadway and to
maintain the vehicle in its lane at
all times.
5 65
■ When the sensor detects the lane line ■ Lane departure warning (Left)
OHG055158N OHG055160N
■ When the sensor doesn’t detect the lane line ■ Lane departure warning (Right)
OHG055159N
To operate the LDWS, press the but-
ton with the engine start/stop button
in the ON position. The indicator
(white) illuminates on the cluster. To
cancel the LDWS, press the button
again. The indicator will also be
turned off.
OHG055173N OHG055178N
If the system detects that your vehi- 1.Visual warning
cle is leaving the lane when the If you leave the lane, the lane you
LDWS is operating and vehicle leave on the LCD display blinks
speed exceeds 38 mph (60 km/h), green.
the warning operates as follows:
2.Auditory warning
If you leave the lane, the warning
sound operates.
5 66
The LDWS does not operate The LDWS may not warn you
when: even if the vehicle leaves the
• The driver turns on the turn signal lane, or may warn you even if
to change lanes or operate the the vehicle does not leave the
hazard warning flasher. lane when;
• Driving on the lane line. • The lane can't be visible due to
snow, rain, stain, a puddle or other
environmental conditions.
✽ NOTICE • The brightness of the outside
Always operate the turn signal changes suddenly such as tunnel
before changing lanes. enter/exit.
OHG045530N • The headlights are off at night or in
Warning indicator a tunnel.
When the LDWS is not working prop-
WARNING - LDWS • The color of the lane marking from
erly, the warning light (yellow) will Limitations the road is difficult to distinguish.
illuminate and the warning message The Lane Departure Warning • Driving on a steep grade or a
will come on for a few second. System is a supplemental sys- curve.
Take your vehicle to an authorized tem. Do not solely rely on the • Light such as street light, sunlight
HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys- system but always pay attention or oncoming vehicle light reflects
tem checked. and drive safely. from water on the road.
• The lens or windshield is stained
with foreign matter.
• The sensor cannot detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or
heavy snow.
5 67
• The surrounding of the inside rear • The lane number increases or This device complies with Part 15
view mirror temperature is high decreases or the lane lines are of the FCC rules.
due to a direct ray of light. crossing. Operation is subject to the following
• The lane is very wide or narrow. • Putting something on the dash- two conditions:
• The adverse road conditions cause board. 1. This device may not cause harm-
excessive vehicle vibrations while • Driving with the sun in front of you. ful interference, and
driving. • Driving in areas under construc- 2. This device must accept any inter-
• The lane line is damaged or indis- tion. ference received, including inter-
tinct. • The lane line is more than two in ference that may cause undesired
• The windshield is fogged by humid either side (Left/Right) operation.
air in the vehicle.
• The shadow is on the lane line by a
median strip.
• The sensor cannot distinguish the
lane from the road due to the dust.
• There is a mark similar to a lane
line.
• There is a boundary structure in
the roadway such as a concrete
barrier, guardrails and reflector
post that is inadvertently being
detected by the camera.
• The distance from vehicle ahead is
very short or the vehicle ahead
drives hiding the lane line.
• The vehicle vibrates heavily due to
road conditions.
5 68
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCWS) (IF EQUIPPED)

The Foward Collision Warning
System helps avoid accidents by
identifying critical situations early
and warning the driver.
OHG045531N OHG045228N
FCWS Operation Warning message

To operate: Forward warning
Go to the User Settings Mode A warning message and chime will
(Driving Assist) and select FCW be provided when rapidly approach-
(Forward Collision Warning) on the ing a slower moving, braking or
LCD display (For more details, stopped vehicle ahead.
refer to "LCD Display" in chapter Immediately reduce your speed to
4.). prevent a collision.
The system will turn on and standby
to activate. The system will activate
when vehicle speed is above 25 mph
(40 km/h) and below 109 mph (175
km/h).
FCWS will default ON when vehicle
is restarted even though FCWS was
turned off on User Settings Mode.
5 69
■ Warning message The Forward collision warning

WARNING - Forward system (FCWS) indicator ( )
Collision Warning System will illuminates:
Limitations • When the Forward collision warn-
• The Forward Collision ing system (FCWS) is turned off.
Warning System is a supple- • When the FCW system disabled.
mental system to assist you (ex: Blocked camera, etc.)
and its effects may differ • When there is a malfunction with
according to road and driving the FCW system. In this case, have
conditions. Do not solely rely your vehicle inspected by an
OHG045529N
on the system and always pay ■ Master warning light
attention to prevent danger-
ous situations from occur-
ring.
• FCWS is a warning system
and does not apply the brakes
automatically in a near crash
situation. FCWS may not pro-
vide a warning with enough
time to help avoid a crash.
FCWS does not detect pedes- OHG045534N
trians, animals, signs, motor-
cycles, bicycles, construction FCWS malfunction message
or other objects. It is the When the FCWS is not working
responsibility of the driver to properly, the warning message will
pay attention to the roadway come on for a few second. After the
to prevent collisions. message disappears, the master
warning light will illuminate.
5 70
Limitations of the System - The front vehicle has a separate

The Forward Collision Warning lamp or LED lamp at the rear of the
System may have limits to its ability vehicle.
to detect distance to the vehicle - Pass through a tunnel where the
ahead due to road and traffic condi- difference of intensity of illumina-
tions. tion is high.
The FCW cannot detect vehicles or - Driving with the sun in front of you.
objects as vehicles when: - The approaching vehicle turns high
- The camera lens is covered with beam on.
dirt. - The vehicle violently vibrates due to
- There is heavy rain or heavy snow. road conditions.
OHG045537N
- Driving on a curve. - The vehicle is tilted from a flat tire
FCWS disabled - Driving uphill or downhill. or being towed.
When the camera is blocked from - A vehicle suddenly cut in on your - The vehicle ahead is not distin-
foreign matters, the warning mes- lane. guishable due to multiple or repeat-
sage will come on a few second. ed shape lamps.
- The front vehicle suddenly departs
After the foreign substance is from the lane or it is hidden by other - The vehicle ahead is not distin-
removed, if you drive for a few min- objects. guishable due to objects that can
utes, the system will work normally. be mistaken for a vehicle.
- A vehicle passes by at a higher rate
If the system does not work normally of speed. - The surrounding environments
even though the foreign substance is such as shadow or markers on a
removed, take your vehicle to an - An unusual shape vehicle is ahead
such as a trailer, special access road, etc. could be mistaken as a
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and vehicle.
have the system checked. vehicles or a truck with unique
shaped cargo. - When your vehicle passes by at a
- The rear lamps of the vehicle close distance to the vehicle ahead.
ahead is missing, installed on an - The vehicle ahead is not distin-
unusual place or installed unevenly. guishable due to dark sight.
- When the back side of vehicle
ahead is not distinguishable.
5 71
This device complies with Part 15

of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
5 72
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends • Drive at a moderate speed. The • Keep your vehicle in good condi-
mainly on your style of driving, where faster you drive, the more fuel your tion. For better fuel economy and
you drive and when you drive. vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate reduced maintenance costs, main-
Each of these factors affects how speed, especially on the highway, tain your vehicle in accordance
many miles you can get from a gallon is one of the most effective ways to with the maintenance schedule in
of fuel. To operate your vehicle as reduce fuel consumption. section 7. If you drive your vehicle
economically as possible, use the • Do not "ride" the brake pedal. This in severe conditions, more frequent
following driving suggestions to help can increase fuel consumption and maintenance is required (see sec-
save money in both fuel and repairs: also increase wear on these com- tion 7 for details).
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a ponents. In addition, driving with • Keep your vehicle clean. For best
moderate rate. Avoid making "jack- your foot resting on the brake pedal operation, your vehicle should be
rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts may cause the brakes to overheat, kept clean and free of corrosive
and maintain a steady cruising which reduces their effectiveness materials. It is especially important
speed. Don't race between stop- and may lead to more serious con- that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
lights. Try to adjust your speed to sequences. allowed to accumulate on the
that of the other traffic so you don't • Take care of your tires. Keep them underside of the vehicle. This extra
have to change speeds unneces- inflated to the recommended pres- weight can result in increased fuel
sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever sure. Incorrect inflation, either too consumption and also contribute to
possible. Always maintain a safe much or too little, results in unnec- corrosion.
distance from other vehicles so essary tire wear. Check the tire • Travel lightly. Do not carry unnec-
you can avoid unnecessary brak- pressures at least once a month. essary weight in your vehicle.
ing. This also reduces brake wear. • Be sure that the wheels are Weight reduces fuel economy.
aligned correctly. Improper align- • Do not let the engine idle longer
ment can result from hitting curbs than necessary. If you are waiting
or driving too fast over irregular (and not in traffic), turn off your
surfaces. Poor alignment causes engine and restart only when
faster tire wear and may also result you're ready to go.
in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
5 73
• Remember, your vehicle does not Keeping a vehicle in good operating

require extended warm-up. After condition is important both for econ-
the engine has started, allow the omy and safety. Therefore, have an
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds authorized HYUNDAI dealer perform
prior to placing the vehicle in gear. scheduled inspections and mainte-
In very cold weather, however, give nance.
your engine a slightly longer warm-
up period. WARNING - Engine off
• Do not "lug" or "over-rev" the during motion
engine. Lugging is driving very
slowly in too high a gear resulting Never turn the engine off to
in engine bucking. If this happens, coast down hills or anytime the
shift to a lower gear. Over-revving vehicle is in motion. The power
is racing the engine beyond its safe steering and power brakes will
limit. This can be avoided by shift- not function properly without
ing at the recommended speeds. the engine running which could
cause serious injury or death.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly. Keep the engine on and down-
The air conditioning system is shift to an appropriate gear for
operated by engine power so your engine braking effect.
fuel economy is reduced when you
use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset
some of this loss, slow down when
driving in these conditions.
5 74
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

Hazardous driving conditions Rocking the vehicle
When hazardous driving conditions
WARNING - Downshifting If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
are encountered such as water, Do not downshift with an auto- to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz- matic transaxle while driving on first turn the steering wheel right and
ards, follow these suggestions: slippery surfaces. The sudden left to clear the area around your
• Drive cautiously and allow extra change in tire speed could cause front wheels. Then, shift back and
distance for braking. the tires to skid and result in an forth between R (Reverse) and any
accident. forward gear in vehicles equipped
• Avoid sudden movements in brak-
ing or steering. with an automatic transaxle. Do not
• Do not pump the brake pedal on a race the engine, and spin the wheels
vehicle equipped with ABS. as little as possible. If you are still
stuck after a few tries, have the vehi-
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use cle pulled out by a tow vehicle to
second gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid engine overheating and possi-
avoid spinning the drive wheels. ble damage to the transaxle.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or The ESC system should be turned
other non-slip material under the OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
drive wheels to provide traction
when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
• Leave the ESC system on for best CAUTION - Vehicle rocking
traction when attempting to get Prolonged rocking may cause
vehicle unstuck. engine overheating, transaxle
damage or failure, and tire dam-
age.
5 75
WARNING - Spinning tires

Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 35
mph (56 km/h). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stopped could cause
a tire to overheat which could
result in tire damage that may
injure bystanders.
OBH058035L OMC035004
WARNING - Sudden Smooth cornering Driving at night
vehicle movement
Avoid braking or gear changing in Because night driving presents more
Do not attempt to rock the vehi- corners, especially when roads are hazards than driving in the daylight,
cle if people or objects are near- wet. Ideally, corners should always here are some important tips to
by. The vehicle may suddenly be taken under gentle acceleration. If remember:
move forward or backwards as you follow these suggestions, tire • Slow down and keep more distance
it becomes unstuck. wear will be held to a minimum. between you and other vehicles, as
it may be more difficult to see at
✽ NOTICE night, especially in areas where
there may not be any street lights.
The ESC system should be turned
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle. • Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's headlights.
5 76
• Keep your headlights clean and Driving in the rain Driving in flooded areas
properly aimed. Dirty or improperly Rain and wet roads can make driving Avoid driving through flooded areas
aimed headlights will make it much dangerous, especially if you are not unless you are sure the water is no
more difficult to see at night. prepared for the slick pavement. higher than the bottom of the wheel
Headlight operation when using Here are a few things to consider hub. Drive through any water slowly.
windshield wipers is mandatory in when driving in the rain: Allow adequate stopping distance
some states. • A heavy rainfall will make it harder because brake performance may be
• Avoid staring directly at the head- to see and will increase the dis- affected.
lights of oncoming vehicles. You tance needed to stop your vehicle, After driving through water, dry the
could be temporarily blinded, and it so slow down. brakes by gently applying them sev-
will take several seconds for your • Keep your windshield wiping eral times while the vehicle is moving
eyes to readjust to the darkness. equipment in good shape. Replace slowly.
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or Driving off-road
missing areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condi- Drive carefully off-road because your
tion, making a quick stop on wet vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
pavement can cause a skid and roots of trees. Become familiar with
possibly lead to an accident. Be the off-road conditions where you
sure your tires are in good shape. are going to drive before you begin
driving.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
5 77
Highway driving Fuel, engine coolant and engine

Tires WARNING - Under/over oil
inflated tires High speed travel consumes more
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pres- Always check the tires for proper fuel than urban motoring. Do not for-
sures will result in overheating and inflation before driving. get to check both engine coolant and
possible failure of the tires. Underinflated or overinflated engine oil.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires tires can cause poor handling,
which may result in reduced traction loss of vehicle control, and sud- Drive belt
or tire failure. den tire failure leading to acci- A loose or damaged drive belt may
Never exceed the maximum tire dents, injuries, and even death. overheat the engine.
inflation pressure shown on the tires. For proper tire pressures, refer to
“Tires and wheels” in section 8.
WARNING - Tire tread

Always check the tire tread
before driving your vehicle.
Worn-out tires can result in loss
of vehicle control, accidents,
injuries, and even death. Worn-
out tires should be replaced as
soon as possible. For further
information and tread limits,
refer to "Tires and wheels" in
section 7.
5 78
WINTER DRIVING
Snowy or icy conditions Snow tires
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
may be necessary to use snow tires cle, make sure they are radial tires of
or to install tire chains on your tires. the same size and load range as the
If snow tires are needed, it is neces- original tires. Mount snow tires on all
sary to select tires equivalent in size four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
and type of the original equipment handling in all weather conditions.
tires. Failure to do so may adversely Keep in mind that the traction provid-
affect the safety and handling of your ed by snow tires on dry roads may
vehicle. Furthermore, speeding, not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
rapid acceleration, sudden brake inal equipment tires. You should drive
1JBB3305 applications, and sharp turns are cautiously even when the roads are
potentially very hazardous practices. clear. Check with the tire dealer for
Severe weather conditions in the win-
During deceleration, use engine maximum speed recommendations.
ter result in greater wear and other
problems. To minimize the risks of braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
winter driving, you should follow brake applications on snowy or icy WARNING - Snow tire
these suggestions: roads may cause skids to occur. You sized
need to keep sufficient distance Snow tires should be equivalent
between the vehicle in operation in in size and type to the vehicle's
front and your vehicle. Also, apply standard tires. Otherwise, the
the brake gently. It should be noted safety and handling of your vehi-
that installing tire chains on the tire cle may be adversely affected.
will provide a greater driving force,
but will not prevent side skids.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munic-
✽ NOTICE ipal regulations for possible restric-
Tire chains are not legal in all states. tions against their use.
Check state laws before fitting tire
chains.
5 79
When using tire chains, install them Chain installation

on the front tires only. When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and
CAUTION - Snow chains mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with chains installed. If
Make sure the snow chains are you hear the chains contacting the
the correct size and type for body or chassis, stop and tighten
your tires. Incorrect snow chains them. If they still make contact, slow
can cause damage to the vehicle down until it stops. Remove the
body and suspension and may chains as soon as you begin driving
not be covered by your vehicle on cleared roads.
manufacturer warranty.
1JBA4068
Tire chains WARNING - Mounting
• The snow chain connecting hooks chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are may be damaged from contacting
thinner, they can be damaged by vehicle components causing the When mounting snow chains,
mounting some types of snow chains snow chains to come loose from park the vehicle on level ground
on them. Therefore, the use of snow the tire. Make sure the snow chains away from traffic. Turn on the
tires is recommended instead of are SAE class “S” certified. vehicle Hazard Warning flashers
snow chains. Do not mount tire and place a triangular emer-
• Always check chain installation for
chains on vehicles equipped with gency warning device behind the
proper mounting after driving
aluminum wheels; snow chains may vehicle if available. Always place
approximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles to
cause damage to the wheels. If snow the vehicle in P (Park), apply the
ensure safe mounting. Retighten or
chains must be used, use wire-type parking brake and turn off the
remount the chains if they are
chains with a thickness of less than engine before installing snow
loose.
0.47 in. Damage to your vehicle chains.
caused by improper snow chain use
is not covered by your vehicle manu-
facturer's warranty.
5 80
• The use of chains may adversely Use high quality ethylene gly- Change to "winter weight" oil
affect vehicle handling. col coolant if necessary
• Do not exceed 20 mph or the Your vehicle is delivered with high In some climates it is recommended
chain manufacturer’s recommend- quality ethylene glycol coolant in the that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
ed speed limit, whichever is lower. cooling system. It is the only type of oil be used during cold weather. See
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps, coolant that should be used because section 8 for recommendations. If
holes, sharp turns, and other road it helps prevent corrosion in the cool- you aren't sure what weight oil you
hazards, which may cause the ing system, lubricates the water should use, consult an authorized
vehicle to bounce. pump and prevents freezing. Be sure HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel to replace or replenish your coolant
braking. in accordance with the maintenance Check spark plugs and igni-
schedule in section 7. Before winter, tion system
have your coolant tested to assure
CAUTION - Snow chains that its freezing point is sufficient for Inspect your spark plugs as described
• Chains that are the wrong size the temperatures anticipated during in section 7 and replace them if nec-
or improperly installed can the winter. essary. Also check all ignition wiring
damage your vehicle's brake and components to be sure they are
lines, suspension, body and not cracked, worn or damaged in any
Check battery and cables way.
wheels.
Winter puts additional burdens on
• Stop driving and retighten the
the battery system. Visually inspect
chains any time you hear them
the battery and cables as described
hitting the vehicle.
in section 7. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
service station.
5 81
To keep locks from freezing Don't let your parking brake Carry emergency equipment
To keep the locks from freezing, freeze Depending on the severity of the
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or Under some conditions your parking weather where you drive your vehicle,
glycerine into the key opening. If a brake can freeze in the engaged posi- you should carry appropriate emer-
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with tion. This is most likely to happen gency equipment. Some of the items
an approved de-icing fluid to remove when there is an accumulation of you may want to carry include tire
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, snow or ice around or near the rear chains, tow straps or chains, flash-
you may be able to thaw it out by brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there light, emergency flares, sand, shovel,
using a heated key. Handle the heat- is a risk the parking brake may freeze, jumper cables, window scraper,
ed key with care to avoid injury. apply it only temporarily while you put gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blan-
the shift lever in P (Park) and block ket, etc.
Use approved window washer the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot
anti-freeze in system roll. Then release the parking brake. Don't place foreign objects or
To keep the water in the window materials in the engine com-
washer system from freezing, add an Don't let ice and snow accu- partment
approved window washer anti-freeze mulate underneath Placement of foreign objects or
solution in accordance with instruc- Under some conditions, snow and materials which prevent cooling of
tions on the container. Window wash- ice can build up under the fenders the engine, in the engine compart-
er anti-freeze is available from an and interfere with the steering. When ment, may cause a failure or com-
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and driving in severe winter conditions bustion. The manufacturer is not
most auto parts outlets. Do not use where this may happen, you should responsible for the damage caused
engine coolant or other types of anti- periodically check underneath the by such placement.
freeze as these may damage the vehicle to be sure the movement of
paint finish. the front wheels and the steering
components is not obstructed.
5 82
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

■ Type A Vehicle capacity weight: Seating capacity:
904 lbs. (410 kg) Total : 5 persons
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi- (Front seat : 2 persons,
mum combined weight of occupants Rear seat : 3 persons)
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped Seating capacity is the maximum
with a trailer, the combined weight number of occupants including a
includes the tongue load. driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
OHG053083A all of the occupants, and the weight
■ Type B of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
OHG053084A
Tire and loading information

label
The label located on the driver's door
sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle
capacity weight.
5 83
Towing capacity: Steps for determining correct 5. Determine the combined weight of
We do not recommend using this load limit luggage and cargo being loaded
vehicle for trailer towing. 1. Locate the statement "The com- on the vehicle. That weight may
bined weight of occupants and not safely exceed the available
Cargo capacity: cargo should never exceed XXX cargo and luggage load capacity
The cargo capacity of your vehicle kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's calculated in Step 4.
will increase or decrease depending placard. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
on the weight and the number of 2. Determine the combined weight of er, load from your trailer will be
occupants and the tongue load, if the driver and passengers that will transferred to your vehicle. Consult
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer. be riding in your vehicle. this manual to determine how this
3. Subtract the combined weight of reduces the available cargo and
the driver and passengers from luggage load capacity of your
XXX kg or XXX lbs. vehicle.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5 84
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
A B C A B C A B C
C190F01JM C190F02JM C190F03JM
Item Description Total Item Description Total Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity 904 lbs Vehicle Capacity 904 lbs Vehicle Capacity 904 lbs
A A A
Weight (410 kg) Weight (410 kg) Weight (410 kg)
Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant
300 lbs 750 lbs 860 lbs
B Weight B Weight B Weight
(136 kg) (340 kg) (390 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 172 lbs (78 kg) × 5
Available Cargo and 604 lbs Available Cargo and 154 lbs Available Cargo and 44 lbs
C C C
Luggage weight (274 kg) Luggage weight (70 kg) Luggage weight (20 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
5 85
To find out the actual loads on your

front and rear axles, you need to go to WARNING - Overloading
a weigh station and weigh your vehi- Do not overload your vehicle.
cle. Your dealer can help you with this. Overloading your vehicle can
Be sure to spread out your load equal- cause heat buildup in your vehi-
ly on both sides of the centerline. cle's tires and possible tire failure,
increased stopping distances and
WARNING - Overloading poor vehicle handling-all of which
may result in a crash.
Never exceed the GVWR for your
vehicle, the GAWR for either the
front or rear axle and vehicle CAUTION
OBH059070
capacity weight. Exceeding
Certification label these ratings can affect your Overloading your vehicle may
vehicle’s handling and braking cause damage. Repairs would
The certification label is located on not be covered by your warranty.
the driver's door sill at the center pillar. ability, and cause an accident.
Do not overload your vehicle.
This label shows the maximum allow-
able weight of the fully loaded vehi- The label will help you decide how
cle. This is called the GVWR (Gross much cargo and installed equipment
Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR your vehicle can carry. WARNING - Loose cargo
includes the weight of the vehicle, all Do not travel with unsecured
occupants, fuel and cargo. If you carry items inside your vehicle - objects in the passenger com-
This label also tells you the maxi- like suitcases, tools, packages, or partment of your vehicle (e.g.
mum weight that can be supported anything else - they are moving as suit cases or unsecured child
by the front and rear axles, called fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop seats). These items may strike
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, and injure occupants during a
the items will keep going and can sudden stop or crash.
cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
5 86
VEHICLE WEIGHT
This section will guide you in the Cargo weight GVWR (Gross vehicle weight
proper loading of your vehicle, to This figure includes all weight added rating)
keep your loaded vehicle weight to the Base Curb Weight, including This is the maximum allowable
within its design rating capability. cargo and optional equipment. weight of the fully loaded vehicle
Properly loading your vehicle will (including all options, equipment,
provide maximum return of the vehi- passengers and cargo). The GVWR
cle design performance. Before load- GAW (Gross axle weight)
is shown on the certification label
ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself This is the total weight placed on located on the driver’s (or front pas-
with the following terms for determin- each axle (front and rear) - including senger’s) door sill.
ing your vehicle's weight ratings, vehicle curb weight and all payload.
from the vehicle's specifications and
the certification label: GAWR (Gross axle weight rat-
ing)
Base curb weight This is the maximum allowable
This is the weight of the vehicle weight that can be carried by a single
including a full tank of fuel and all axle (front or rear). These numbers
standard equipment. It does not are shown on the certification label.
include passengers, cargo, or option- The total load on each axle must
al equipment. never exceed its GAWR.
Vehicle curb weight GVW (Gross vehicle weight)

This is the weight of your new vehicle This is the Base Curb Weight plus
when you picked it up from your deal- actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
5 87
TRAILER TOWING
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
5 88
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing . . . . . 6-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• If engine dose not turn over or turns over slowly . . 6-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . 6-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . . . . . . . 6-8
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 6
• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
• Jack label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
• Removable towing hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
• Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
• Tie-down hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
ROAD WARNING
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• You can operate the turn signals
when the hazard flasher is on. The
hazard flasher will rework when
you turn off the turn signals.
• The hazard flasher will stop if you
push the switch one time while the
turn signals and the hazard flasher
work simultaneously. To turn the
OHG045517 hazard warning lights on again,
Hazard warning flasher push the switch a second time.
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exer-
cise extreme caution when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Press the flasher switch with the igni-
tion switch in any position. The flash-
er switch is located in the center con-
sole switch panel. All turn signal
lights will flash simultaneously.
6 2
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING

If the engine stalls at a cross- If you have a flat tire while If engine stalls while driving
road or crossing driving 1. Reduce your speed gradually,
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or If a tire goes flat while you are driving: keeping a straight line. Move cau-
crossing, set the shift lever in the N 1. Take your foot off the accelerator tiously off the road to a safe place.
(Neutral) position and then push the pedal and let the vehicle slow 2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
vehicle to a safe place. down while driving straight ahead. 3. Try to start the engine again. If
Do not apply the brakes immedi- your vehicle will not start, contact
ately or attempt to pull off the road an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or
as this may cause a loss of con- seek other qualified assistance.
trol. When the vehicle has slowed
to such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on a firm level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn
on your emergency hazard flash-
ers, set the parking brake and put
the transaxle in P (Park).
3. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
4. When changing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in
this section.
6 3
IF THE ENGINE DOES NOT START

If engine does not turn over or If engine turns over normally
turns over slowly WARNING - Push/pull but does not start
1. If your vehicle has an automatic start 1. Check fuel level.
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is Do not push or pull the vehicle to
2. With the ignition switch in the OFF
in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the start it. Push or pull starting may
position, check all connectors at
emergency brake is set. cause the catalytic converter to
the ignition coils and spark plugs.
overload and create a fire hazard.
2. Check the battery connections to Reconnect any that may be dis-
be sure they are clean and tight. connected or loose.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light 3. Check the fuel line in the engine
dims or goes out when you oper- compartment.
ate the starter, the battery is dis- 4. If the engine still does not start,
charged. call an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
4. Do not push or pull the vehicle to er or seek other qualified assis-
start it. See instructions for "Jump tance.
starting".
6 4
EMERGENCY STARTING
■ Engine compartment Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
WARNING - Frozen
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid batteries
harm to yourself or damage to your Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle or battery, follow the jump vehicle if the discharged battery
starting procedures. If in doubt, we is frozen or if the electrolyte level
strongly recommend that you have a is low as the battery may rupture
competent technician or towing serv- or explode causing serious
ice jump start your vehicle. injury.
CAUTION - 12 volt
1VQA4001
battery WARNING - Battery
Connect cables in numerical order Use only a 12-volt jumper sys- Keep all flames or sparks away
and disconnect in reverse order. tem. You can damage a 12-volt from the battery. The battery
➀ Positive (+) battery terminal on starting motor, ignition system, produces hydrogen gas which
your vehicle and other electrical parts will explode if exposed to flame
or sparks causing serious
➁ Positive (+) battery terminal on beyond repair by use of a 24-
injury.
the booster battery volt power supply (either two
➂ Negative (-) battery terminal on 12-volt batteries in series or a
the booster battery 24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Sulfuric acid
➃ Negative (-) cable to a solid, sta- risk
tionary metallic point on the When jump starting your vehicle
engine (such as the engine lifting WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec- be careful not to get acid on
bracket). DO NOT connect it yourself, your clothing or on the
directly to the negative battery trolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture vehicle. Automobile batteries
terminal. contain sulfuric acid. This is poi-
or explode causing serious
injury. sonous and highly corrosive.
6 5
Jump starting procedure Do not allow the jumper cables to Push-starting

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12- contact anything except the correct Vehicles equipped with automatic
volt and that its negative terminal is battery terminals or the correct transaxle cannot be push-started.
grounded. ground. Do not lean over the battery
when making connections. Follow the directions in this section
2. If the booster battery is in another for jump-starting.
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch. CAUTION - Battery cables
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical Do not connect the jumper cable
loads. from the negative terminal of the
4. Connect the jumper cables in the booster battery to the negative
exact sequence shown in the illustra- terminal of the discharged bat-
tion. tery. This can cause the dis-
➀ Connect one end of the red charged battery to overheat and
jumper cable to the positive termi- crack, releasing battery acid.
nal on your vehicle (1).
➁ Connect the other end of the red 5. Start the engine of the vehicle with
jumper cable to the positive termi- the booster battery and let it run at
nal on the booster battery (2). 2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
the vehicle with the discharged
➂ Connect one end of the black battery.
jumper cable to the negative ter-
minal of the booster battery (3). 6. Once the engine has started, care-
Connect the other end of the fully remove the jumper cables in
➃ black jumper cable to a solid, sta- the reverse order of attachment.
tionary metallic point on the If the cause of your battery discharg-
engine (such as the engine lifting ing is not apparent, you should have
bracket). DO NOT connect it your vehicle checked by an author-
directly to the negative battery ized HYUNDAI dealer.
terminal. Do not connect it to or
near any part that moves when
the engine is cranked.
6 6
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gauge indicates 4. Check to see if the water pump
overheating, you experience a loss drive belt is missing. If it is not WARNING - Radiator cap
of power, or hear loud pinging or missing, check to see that it is Do not remove the radiator cap
knocking, the engine is probably too tight. If the drive belt seems to be when the engine is hot. This may
hot. If this happens, you should: satisfactory, check for coolant result in coolant being blown out
leaking from the radiator, hoses or of the opening and cause serious
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon under the vehicle. (If the air condi- burns.
as it is safe to do so. tioning had been in use, it is nor-
mal for clear water to be draining
2. Place the shift lever in P (Park) from it when you stop). 6. If you cannot find the cause of the
and set the parking brake. If the air overheating, wait until the engine
conditioning is on, turn it off. temperature has returned to nor-
WARNING - Under the mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
3. If engine coolant is running out hood
under the vehicle or steam is com- carefully add coolant to the reser-
ing out from the hood, stop the While the engine is running, voir to bring the fluid level in the
engine. Do not open the hood until keep hair, hands and clothing reservoir up to the halfway mark.
the coolant has stopped running away from moving parts such
7. Proceed with caution, keeping
or the steaming has stopped. If as the fan and drive belts to pre-
alert for further signs of overheat-
there is no visible loss of engine vent injury.
ing. If overheating happens again,
coolant and no steam, leave the call an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
engine running and check to be 5. If the water pump drive belt is bro- er for assistance.
sure the engine cooling fan is ken or engine coolant is leaking Serious loss of coolant indicates
operating. If the fan is not running, out, stop the engine immediately there is a leak in the cooling system
turn the engine off. and call the nearest authorized and this should be checked as soon
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance. as possible by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
6 7
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if pro- Please note that the TPMS is not a
vided), should be checked monthly substitute for proper tire mainte-
when cold and inflated to the inflation nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
pressure recommended by the vehicle bility to maintain correct tire pres-
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or sure, even if under-inflation has not
tire inflation pressure label. (If your reached the level to trigger illumina-
vehicle has tires of a different size than tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
the size indicated on the vehicle plac- telltale.
ard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire infla-
OHG065001/Q tion pressure for those tires.) Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
As an added safety feature, your indicate when the system is not
vehicle has been equipped with a tire operating properly. The TPMS mal-
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) function indicator is combined with
that illuminates a low tire pressure the low tire pressure telltale. When
telltale when one or more of your the system detects a malfunction,
tires is significantly under-inflated. the telltale will flash for approximate-
Accordingly, when the low tire pres- ly one minute and then remain con-
sure telltale illuminates, you should tinuously illuminated. This sequence
stop and check your tires as soon as will continue upon subsequent vehi-
possible, and inflate them to the cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
OHG045246L/Q
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- tion exists. When the malfunction
(1) Low tire pressure telltale / cantly under-inflated tire causes the indicator is illuminated, the system
TPMS malfunction indicator tire to overheat and can lead to tire may not be able to detect or signal
(2) Low tire pressure position telltale failure. Under-inflation also reduces low tire pressure as intended.
(Shown on the LCD display) fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
6 8
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a Low tire pressure After restarting with the spare tire, the
variety of reasons, including the telltale TPMS malfunction indicator and low
installation of replacement or alter- tire pressure position telltale light will
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle remain on about 20 minutes of con-
that prevent the TPMS from function- Low tire pressure tinuous driving, then the TPMS mal-
ing properly. Always check the TPMS position telltale function indicator will blink for approx-
malfunction telltale after replacing imately 1 minute but the low tire pres-
one or more tires or wheels on your When the tire pressure monitoring sure position telltale light will turn off.
vehicle to ensure that the replace- system warning indicators are illumi-
ment or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to func-
nated, one or more of your tires is ✽ NOTICE
significantly under-inflated. The low
tion properly. tire pressure position telltale light will The compact spare tire is not
indicate which tire is significantly equipped with a tire pressure sensor.
✽ NOTICE under-inflated by illuminating the cor-
Take your vehicle to the nearest responding position light.
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and If either telltale illuminates, immedi-
have the system checked if any of ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
the below happens: cornering and anticipate increased
1.The low tire pressure telltale/ stopping distances. You should stop
TPMS malfunction indicator do and check your tires as soon as pos-
not illuminate for 3 seconds when sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
the ignition switch is turned to the pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s
ON position or engine is running. placard or tire inflation pressure label
2.The TPMS malfunction indicator located on the driver’s side center pil-
remains illuminated after blinking lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a
for approximately 1 minute. service station or if the tire cannot
3.The Low tire pressure position hold the newly added air, replace the
telltale remains illuminated. low pressure tire with a spare tire.
6 9
TPMS (Tire Pressure

CAUTION WARNING - Low pressure Monitoring System)
In winter or cold weather, the damage malfunction indicator
low tire pressure telltale may be Do not drive on low pressure
illuminated if the tire pressure tires. Significantly low tire pres- The TPMS malfunction indicator will
was adjusted to the recom- sure can cause the tires to over- illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mended tire inflation pressure heat and fail making the vehicle mately one minute when there is a
in warm weather. It does not unstable resulting in increased problem with the Tire Pressure
mean your TPMS is malfunction- braking distances and a loss of Monitoring System. If the system is
ing because the decreased tem- vehicle control. able to correctly detect an underinfla-
perature leads to a proportional tion warning at the same time as sys-
lowering of tire pressure. tem failure then the TPMS malfunction
When you drive your vehicle indicator remains illuminated after
from a warm area to a cold area blinking for approximately 1 minute and
or from a cold area to a warm the low tire pressure position telltale
area, or the outside temperature will illuminate. For example, if Front Left
is greatly higher or lower, you sensor fails, the TPMS malfunction
should check the tire inflation indicator remains illuminated after
pressure and adjust the tires to blinking for approximately 1 minute, but
the recommended tire inflation if the Front Right, Rear Left, or Rear
pressure. Right tire is under-inflated, the low tire
pressure position telltales may illumi-
nate together with the TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator. Have the system
dealer as soon as possible to deter-
mine the cause of the problem.
6 10
• The TPMS malfunction indicator Changing a tire with TPMS Each wheel is equipped with a tire
may blink for approximately 1 If you have a flat tire, the low Tire pressure sensor mounted inside the
minute and then remain continu- Pressure and Position telltales will tire behind the valve stem. You must
ously illuminated if the vehicle is come on. Have the flat tire repaired use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
moving around electric power sup- by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer ommended that you always have your
ply cables or radios transmitter as soon as possible or replace the tires serviced by an authorized
such as at police stations, govern- flat tire with the spare tire. HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
ment and public offices, broadcast- After you replace the low pressure
ing stations, military installations, tire with the spare tire, the TPMS
airports, or transmitting towers, CAUTION malfunction indicator may blink for
etc. This can interfere with normal Never use a puncture-repairing approximately 1 minute and then
operation of the Tire Pressure agent not approved by HYUNDAI remain continuously illuminated
Monitoring System (TPMS). to repair and/or inflate a low because the TPMS sensor is not
• The TPMS malfunction indicator pressure tire. The tire sealant mounted on the spare wheel.
may blink for approximately 1 not approved by HYUNDAI may Once the low pressure tire is reinflat-
minute and then remain continu- damage the tire pressure sen- ed to the recommended pressure
ously illuminated if snow chains are sor. The sealant on the tire pres- and installed on the vehicle is initiat-
used or some separate electronic sure sensor and wheel shall be ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
devices such as notebook comput- eliminated when you replace the er, the TPMS malfunction indicator
er, mobile charger, remote starter tire with a new one. and the low tire pressure and posi-
or navigation etc., are used in the tion telltales will turn off within a few
vehicle. This can interfere with nor- minutes of driving.
mal operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). If the indicators do not go off after a
few minutes of driving, please visit
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
6 11
You may not be able identify a low tire • The TPMS cannot alert you to This device complies with Part
by simply looking at it. Always use a severe and sudden tire damage 15 of the FCC rules.
good quality tire pressure gauge to caused by external factors such as Operation is subject to the following
measure the tire's inflation pressure. nails or road debris. two conditions:
Please note that a tire that is hot • If you feel any vehicle instability,
(from being driven) will have a higher 1.This device may not cause harmful
immediately take your foot off the interference, and
pressure measurement than a tire accelerator, apply the brakes gradu-
that is cold (from sitting stationary for ally and with light force, and slowly 2.This device must accept any inter-
at least 3 hours and driven less than move to a safe position off the road. ference received, including inter-
1 mile during that 3 hour period). ference that may cause undesired
Allow the tire to cool before measur- operation.
ing the inflation pressure. Always be CAUTION
sure the tire is cold before inflating to Tampering with, modifying or
the recommended pressure. disabling the Tire Pressure CAUTION
Monitoring System (TPMS) com- Changes or modifications not
A cold tire means the vehicle has ponents may interfere with the expressly approved by the party
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for system's ability to warn the driv- responsible for compliance
less than 1 mile in that 3 hour period. er of low tire pressure condi- could void the user's authority
tions and/or TPMS malfunctions. to operate the equipment.
CAUTION Tampering with, modifying, or
Do not use any tire sealant if your disabling the Tire Pressure
vehicle is equipped with a Tire Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
Pressure Monitoring System. The ponents may void the warranty
liquid sealant can damage the for that portion of the vehicle.
tire pressure sensors.
6 12
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

Jacking instructions • Always move the vehicle complete-
The jack is provided for emergency ly off the road and onto the shoulder
tire changing only. before trying to change a tire. The
To prevent the jack from “rattling” jack should be used on a firm level
while the vehicle is in motion, store it ground. If you cannot find a firm
properly. level place off the road, call a towing
service company for assistance.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury. • Be sure to use the correct front and
rear jacking positions on the vehi-
cle; never use the bumpers or any
WARNING - Changing other part of the vehicle for jacking
OHG061021A tires support.
Jack and tools Never attempt vehicle repairs in
The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut the traffic lanes of a public road WARNING - Jack
wrench are stored in the luggage or highway. Doing so could
Do not place any portion of your
compartment. Pull up the luggage result in serious injuries or
body under a vehicle that is only
box cover to reach this equipment. death.
supported by a jack since the
(1) Jack handle vehicle can easily roll off the jack
(2) Jack causing serious injury or death.
Use vehicle support stands.
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
6 13
• Do not allow anyone to remain in

the vehicle while it is on the jack.
• Make sure any children present
Open
are in a secure place away from Close
the road and from the vehicle to be
raised with the jack.
WARNING
- Running vehicle on jack
Do not start or run the engine of
the vehicle while the vehicle is ONF068004 OBH068002L
on the jack as this may cause Removing and storing the Changing tires
the vehicle to fall off the jack spare tire
resulting in serious injury or 1. Park on a level surface and apply
death. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt the parking brake firmly.
counterclockwise. 2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
Store the tire in the reverse order of (Park).
removal. 3. Activate the hazard warning flasher.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
6 14
■ Type A
OHG060004
■ Type B
OHG065012N OHG061014A
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, 6. Insert the jack handle into the
jack, jack handle, and spare tire groove of the wheel cap and gen-
from the vehicle. tly pry up the cap. (if equipped)
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
from the jack position.
✽ NOTICE OHG061013A
• To prevent vehicle movement
7. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
while changing a tire, always set
terclockwise one turn each, but do
the parking brake fully, and
not remove any nut until the tire
always block the wheel diagonally
has been raised off the ground.
opposite the wheel being changed.
• We recommend that the wheels of
the vehicle be blocked, and that no
person remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
6 15
10. Loosen the wheel nuts and

remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the
wheel onto them. If this is diffi-
cult, tip the wheel slightly and get
the top hole in the wheel lined up
with the top stud. Then jiggle the
OHG065011N OHG060006 wheel back and forth until the
wheel can slide over the other
8. Place the jack at the front or rear 9. Insert the jack handle into the jack studs.
jacking position closest to the tire and turn it clockwise, raising the
you are changing. Place the jack vehicle until the tire just clears the Wheels may have sharp edges.
at the designated locations under ground. This measurement is Handle them carefully to avoid possi-
the frame. The jacking positions approximately 1.2 in. (30 mm). ble injury. Before putting the wheel
are plates welded to the frame into place, be sure that there is noth-
Before removing the wheel lug ing on the hub or wheel (such as
with two tabs and a raised dot to nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
index with the jack. mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that prevents
ble and that there is no chance for with the wheel from fitting firmly
movement or slippage. against the hub.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
6 16
■ Type A shown in the image until they are all

WARNING - Installing a tight. Then double-check each nut for
wheel tightness. After changing wheels, have
Make sure the wheel makes an authorized HYUNDAI dealer tight-
good contact with the hub when en the wheel nuts to their proper
installed. If the contact of the torque as soon as possible.
mounting surface between the
wheel and hub is not good, the Wheel nut tightening torque:
wheel nuts could come loose 65~79 lbf·ft (9~11 kgf·m)
and cause the loss of a wheel.
Loss of a wheel may result in OHG060007L
■ Type B
loss of control of the vehicle, If you have a tire gauge, remove the
serious injury or death. valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
11. To install the wheel, hold it on the service station and inflate to the cor-
studs, put the wheel nuts on the rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
studs and tighten them finger it until it is correct. Always reinstall
tight. The nuts should be installed the valve cap after checking or
with their tappered small diame- adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap
ter ends directed inward. Jiggle is not replaced, dust and dirt may get
the tire to be sure it is completely OHG061015A into the tire valve and air may leak
seated, then tighten the nuts as Then position the wrench as shown in from the tire. If you lose a valve cap,
much as possible with your fin- the drawing and tighten the wheel buy another and install it as soon as
gers again. nuts. Be sure the socket is seated possible.
12. Lower the vehicle to the ground completely over the nut. Do not stand After you have changed the wheels,
by turning the wheel nut wrench on the wrench handle or use an exten- always secure the flat tire in its place
counterclockwise. sion pipe over the wrench handle. Go and return the jack and tools to their
around the wheel tightening every nut proper storage locations.
following the numerical sequence
6 17
Important - use of compact spare

CAUTION - Replacing lug WARNING - Wheel studs tire
nuts Do not drive your vehicle with Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
Make certain during wheel damaged wheel studs. If the pact spare tire. This compact spare
removal that the same nuts that studs are damaged, they may tire takes up less space than a regu-
were removed are reinstalled - or, lose their ability to retain the lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than a
if replaced, that nuts with metric wheel. This could lead to the conventional tire and is designed for
threads and the same chamfer loss of the wheel and a collision temporary use only.
configuration are used. Your resulting in serious injuries. • You should drive carefully when
vehicle has metric threads on the the compact spare is in use. The
wheel studs and nuts. Installation compact spare should be replaced
of a non-metric thread nut on a To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire by the proper conventional tire and
metric stud will not secure the rim at the first opportunity.
wheel to the hub properly and from rattling while the vehicle is in
will damage the stud so that it motion, store them properly. • The operation of this vehicle is not
must be replaced. Check the inflation pressures as recommended with more than one
soon as possible after installing the compact spare tire in use at the
spare tire. Adjust it to the specified same time.
Note that most lug nuts do not have pressure, if necessary. Refer to
metric threads. Be sure to use “Tires and wheels” in section 8.
extreme care in checking for thread
style before installing aftermarket lug
nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an
6 18
When using a compact spare tire, • Do not use tire chains on the com-
WARNING - Spare tire observe the following precautions: pact spare tire. Because of the small-
Do not operate your vehicle on • Under no circumstances should you er size, a tire chain will not fit proper-
this compact spare at speeds exceed 50 mph; a higher speed ly. This could damage the vehicle
over 50 mph. The compact could damage the tire. and result in loss of the chain.
spare tire is for emergency use • Ensure that you drive slowly enough • Do not use the compact spare tire
only. The original tire should be for the road conditions to avoid all on any other vehicle because this
repaired or replaced as soon as hazards. Any road hazard, such as a tire has been designed especially
possible to avoid failure of the pothole or debris, could seriously for your vehicle.
spare, possibly leading to per- damage the compact spare. • The compact spare tire’s tread life is
sonal injury or death. shorter than a regular tire. Inspect
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of your compact spare tire regularly
The compact spare should be inflat- vehicle control, and possible per- and replace worn compact spare
ed to 60 psi (420 kPa). sonal injury. tires with the same size and design,
mounted on the same wheel.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
✽ NOTICE mum load rating or the load-carry- • The compact spare tire should not
ing capacity shown on the sidewall be used on any other wheels, nor
Check the inflation pressure after should standard tires, snow tires,
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to of the compact spare tire.
wheel covers or trim rings be used
the specified pressure, as necessary. • Avoid driving over obstacles. The with the compact spare wheel. If
compact spare tire diameter is such use is attempted, damage to
smaller than the diameter of a con- these items or other vehicle com-
ventional tire and reduces the ponents may occur.
ground clearance approximately 1
inch, which could result in damage • Do not use more than one compact
to the vehicle. spare tire at a time.
• Do not take this vehicle through an • Do not tow a trailer while the com-
automatic car wash while the compact spare tire is installed.
pact spare tire is installed.
6 19
Jack label
■ Example 1. Model Name
• Type A
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
OHYK065010
• Type B 6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transaxle or move the
shift lever to the P position on
OHYK065011
• Type C
vehicles with automatic transaxle.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
OHYK064002
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For
more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
6 20
TOWING
A
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
B pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the sling type
front wheels on the ground, use a HXD02
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
C dolly tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
HXD03
OMC045012
Towing service
CAUTION
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an • Do not tow with sling-type
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a equipment. Use wheel lift or
commercial tow-truck service. Proper flatbed equipment.
lifting and towing procedures are nec- • Do not tow the vehicle with the
essary to prevent damage to the vehi- front wheels on the ground as
cle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed this may cause damage to the
is recommended. vehicle.
6 21
When towing your vehicle in an ■ Front

emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION - Towing gear

position OHG065009N
Always place the transaxle shift ■ Rear
OHG065008N
lever in N (Neutral) when towing
your vehicle. Failure to place the Removable towing hook
transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral) (front, if equipped)
may cause internal damage to 1. Open the trunk, and remove the
the transaxle. towing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover by press-
ing the lower part of the cover on
the front bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it OHG065010
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured. Emergency towing
4. Remove the towing hook and If towing is necessary, we recom-
install the cover after use. mend you to have it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow truck service.
6 22
If towing service is not available in an • Attach a towing strap to the tow

emergency, your vehicle may be hook.
temporarily towed using a cable or • Using a portion of the vehicle other
chain secured to the emergency tow- than the tow hooks for towing may
ing hook under the front/rear of the damage the body of your vehicle.
vehicle. Use extreme caution when
towing the vehicle. A driver must be • Only use a cable or chain specifi-
in the vehicle to steer it and operate cally intended for use in towing vehi-
the brakes. cles. Securely fasten the cable or
chain to the towing hook provided.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a • Before emergency towing, check
short distance and at low speeds. that the hook is not broken or dam-
OTD069011
Also, the wheels, axles, power train, aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain • Use a towing strap less than 16 feet
steering and brakes must all be in long. Attach a white or red cloth
good condition. securely to the hook.
(about 12 inches wide) in the mid-
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a • Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady dle of the strap for easy visibility.
vehicle out of mud, sand or other and even force.
• Drive carefully so that the towing
conditions from which the vehicle • To avoid damaging the hook, do strap is not loosened during towing.
cannot be driven out under its own not pull from the side or at a verti-
power. cal angle. Always pull straight
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than ahead.
the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
6 23
Emergency towing precautions Tie-down hook

• Place the ignition switch in ACC so CAUTION - Automatic
the steering wheel isn’t locked. transaxle
WARNING - Tie-down
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N • To avoid serious damage to hook
(Neutral). the automatic transaxle, limit Do not use the tie-down hooks
the vehicle speed to 10 mph for towing purposes. These
• Release the parking bake. and drive less than 1 mile
• Depress the brake pedal with more hooks are designed ONLY for
when towing. transport tie-down. If the tie-
force than normal since you will • Before towing, check the auto-
have reduced brake performance. down hooks are used for tow-
matic transaxle for fluid leaks ing, the tie-down hooks or
• More steering effort will be under your vehicle. If the auto- deflector will be damaged and
required because the power steer- matic transaxle fluid is leaking, this could lead to serious injury.
ing system will be disabled. flatbed equipment or a towing
• If you are driving down a long hill, dolly must be used.
the brakes may overheat and brake
performance will be reduced. Stop
often and let the brakes cool off.
• If the vehicle is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neutral.
Be sure the steering is unlocked by
placing the ignition switch in the
ACC position. A driver must be in
the towed vehicle to operate the
steering and brakes.
6 24
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Tires and wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 • Tire care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 • Recommended cold tire inflation pressures. . . . . . . . 7-37
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 • Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Owner maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 • Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
• Owner maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 • Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 • Tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
• Normal maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 • Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
• Maintenance under severe usage conditions . . . . . . 7-19 • Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
• Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . 7-20
• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 • Low aspect ratio tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 • Tire terminology and definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 • All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 • Summer tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 • Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 • Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
• Instrument panel fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 • Engine compartment fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . 7-53 7
• Fuse/relay panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
• Headlight, position light, turn signal light,
front fog light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
• Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
• Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . 7-67
• High mounted stop light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
• License plate light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
• Interior light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
California perchlorate notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine oil dipstick

2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Radiator cap
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
7. Air cleaner
8. Positive battery terminal
9. Negative battery terminal
10. Fuse box
The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OHG011004A
7 3
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care Owner’s responsibility Repairs and adjustments required as
to prevent damage to your vehicle a result of improper maintenance or
and injury to yourself whenever per- a lack of required maintenance are
forming any maintenance or inspec- ✽ NOTICE not covered.
tion procedures. Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsi- We recommend you have your vehi-
Should you have any doubts con- bility. cle maintained and repaired by an
cerning the inspection or servicing of You should retain documents that authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An
your vehicle, we strongly recom- show proper maintenance has been authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets
mend that you have an authorized performed on your vehicle in accor- HYUNDAI’s high service quality
HYUNDAI dealer perform this work. dance with the scheduled mainte- standards and receives technical
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer has nance service charts shown on the support from HYUNDAI in order to
factory-trained technicians and gen- following pages. You need this infor- provide you with a high level of serv-
uine HYUNDAI parts to service your mation to establish your compliance ice satisfaction.
vehicle properly. For expert advice with the servicing and maintenance
and quality service, see an author- requirements of your vehicle war-
ized HYUNDAI dealer. ranties. Detailed warranty informa-
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi- tion is provided in your Owner’s
cient servicing may result in opera- Handbook & Warranty Information
tional problems with your vehicle that booklet.
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
7 4
Maintenance
Owner maintenance precau- ✽ NOTICE

tions Improper owner maintenance dur- WARNING
ing the warranty period may affect - Maintenance work
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives warranty coverage. For details, read Do not wear jewelry or loose
instructions only for the maintenance the separate Owner's Handbook clothing while working under
items that are easy to perform. and Warranty Information booklet the hood of your vehicle with
provided with the vehicle. If you are the engine running. These can
As explained earlier in this section, become entangled in moving
several procedures can be done only unsure about any servicing or main-
tenance procedure, have it done by parts and result in injury. If you
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer must run the engine while work-
with special tools. an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
ing under the hood, make cer-
tain that you remove all jewelry
(especially rings, bracelets,
watches, and necklaces) and all
neckties, scarves, and similar
loose clothing before getting
near the engine or cooling fans.
7 5
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks Owner maintenance schedule While operating your vehicle:
and inspections that should be per- When you stop for fuel: • Note any changes in the sound of
formed by the owner or an authorized • Check the engine oil level. the exhaust or any smell of
HYUNDAI dealer at the frequencies exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
indicated to help ensure safe, • Check coolant level in coolant
reservoir. • Check for vibrations in the steering
dependable operation of your vehicle. wheel. Notice any increased steer-
Any adverse conditions should be • Check the windshield washer fluid ing effort or looseness in the steer-
brought to the attention of your deal- level. ing wheel, or change in its straight-
er as soon as possible. • Look for low or under-inflated tires. ahead position.
These Owner Maintenance Checks • Check the radiator and condenser. • Notice if your vehicle constantly
are generally not covered by war- Check if the front of the radiator and turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
ranties and you may be charged for condenser are clean and not blocked when traveling on smooth, level
labor, parts and lubricants used. with leaves, dirt or insects etc. road.
If any of the above parts are • When stopping, listen and check
extremely dirty or you are not sure for unusual sounds, pulling to one
of their condition, take your vehicle side, increased brake pedal travel
to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
WARNING - Hot coolant operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the • Check automatic transaxle P
engine is hot. Scalding hot (Park) function.
coolant and steam may blow • Check parking brake.
out under pressure. This could • Check for fluid leaks under your
cause burns or other serious vehicle (water dripping from the air
injuries. conditioning system during or after
use is normal)
7 6
Maintenance
At least monthly: At least twice a year At least once a year:

• Check coolant level in the engine (i.e., every Spring and Fall): • Clean body and door drain holes.
coolant reservoir. • Check radiator, heater and air con- • Lubricate door hinges and checks,
• Check the operation of all exterior ditioning hoses for leaks or dam- and hood hinges.
lights, including the stoplights, turn age.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
signals and hazard warning flash- • Check windshield washer spray latches.
ers. and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened • Lubricate door rubber weather-
• Check the inflation pressures of all strips.
tires including the spare. with washer fluid.
• Check headlight alignment. • Check the air conditioning system.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, • Inspect and lubricate automatic
shields and clamps. transaxle linkage and controls.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for • Clean battery and terminals.
wear and function. • Check the brake fluid level.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
7 7
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Follow Normal Maintenance If your vehicle is operated under the
Schedule if the vehicle is usually above conditions, you should
operated where none of the following inspect, replace or refill more fre-
conditions apply. If any of the following quently than the following Normal
conditions apply, follow Maintenance Maintenance Schedule. After the
Under Severe Usage Conditions. periods or distance shown in the
• Repeated short distance driving. chart, continue to follow the pre-
scribed maintenance intervals.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extreme-
ly humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 90°F (32°C).
7 8
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep
receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the fre-
quency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months (Continued)
❑ Rotate tire ❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect battery condition ❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose (15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❑ Add fuel additive *1
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months) (15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1 (7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months
15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months ❑ Rotate tire
❑ Rotate tire ❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect battery condition ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots ❑ Add fuel additive *1
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers *1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not
mix other additives.
boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
(Continued)
7 9
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months 37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months
❑ Rotate tire ❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition ❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler (37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers ❑ Add fuel additive *2
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & *1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free
boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance sched-
ule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem
❑ Inspect brake fluid etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance
❑ Inspect fuel filter *1 schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections *2 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *1 HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
❑ Inspect parking brake not mix other additives.
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Add fuel additive *2
7 10
Maintenance

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines (52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers *1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & mix other additives.
boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
7 11
Maintenance

❑ Rotate tire ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect battery condition (60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Add fuel additive *4
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines 67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler ❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers ❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts (67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
❑ Inspect brake fluid ❑ Add fuel additive *4 (67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
❑ Inspect fuel filter *1
*1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance sched-
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1 ule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters
❑ Inspect parking brake like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem
etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance
❑ Inspect valve clearance *3 schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
(Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months)
*2 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap reduced excessively.
❑ Inspect drive belts *2 *3 : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after that, adjust if necessary.
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *4 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
❑ Replace air cleaner filter not mix other additives.
(Continued) ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
7 12
Maintenance

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers *1 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads reduced excessively.
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & *2 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts not mix other additives.
❑ Inspect drive belts *1 ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after that,
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
7 13
Maintenance

❑ Rotate tire ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect battery condition (90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Add fuel additive *3
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant (90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint ❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect brake fluid (97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)
❑ Inspect fuel filter *1 ❑ Add fuel additive *3 (97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections *1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *1 but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance sched-
ule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters
❑ Inspect parking brake like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance
❑ Inspect drive belts *2 schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after that, *2 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) reduced excessively.
*3 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
❑ Replace air cleaner filter HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
(Continued) not mix other additives.
7 14
Maintenance

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
❑ Inspect drive belts *1 ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
7 15
Maintenance

❑ Rotate tire ❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Inspect battery condition (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler ❑ Replace coolant
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months after that,
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & (120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts *1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free
but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance sched-
❑ Inspect brake fluid ule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters
❑ Inspect fuel filter *1 like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance
schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *1
*2 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
❑ Inspect parking brake reduced excessively.
❑ Inspect valve clearance *3 *3 : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and
(Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months) adjust if necessary.
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
❑ Inspect drive belts *2 HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after that, not mix other additives.
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
(Continued)
7 16
Maintenance

❑ Rotate tire ❑ Inspect drive belts *1
❑ Inspect battery condition (First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after that,
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & *2 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
(Continued) ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
7 17
Maintenance

❑ Rotate tire ❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Inspect battery condition ❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines ❑ Replace coolant
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint No check, No service required
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts ❑ Automatic transaxle fluid
❑ Inspect brake fluid *1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free
❑ Inspect fuel filter *1 but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance sched-
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections ule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters
like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *1 etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance
❑ Inspect parking brake schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap *2 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
❑ Inspect drive belts *2
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
(Continued) not mix other additives.
7 18
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING CONDITION
OPERATION
A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R EVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS
H, I, J, K
AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY A, B, H, I, K
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) A, C, E, F, G, I
FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS AND CALIPERS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
REAR BRAKE DISC/PADS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, F
PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE &
BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT AND I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I
UPPER ARM BALL JOINT
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS C, D, E, F, G, H, I
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km) in nor- E - Driving in sandy areas
mal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freezing temperature F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
roads I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
weather K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
7 19
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter Fuel filter Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The engine oil and filter should be A clogged filter can limit the speed at The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
changed at the intervals specified in which the vehicle may be driven, should be inspected at those intervals
the maintenance schedule. If the car damage the emission system and specified in the maintenance sched-
is being driven in severe conditions, cause multiple issues such as hard ule. Make sure that a new vapor hose
more frequent oil and filter changes starting. If an excessive amount of or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.
are required. foreign matter accumulates in the
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently. Vacuum crankcase ventilation
Drive belts hoses
After installing a new filter, run the
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of engine for several minutes, and Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil check for leaks at the connections. dence of heat and/or mechanical
saturation and replace if necessary. Fuel filters should be installed by an damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterio-
ration. Particular attention should be
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con- paid to examine those hose surfaces
nections nearest to high heat sources, such
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and as the exhaust manifold.
connections for leakage and dam- Inspect the hose routing to assure that
age. Have an authorized HYUNDAI the hoses do not come in contact with
dealer replace any damaged or leak- any heat source, sharp edges or mov-
ing parts immediately. ing component which might cause
heat damage or mechanical wear.
Inspect all hose connections, such as
clamps and couplings, to make sure
they are secure, and that no leaks are
present. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence of
deterioration or damage.
7 20
Maintenance
Air cleaner filter Coolant ✽ NOTICE

A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner fil- The coolant should be changed at Automatic transaxle fluid color is
ter is recommended when the filter is the intervals specified in the mainte- basically red.
replaced. nance schedule. As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
matic transaxle fluid will begin to
Automatic transaxle fluid look darker.
Spark plugs This a normal condition and you
Make sure to install new spark plugs Automatic transaxle fluid does not should not judge the need to replace
of the correct heat range. need to be checked under normal the fluid based upon the changed
usage conditions. color.
Valve clearance But in severe conditions, the fluid
should be changed at an authorized The use of a non-specified fluid
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or HYUNDAI dealer in accordance to could result in transaxle malfunction
engine vibration and adjust if neces- the scheduled maintenance at the and failure.
sary. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer beginning of this chapter.
should perform the operation. Use only specified automatic transaxle
fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubri-
cants and capacities” in section 8.)
Cooling system
Check cooling system components,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
7 21
Maintenance
Brake hoses and lines Brake discs, pads, calipers Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually check for proper installation, and rotors Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and Check the pads for excessive wear, muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat- discs for run out and wear, and rioration, or damage. Start the
ed or damaged parts immediately. calipers for fluid leakage. engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-
nections or replace parts as neces-
Brake fluid Suspension mounting bolts sary.
Check brake fluid level in the brake Check the suspension connections
fluid reservoir. The level should be for looseness or damage. Retighten
between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on to the specified torque. Drive shafts and boots
the side of the reservoir. Use only Check the drive shafts, boots and
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification. Steering gear box, linkage & damage. Replace any damaged
boots/lower arm ball joint parts and, if necessary, repack the
With the vehicle stopped and engine grease.
Parking brake off, check for excessive free-play in
Inspect the parking brake system the steering wheel.
including the parking brake pedal or Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
lever and cables. age. Check the dust boots and ball Check the air conditioning lines and
joints for deterioration, cracks, or connections for leakage and dam-
damage. Replace any damaged age.
parts.
7 22
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
WARNING - Radiator
hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
CAUTION - When refilling

engine oil
OHG071003A OHG070004
Do not overfill the engine oil.
Checking the engine oil level Engine damage may result. If it is near or at L (Low), add enough
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level oil to bring the level to F (Full). Do
ground. not overfill.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating tempera- Use a funnel to help prevent oil
ture. from being spilled on engine com-
ponents.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan. Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and capacities” in section 8.)
and re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F (Full) and L (Low).
7 23
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
WARNING has a reservoir filled with year-round
- California proposition 65 antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
Engine oil contains chemicals filled at the factory.
known to the State of California Check the antifreeze protection and
to cause cancer, birth defects coolant level at least once a year, at the
and reproductive harm. Used beginning of the winter season, and
engine oil may cause irritation or before traveling to a colder climate.
cancer of the skin if left in con-
tact with the skin for prolonged
periods of time. Always protect WARNING - Cooling fan
your skin by washing your Use caution when
hands thoroughly with soap and working near the
Changing the engine oil and warm water as soon as possible blade of the cooling
filter after handling used oil. fan. The electric
Have engine oil and filter changed by motor (cooling fan) is
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer controlled by engine coolant
according to the Maintenance temperature, refrigerant pres-
Schedule at the beginning of this sure and vehicle speed. It may
section. sometimes operate even when
the engine is not running.
Your vehicle equipped with GDI,
the electric motor (cooling fan)
may operate until you discon-
nect the negative battery cable.
Not heeding these warnings
could result in serious injuries.
7 24
Maintenance
Recommended engine coolant For mixture percentage, refer to the

• When adding coolant, use only following table.
deionized water or soft water for
your vehicle and never mix hard Mixture Percentage (volume)
water in the coolant filled at the fac- Ambient
tory. An improper coolant mixture Temperature
can result in serious malfunction or Antifreeze Water
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu- 5°F (-15°C) 35 65
minum engine parts and must be -13°F (-25°C) 40 60
protected by an ethylene-glycol- -31°F (-35°C) 50 50
OHG070005 based coolant to prevent corrosion
-49°F (-45°C) 60 40
Checking the coolant level and freezing.
Check the condition and connections • DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
of all cooling system hoses and coolant or mix them with the spec-
heater hoses. Replace any swollen ified coolant.
or deteriorated hoses. • Do not use a solution that contains
The coolant level should be filled more than 60% antifreeze or less
between F (Full) and L (Low) marks than 35% antifreeze, which would
on the side of the coolant reservoir reduce the effectiveness of the
when the engine is cool. solution.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protection
against freezing and corrosion. Bring
the level to F (Full), but do not overfill.
If frequent additions are required, see
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for a
cooling system inspection.
7 25
Maintenance
Changing the coolant

CAUTION - Removing Have the coolant changed by an
radiator cap
authorized HYUNDAI dealer accord-
Never attempt to ing to the Maintenance Schedule at
remove the radiator the beginning of this section.
cap while the engine Put a thick cloth around the radiator
is operating or hot. cap before refilling the coolant in
Doing so might lead order to prevent the coolant from
to cooling system and engine overflowing into engine parts such as
damage. the alternator.
OHG071006L
Turn the engine off and wait until it
cools down. Use extreme care when
WARNING - Radiator cap removing the radiator cap. Wrap a
Do not remove the thick towel around it, and turn it
radiator cap when the counterclockwise slowly to the first
engine and radiator stop. Step back while the pressure is
are hot. Scalding hot released from the cooling system.
coolant and steam When you are sure all the pressure
may blow out under pressure has been released, press down on
causing serious injury. the cap, using a thick towel, and con-
tinue turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
7 26
Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID
In the event the brake system
CAUTION - Proper fluid requires frequent additions of fluid,
Only use brake fluid in brake the vehicle should be inspected by
system. Small amounts of an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
improper fluids (such as engine
oil) can cause damage to the WARNING - Brake fluid
brake system.
When changing and adding
brake fluid, handle it carefully.
If the level is low, add fluid to the Do not let it come in contact with
MAX (Maximum) level. The level will your eyes. If brake fluid should
fall with accumulated mileage. This is come in contact with your eyes,
OVG079007L immediately flush them with a
a normal condition associated with
Checking the brake fluid level the wear of brake linings. If the fluid large quantity of fresh tap water.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir level is excessively low, have the Have your eyes examined by a
periodically. The fluid level should be brake system checked by an author- doctor as soon as possible.
between MAX (Maximum) and MIN ized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Minimum) marks on the side of the
reservoir. CAUTION - Brake fluid
Use only the specified brake fluid.
Before removing the reservoir cap (Refer to “Recommended lubricants Do not allow brake fluid to con-
and adding brake fluid, clean the or capacities” in section 8.) tact the vehicle's body paint, as
area around the reservoir cap thor- paint damage will result.
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-
ination. Never mix different types of fluid. Brake fluid, which has been exposed
to open air for an extended time
should never be used as its quality
cannot be guaranteed. It should be
disposed of properly.
7 27
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID PARKING BRAKE
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may
cause loss of vehicle control or
damage to paint and body trim.
OHG071008A OHG051085
Checking the washer fluid WARNING - Windshield Checking the parking brake
level fluid
Check the stroke of the parking brake
Check the fluid level in the washer Do not drink the windshield by counting the number of “clicks’’
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces- washer fluid. The windshield heard while fully applying it from the
sary. Plain water may be used if wash- washer fluid is poisonous to released position. Also, the parking
er fluid is not available. However, use humans and animals. brake alone should securely hold the
washer solvent with antifreeze char- vehicle on a fairly steep grade.
acteristics in cold climates to prevent If the stroke is more or less than
freezing. WARNING - Flammable
fluid specified, have the parking brake
adjusted by an authorized HYUNDAI
Do not allow the washer fluid to
dealer.
come in contact with open
flames or sparks.The windshield
washer fluid is flammable under Stroke : 5 “clicks’’ at a force of
certain circumstances. This can 66 lbs (30 kg, 294 N).
result in a fire which could result
in serious injuries.
7 28
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
OHG070009 OHG070010 OVG079012
Filter replacement 1. Loosen the air cleaner cover 2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner
It must be replaced when necessary, attaching clips and open the cover. cover and the air box.
and should not be washed. 3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
You can clean the filter when inspect- 4. Lock the cover with the cover
ing the air cleaner element. attaching clips.
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extreme-
ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this section.)
7 29
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

Filter inspection
CAUTION - Air filter If the vehicle is operated in the
maintenance
severely air-polluted cities or on
• Do not drive with the air clean- dusty rough roads for a long period,
er removed; this will result in it should be inspected more fre-
excessive engine wear. quently and replaced earlier. When
• When removing the air cleaner you, the owner, replace the climate
filter, be careful that dust or control air filter, replace it performing
dirt does not enter the air the following procedure, and be care-
intake, or damage may result. ful to avoid damaging other compo-
• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part. nents.
Replace the filter according to the OHG070011
Use of non-genuine parts
could damage the air flow sen- maintenance Schedule. Filter replacement
sor. 1. Open the glove box and remove
the support strap (1).
7 30
Maintenance
OHG070012 OHG070014 OHG075041

2. With the glove box open, remove 3. Remove the climate control air fil- 4. Replace the climate control air filter.
the stoppers by turning them ter cover while pressing the lock 5. Reassemble in the reverse order
counterclockwise on both sides. on the right side of the cover. of disassembly.
✽ NOTICE
Install a new climate control air fil-
ter in the correct direction with the
arrow symbol ( ↓) facing down-
wards. Otherwise, the climate con-
trol effects may decrease, possibly
with a noise.
7 31
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Contamination of either the wind- Blade replacement
shield or the wiper blades with for- When the wipers no longer clean
eign matter can reduce the effective- adequately, the blades may be worn
ness of the windshield wipers. or cracked, and require replacement.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer- CAUTION
cial car washes. If the blades are not • To prevent damage to the
wiping properly, clean both the win- wiper arms or other compo-
dow and the blades with a good nents, do not attempt to move
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse the wipers manually.
1JBA5122 thoroughly with clean water • The use of a non-specified
Blade inspection wiper blade could result in
CAUTION wiper malfunction and failure.
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been To prevent damage to the wiper
known to make the windshield diffi- blades, do not use gasoline,
cult to clean. kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
7 32
Maintenance
OHM078059 OHM078060 OHG070043

Front windshield wiper blade 2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then 3. Install the new blade assembly in
1. Raise the wiper arm. pull down the blade assembly and the reverse order of removal.
remove it.
CAUTION - Wiper arms
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
7 33
Maintenance
BATTERY
WARNING - Battery (Continued)

dangers If any electrolyte gets into
Always read the follow- your eyes, flush your eyes
ing instructions carefully with clean water for at
when handling a battery. least 15 minutes and get
immediate medical atten-
Keep lighted cigarettes tion. If electrolyte gets on
and all other flames or your skin, thoroughly
sparks away from the wash the contacted area.
battery. If you feel a pain or a burn-
The battery contains ing sensation, get medical
OHG070015
hydrogen - a highly com- attention immediately.
For best battery service bustible gas, which will Wear eye protection when
• Keep the battery securely mounted. explode if it comes in con- charging or working near
tact with a flame or spark. a battery. Always provide
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
Keep batteries out of ventilation when working
• Keep the terminals and connec-
the reach of children in an enclosed space.
tions clean, tight, and coated with
because batteries con- An inappropriately dis-
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
tain highly corrosive posed battery can be
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from SULFURIC ACID and
the battery immediately with a harmful to the environ-
electrolytes. Do not ment and human health.
solution of water and baking soda. allow battery acid to Dispose the battery
• If the vehicle is not going to be contact your skin, eyes, according to your local
used for an extended time, discon- clothing or paint finish. law(s) or regulation.
nect the battery cables. (Continued) (Continued)
7 34
Maintenance
(Continued) WARNING - Recharging WARNING

The battery contains battery - California proposition 65
lead. Do not dispose of it Never attempt to recharge the Battery posts, terminals, and
after use. Please return battery when the battery cables related accessories contain
the battery to an author- are connected. Some charging lead and lead compounds,
ized HYUNDAI dealer to equipment can release a volt- chemicals known to the State of
be recycled. age spike that will damage vehi- California to cause cancer, birth
• When lifting a plastic-cased cle electronics, resulting in defects and reproductive harm.
battery, excessive pressure thousands of dollars in required Batteries also contain other
on the case may cause battery repair parts which are not cov- chemicals known to the State of
acid to leak, resulting in per- ered by warranty if damaged by California to cause cancer.
sonal injury. Lift with a battery not following this warning. Wash hands after handling.
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the When you don’t use the vehicle for a WARNING - Risk of
battery when the battery long time in a low temperature area, electrocution
cables are connected. separate the battery and keep it
indoors. Never touch the electrical igni-
• The electrical ignition system tion system while the vehicle is
works with high voltage. running. This system works
Never touch these compo- with high voltage which can
nents with the engine running "zap" you.
or the ignition switched on.
Failure to follow the above
warnings can result in serious
bodily injury or death.
7 35
Maintenance
Battery recharging When recharging the battery, observe Reset items

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, the following precautions: Items should be reset after the bat-
calcium-based battery. • The battery must be removed from tery has been discharged or the bat-
• If the battery becomes discharged the vehicle and placed in an area tery has been disconnected.
in a short time (because, for exam- with good ventilation. • Auto up/down window (See section 4)
ple, the headlights or interior lights • Watch the battery during charging, • Sunroof (See section 4)
were left on while the vehicle was and stop or reduce the charging
not in use), recharge it by slow rate if the battery cells begin • Driver position memory system
charging (trickle) for 10 hours. gassing (boiling) violently or if the (See section 4)
• If the battery gradually discharges temperature of the electrolyte of • Trip computer (See section 4)
because of high electric load while any cell exceeds 120°F (49°C). • Climate control system
the vehicle is being used, recharge • Wear eye protection when check- (See section 4)
it at 20-30A for two hours. ing the battery during charging. • Clock (See section 4)
• Disconnect the battery charger in • Audio (See section 4)
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must be
removed first and installed last
when the battery is disconnected.
7 36
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS

Tire care • Underinflation also results in
For proper maintenance, safety, and excessive wear, poor handling and
maximum fuel economy, you must reduced fuel economy. Wheel
always maintain recommended tire deformation also is possible. Keep
inflation pressures and stay within your tire pressures at the proper
the load limits and weight distribution levels. If a tire frequently needs
recommended for your vehicle. refilling, have it checked by an
• Overinflation produces a harsh ride,
Recommended cold tire infla- excessive wear at the center of the
tion pressures tire tread, and a greater possibility
All tire pressures (including the OHG050081L of damage from road hazards.
spare) should be checked when the All specifications (sizes and pres- • Warm tires normally exceed rec-
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the sures) can be found on a label ommended cold tire pressures by 4
vehicle has not been driven for at attached to the vehicle. to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not
least three hours or driven less than release air from warm tires to
1 mile (1.6 km). adjust the pressure or the tires will
Recommended pressures must be WARNING - Tire under be underinflated.
maintained for the best ride, top vehi- inflation
• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation
cle handling, and minimum tire wear. Inflate your tires consistent with valve caps. Without the valve cap,
For recommended inflation pressure, the instructions provided in this dirt or moisture could get into the
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8. manual. Severe underinflation valve core and cause air leakage. If
can lead to severe heat build-up, a valve cap is missing, install a
causing blowouts, tread separa- new one as soon as possible.
tion and other tire failures that
can result in the loss of vehicle
control leading to severe injury
or death. This risk is much high-
er on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
7 37
Maintenance
Checking tire inflation pressure Remove the valve cap from the tire
WARNING - Tire Inflation Check your tires once a month or valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-
Overinflation or underinflation more. ly onto the valve to get a pressure
can reduce tire life, adversely measurement. If the cold tire inflation
Also, check the tire pressure of the pressure matches the recommended
affect vehicle handling, and lead
spare tire. pressure on the tire and loading
to sudden tire failure. This could
result in loss of vehicle control information label, no further adjust-
and potential injury. How to check ment is necessary. If the pressure is
Use a good quality gage to check tire low, add air until you reach the rec-
pressure. You can not tell if your tires ommended amount.
Always observe the following: are properly inflated simply by look- If you overfill the tire, release air by
• Check tire pressure when the tires ing at them. Radial tires may look pushing on the metal stem in the
are cold. (After vehicle has been properly inflated even when they're center of the tire valve. Recheck the
parked for at least three hours or underinflated. tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
has not been driven more than 1 Check the tire's inflation pressure sure to put the valve caps back on
mile (1.6 km) since startup.) when the tires are cold. - "Cold" the valve stems. They help prevent
• Check the pressure of your spare means your vehicle has been sitting leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
tire each time you check the pres- for at least three hours or driven no ture.
sure of other tires. more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Never overload your vehicle. Be
careful not to overload a vehicle
luggage rack if your vehicle is
equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly worn,
or if your tires have been dam-
aged, replace them.
7 38
Maintenance
Tire rotation ■ Without a spare tire

WARNING To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
• Inspect your tires frequently mended that the tires be rotated
for proper inflation as well as every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
wear and damage. Always use sooner if irregular wear develops.
a tire pressure gauge.
During rotation, check the tires for
• Tires with too much or too little correct balance.
pressure wear unevenly caus-
When rotating tires, check for uneven
ing poor handling, loss of vehi-
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
cle control, and sudden tire
usually caused by incorrect tire pres- S2BLA790A
failure leading to accidents,
sure, improper wheel alignment, out- ■ Directional tires (if equipped)
injuries, and even death. The
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
recommended cold tire pres-
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
sure for your vehicle can be
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
found in this manual and on
Replace the tire if you find either of
the tire label located on the dri-
these conditions. Replace the tire if
ver's side center pillar.
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
• Worn tires can cause acci- be sure to bring the front and rear tire
dents. Replace tires that are pressures to specification and check
worn, show uneven wear, or lug nut tightness.
are damaged. CBGQ0707A
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8.
• Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tire.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every time
you check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
7 39
Maintenance
Disc brake pads should be inspected Wheel alignment and tire bal-
for wear whenever tires are rotated. Tread wear indicator
ance
The wheels on your vehicle were
Rotate radial tires that have an aligned and balanced carefully at the
asymmetric tread pattern only from factory to give you the longest tire life
front to rear and not from right to left. and best overall performance.
Do not use the compact spare tire for In most cases, you will not need to
tire rotation. have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
WARNING - Mixing tire or the other, the alignment may need
types to be reset. OEN076053
Do not mix bias ply and radial ply If you notice your vehicle vibrating Tire replacement
tires under any circumstances. when driving on a smooth road, your If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
This may cause unusual han- wheels may need to be rebalanced. indicator will appear as a solid band
dling characteristics that could across the tread. This shows there is
result in death, severe injury, or less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
property damage. CAUTION - Wheel weight
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
Improper wheel weights can this happens.
damage your vehicle's aluminum
wheels. Use only approved wheel Do not wait for the band to appear
weights. across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
7 40
Maintenance
Compact spare tire replacement

WARNING - Replacing (Continued)
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tires • When replacing tires (or
tread life than a regular size tire.
To reduce the chance of serious wheels), it is recommended to
Replace it when you can see the
or fatal injuries from an accident replace the two front or two
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
caused by tire failure or loss of rear tires (or wheels) as a pair.
The replacement compact spare tire
vehicle control: Replacing just one tire can
should be the same size and design
seriously affect your vehicle's
• Replace tires that are worn, tire as the one provided with your
handling.
show uneven wear, or are dam- new vehicle and should be mounted
aged. Worn tires can cause • Using tires and wheels other on the same compact spare tire
loss of braking effectiveness, than the recommended sizes wheel. The compact spare tire is not
steering control, and traction. could cause unusual handling designed to be mounted on a regular
characteristics and poor vehi- size wheel, and the compact spare
• Do not drive your vehicle with cle control, resulting in a seri-
too little or too much pressure tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ous accident. ing a regular size tire.
in your tires. This can lead to
uneven wear and tire failure. • The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
• When replacing tires, never size can affect wheel speed.
mix radial and bias-ply tires on When replacing tires, all 4
the same car. You must replace tires must use the same size
all tires (including the spare) if originally supplied with the
moving from radial to bias-ply vehicle. Using tires of a differ-
tires. ent size can cause the ABS
(Continued) (Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) to work irregularly.
7 41
Maintenance
Wheel replacement Tire traction Tire maintenance

When replacing the metal wheels for Tire traction can be reduced if you In addition to proper inflation, correct
any reason, make sure the new drive on worn tires, tires that are wheel alignment helps to decrease
wheels are equivalent to the original improperly inflated or on slippery tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
factory units in diameter, rim width road surfaces. Tires should be unevenly, have your dealer check the
and offset. replaced when tread wear indicators wheel alignment.
appear. To reduce the possibility of When you have new tires installed,
losing control, slow down whenever make sure they are balanced. This
WARNING there is rain, snow or ice on the road. will increase vehicle ride comfort and
A wheel that is not the correct tire life. Additionally, a tire should
size may adversely affect wheel always be rebalanced if it is removed
and bearing life, braking and from the wheel.
stopping abilities, handling char-
acteristics, ground clearance,
body-to-tire clearance, snow
chain clearance, speedometer
and odometer calibration, head-
light aim and bumper height.
WARNING - Wheel
Wheels that do not meet
HYUNDAI's specifications may
fit poorly and result in damage
to the vehicle or unusual han-
dling and poor vehicle control.
7 42
Maintenance
1 2. Tire size designation 94 - Load Index, a numerical code

A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire associated with the maximum
5,6 load the tire can carry.
size designation. You will need this
7 information when selecting replace- V - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
ment tires for your car. The following speed rating chart in this section
4 explains what the letters and num- for additional information.
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
2 Wheel size designation
3 Example tire size designation: Wheels are also marked with impor-
(These numbers are provided as an tant information that you need if you
1
example only; your tire size designa- ever have to replace one. The follow-
I030B04JM
tor could vary depending on your ing explains what the letters and
Tire sidewall labeling vehicle.) numbers in the wheel size designa-
This information identifies and P245/40R19 94V tion mean.
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides Example wheel size designation:
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
the tire identification number (TIN)
marked with the prefix “P’’ are 8.0JX19
for safety standard certification. The
intended for use on passenger
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
vehicles or light trucks; however,
case of a recall. 8.0 - Rim width in inches.
not all tires have this marking).
P245 - Tire width in millimeters. J - Rim contour designation.
1. Manufacturer or brand name 19 - Rim diameter in inches.
40 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
Manufacturer or Brand name is height as a percentage of its
shown. width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
19 - Rim diameter in inches.
7 43
Maintenance
Tire speed ratings 3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire

The chart below lists many of the dif- Identification Number) WARNING - Tire age
ferent speed ratings currently being Any tires that are over 6 years old, Tires degrade over time, even
used for passenger car tires. The based on the manufacturing date, when they are not being used.
speed rating is part of the tire size (including the spare tire) should be Regardless of the remaining
designation on the sidewall of the replaced by new ones. You can find tread, it is recommended that
tire. This symbol corresponds to that the manufacturing date on the tire tires generally be replaced after
tire's designed maximum safe oper- sidewall (possibly on the inside of the six (6) years of normal service.
ating speed. wheel), displaying the DOT Code. Heat caused by hot climates or
The DOT Code is a series of num- frequent high loading condi-
Speed bers on a tire consisting of numbers tions can accelerate the aging
Rating Maximum Speed and English letters. The manufactur- process. Failure to follow this
Symbol ing date is designated by the last four warning can result in sudden
S 112 mph (180 km/h) digits (characters) of the DOT code. tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of control and an acci-
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
dent involving serious injury or
H 130 mph (210 km/h) DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO death.
V 149 mph (240 km/h) The front part of the DOT means a
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h) plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1616 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2016.
7 44
Maintenance
4. Tire ply composition and mate- 6. Maximum load rating Tread wear
rial This number indicates the maximum The tread wear grade is a compara-
The number of layers or plies of rub- load in kilograms and pounds that tive rating based on the wear rate of
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire can be carried by the tire. When the tire when tested under controlled
manufacturers also must indicate the replacing the tires on the vehicle, conditions on a specified govern-
materials in the tire, which include always use a tire that has the same ment test course. For example, a tire
steel, nylon, polyester, and others. load rating as the factory installed graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
The letter "R" means radial ply con- tire. half times (1½) as well on the gov-
struction; the letter "D" means diago- ernment course as a tire graded 100.
nal or bias ply construction; and the The relative performance of tires
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con- 7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where depends upon the actual conditions
struction. of their use, however, and may
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi- depart significantly from the norm
5. Maximum permissible inflation mum section width. due to variations in driving habits,
pressure service practices and differences in
For example: road characteristics and climate.
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in TREADWEAR 200 These grades are molded on the
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum TRACTION AA side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
permissible inflation pressure. Refer TEMPERATURE A The tires available as standard or
to the Tire and Loading Information optional equipment on your vehicle
label for recommended inflation may vary with respect to grade.
pressure. Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used. Regardless
of the remaining tread, we recom-
mend that tires be replaced after
approximately six(6) years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process.
7 45
Maintenance
Traction - AA, A, B & C Sustained high temperature can Low aspect ratio tire
The traction grades, from highest to cause the material of the tire to Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those degenerate and reduce tire life, and ratio is lower than 50, are standard
grades represent the tire’s ability to excessive temperature can lead to equipment on this vehicle.
stop on wet pavement as measured sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-
under controlled conditions on speci- responds to a level of performance Because the low aspect ratio tires
fied government test surfaces of which all passenger car tires must are optimized for handling and brak-
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C meet under the Federal Motor ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
may have poor traction performance. Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. ride in and there is more noise com-
Grades B and A represent higher pare with normal tires.
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak- levels of performance on the labora-
ing traction tests, and does not tory test wheel than the minimum CAUTION
include acceleration, cornering, required by law. Because the sidewall of the low
hydroplaning, or peak traction char- aspect ratio tire is shorter than
acteristics. WARNING - Tire the normal, the wheel and tire of
temperature the low aspect ratio tire can eas-
Temperature -A, B & C ily be damaged. So, follow the
The temperature grade for this instructions below.
The temperature grades are A (the tire is established for a tire that
highest), B and C representing the is properly inflated and not • When driving on a rough road
overloaded. Excessive speed, or off road, drive cautiously
tire’s resistance to the generation of
underinflation, or excessive because tires and wheels may
heat and its ability to dissipate heat be damaged. And after driving,
when tested under controlled condi- loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat inspect tires and wheels.
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. build-up and possible sudden • When passing over a pothole,
tire failure. This can cause loss speed bump, manhole, or curb
of vehicle control and serious stone, drive slowly so that the
injury or death. tires and wheels are not dam-
aged.
(Continued)
7 46
Maintenance
Tire terminology and definitions Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of

(Continued)
Air Pressure: The amount of air air pressure in a tire, measured in
• If the tire is impacted, inspect pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
the tire condition or contact an inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pascals (kPa) before a tire has built
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. up heat from driving.
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
• To prevent damage to the tire, pascal (kPa). Curb Weight: This means the weight
inspect the tire condition and of a motor vehicle with standard and
pressure every 1,800miles Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional acces- optional equipment including the
(3,000km). maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
sories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic coolant, but without passengers and
transaxle, power seats, and air con- cargo.
CAUTION ditioning. DOT Markings: A code molded into
• It is not easy to recognize the Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a the sidewall of a tire signifying that
tire damage with your own tire's height to its width. the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
eyes. But if there is the slight- Department of Transportation motor
est hint of tire damage, even Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords vehicle safety standards. The DOT
though you cannot see the tire that is located between the plies and code includes the Tire Identification
damage with your own eyes, the tread. Cords may be made from Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
have the tire checked or steel or other reinforcing materials. ignator which can also identify the
replaced because the tire Bead: The tire bead contains steel tire manufacturer, production plant,
damage may cause air leak- wires wrapped by steel cords that brand and date of production.
age from the tire. hold the tire onto the rim. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
• If the tire is damaged by driv- Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
ing on a rough road, off road, which the plies are laid at alternate Rating for the Front Axle.
pothole, manhole, or curb angles less than 90 degrees to the
stone, it will not be covered by centerline of the tread. GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
the warranty. Rating for the Rear axle.
• You can find out the tire infor-
mation on the tire sidewall.
7 47
Maintenance
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: Pneumatic tire: A mechanical
side of an asymmetrical tire, that The sum of curb weight; accessory device made of rubber, chemicals,
must always face outward when weight; vehicle capacity weight; and fabric and steel or other materials,
mounted on a vehicle. production options weight. that, when mounted on an automo-
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for Normal Occupant Weight: The tive wheel, provides the traction and
air pressure. number of occupants a vehicle is contains the gas or fluid that sustains
designed to seat multiplied by 150 the load.
Light truck (LT) tire: A tire designat-
ed by its manufacturer as primarily pounds (68 kg). Production options weight: The
intended for use on lightweight trucks Occupant Distribution: Designated combined weight of installed regular
or multipurpose passenger vehicles. seating positions. production options weighing over 2.3
kg (5 lbs.) in excess of the standard
Load ratings: The maximum load Outward Facing Sidewall: The side items which they replace, not previ-
that a tire is rated to carry for a given of a asymmetrical tire that has a par- ously considered in curb weight or
inflation pressure. ticular side that faces outward when accessory weight, including heavy
Load Index: An assigned number mounted on a vehicle. The outward duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre- facing sidewall bears white lettering heavy duty battery, and special trim.
sponds to the load carrying capacity or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or Recommended Inflation Pressure:
of a tire. Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
deeper than the same moldings on
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The the inner facing sidewall. ed tire inflation pressure and shown
maximum air pressure to which a on the tire placard.
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi- Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
mum air pressure is molded onto the which the ply cords that extend to the
sidewall. light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles. beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
Maximum Load Rating: The load centerline of the tread.
rating for a tire at the maximum per- Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords Rim: A metal support for a tire and
missible inflation pressure for that upon which the tire beads are seat-
tire. ed.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
7 48
Maintenance
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num- All season tires
code assigned to a tire indicating the ber of designated seating positions HYUNDAI specifies all season tires
maximum speed at which a tire can multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the on some models to provide good
operate. rated cargo and luggage load. performance for use all year round,
Traction: The friction between the Vehicle Maximum Load on the including snowy and icy road condi-
tire and the road surface. The Tire: Load on an individual tire due to tions. All season tires are identified
amount of grip provided. curb and accessory weight plus by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
Tread: The portion of a tire that maximum occupant and cargo and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
comes into contact with the road. weight. tires have better snow traction than
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire: all season tires and may be more
bands, sometimes called "wear Load on an individual tire that is appropriate in some areas.
bars," that show across the tread of a determined by distributing to each
tire when only 2/32 inch of tread axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
Summer tires
remains.
pant weight and dividing by 2. HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality some models to provide superior
Grading Standards, a tire information Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
ly attached to a vehicle showing the performance on dry roads. Summer
system that provides consumers with tire performance is substantially
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera- original equipment tire size and rec-
ommended inflation pressure. reduced in snow and ice. Summer
ture and treadwear. Ratings are tires do not have the tire traction rat-
determined by tire manufacturers ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
using government testing proce- side wall. If you plan to operate your
dures. The ratings are molded into vehicle in snowy or icy conditions.
the sidewall of the tire. HYUNDAI recommends the use of
snow tires or all season tires on all
four wheels.
7 49
Maintenance
Snow tires Tire chains Radial-ply tires

If you equip your car with snow tires, Tire chains, if necessary, should be Radial-ply tires provide improved
they should be the same size and installed on the front wheels. tread life, road hazard resistance and
have the same load capacity as the Be sure that the chains are installed smoother high speed ride. The radi-
original tires. Snow tires should be in accordance with the manufactur- al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
installed on all four wheels; other- er's instructions. belted construction, and are selected
wise, poor handling may result. to complement the ride and handling
To minimize tire and chain wear, do characteristics of your vehicle.
Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 not continue to use tire chains when
kPa) more air pressure than the Radial-ply tires have the same load
they are no longer needed. carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
pressure recommended for the stan-
dard tires on the tire label on the dri- • When driving on roads covered belted tires of the same size, and use
ver's side of the center pillar, or up to with snow or ice, drive at less than the same recommended inflation
the maximum pressure shown on the 20 mph (30 km/h). pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
tire sidewall, whichever is less. • Use the SAE “S” class or wire with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
chains. not recommended. Any combina-
Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
km/h) when your vehicle is equipped • If you hear noise caused by chains
belted tires when used on the same
with snow tires. contacting the body, retighten the
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
chain to avoid contact with the
vehicle handling. The best rule to fol-
vehicle body. low is: Identical radial-ply tires should
• To prevent body damage, retighten always be used as a set of four.
the chains after driving 0.3~0.6 Longer wearing tires can be more
miles (0.5~1.0 km). susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
• Do not use tire chains on vehicles is very important to follow the tire
equipped with aluminum wheels. rotation interval shown in this section
In unavoidable circumstance, use to achieve the tread life potential of
a wire type chain. these tires. Cuts and punctures in
• Use wire chains less than 0.47 radial-ply tires are repairable only in
inches (12 mm) to prevent damage the tread area, because of sidewall
to the chain’s connection. flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
7 50
Maintenance
FUSES
■ Blade type A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam- WARNING - Fuse
age by fuses. replacement
This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one • Never replace a fuse with any-
Normal Blown thing but another fuse of the
located in the driver’s side panel bol-
ster, another is in the engine com- same rating.
■ Cartridge type
partment. • A higher capacity fuse could
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces- cause damage and possibly a
sories, or controls do not work, check fire.
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse • Never install a wire or alu-
has blown, the element inside the minum foil instead of the
fuse will be melted. proper fuse - even as a tem-
Normal Blown If the electrical system does not work, porary repair. It may cause
■ Multi fuse type extensive wiring damage and
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Before replacing a blown fuse, dis- a possible fire.
connect the negative battery cable.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating. CAUTION - Fuse
If the replacement fuse blows, this replacement
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid Do not use a screwdriver or any
Normal Blown using the system involved and imme- other metal object to remove
diately consult an authorized fuses because it may cause a
HYUNDAI dealer. short circuit and damage the
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade system.
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type, and multi fuse type for
higher amperage ratings.
Normal Blown
OVF071101
7 51
Maintenance
CAUTION
• When replacing a blown fuse
or relay with a new one, make
sure the new fuse or relay fits
tightly into the clips The
incomplete fastening fuse or
relay may cause the vehicle
wiring and electric systems
damage and a possible fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays
and terminals fastened with OHG070016 OYF079021
bolts or nuts. The fuses, relays Instrument panel fuse replace- 3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
and terminals may be fas- ment Use the removal tool provided in the
tened incompletely, and it may engine compartment fuse panel.
cause a possible fire. If fuses, 1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off. 4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
relays and terminals fastened if it is blown.
with bolts or nuts are blown, 2. Open the fuse panel cover.
consult an authorized 5. Push in a new fuse of the same rat-
ing, and make sure it fits tightly in
HYUNDAI dealer. the clips.
• Do not input any other objects If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
except fuses or relays into HYUNDAI dealer.
fuse/relay terminals such as a If you do not have a spare, use a fuse
driver or wiring. It may cause of the same rating from a circuit you
contact failure and system may not need for operating the vehicle,
malfunction. such as the power outlet fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel in
the engine compartment. If a fuse is
blown, it must be replaced.
7 52
Maintenance
CAUTION
• Always place the fuse switch
in the ON position while driv-
ing the vehicle.
• Do not operate the fuse switch
repeatedly. The switch may be
worn out.
OHG070018 OHG070019
Fuse switch Engine compartment fuse
Always, put the fuse switch at the ON replacement
position. A notice will appear on the 1. Turn the ignition switch and all
LCD display to notify the driver the other switches off.
fuse switch should be in the ON posi-
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
tion. For more details, refer to "LCD
pressing the tab and pulling it up.
display" in section 4.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it
If you move the switch to the OFF
if it is blown. To remove or insert
position, some items such as audio
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
and digital clock must be reset and or
engine compartment fuse panel.
smart key may not work properly.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an author-
7 53
Maintenance
CAUTION - Fuse panel

covers
After checking the fuse panel in
the engine compartment, secure-
ly install the fuse panel cover to
prevent electrical failures which
may occur from water contact.
OVG079023L OHG070021
Main fuse Multi fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows: removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine. 1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery 2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable. cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic- 3. Remove the fuse panel in the
ture above. engine compartment.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one 4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
of the same rating. ture above.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of 5. Replace the fuse with a new one
removal. of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
7 54
Maintenance
OHG070022
Fuse/relay panel description

Instrument panel fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,
you can find the fuse/relay label
describing fuse/relay name and
capacity.
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
OHG076046N
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
7 55
Maintenance
Instrument panel (Driver’s side fuse panel)

No. Fuse rating Symbol Protected component
1 7.5A IMMO Smart Key Control Module
2 7.5A A/BAG IND Instrument Cluster
3 20A SPARE -
AMP, Smart Key Control Module, Telematics Unit,E/R Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay),
4 10A AUDIO
A/V & Navigation Head Unit,Front Monitor (Audio/Navigation), Audio, A/C Control Module
ESC Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH,
5 7.5A MODULE 2 Console Switch, A/C Control Module, Rear Power Window Switch LH/RH,
Driver IMS Module, Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH/LH(Center)/RH(Center)
Driver Power Seat Switch, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module, Driver/Passenger Door Module,
Stop Lamp Switch, Crash Pad Switch, Driver/Passenger CCS Control Module,
6 10A MODULE 1 Steering Tilt & Telescope Module, Instrument Cluster, Blind Spot Detection Radar LH/RH,
Multifunction Switch, Forward Collision Warning Unit, Lane Departure Warning Unit,
Electro Chromic Mirror, ATM Lever Indicator, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Telematics Unit
7 10A HTD MIRR Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module
8 7.5A MDPS MDPS Unit
9 20A C/LIGHTER Center Tray Outlet
10 15A A/BAG SRS Control Module, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor, A/C Control Module
7 56
Maintenance
11 7.5A MODULE 3 Smart Key Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH
A/C Control Module, E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay), Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module,
12 7.5A A/CON
Active Incar Sensor, Driver/Passenger CCS Control Module
13 15A IG1 2 Steering Wheel Heater
14 20A IG1 1 E/R Junction Block (ECU 5 10A, ECU 4 10A)
Driver Power Seat Switch, Data Link Connector, A/C Control Module, Driver/Passenger Door Module,
15 10A MEMORY 1
Instrument Cluster, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Auto Light & Photo Sensor
Rear Door Lamp LH/RH, MAP Lamp, Garnish Lamp LH/RH, Driver/Passenger Door Mood Lamp,
Driver/Passenger Door Lamp, Driver/Passenger Foot Lamp, Driver/Passenger Door Scuff Lamp,
16 10A INTERIOR LAMP
Rear Door Mood Lamp LH/RH, Vanity Lamp Switch LH/RH, Rear Door Scuff Lamp LH/RH,
Trunk Room Lamp, Rear Personal Lamp Center/LH/RH
17 25A WIPER Wiper Motor, E/R Junction Block (Washer Relay, Wiper (LO) Relay, Wiper (HI) Relay)
18 10A STOP LAMP Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch, Start Stop Button Switch
19 7.5A MEMORY 2 RF Receiver
20 10A MULTI MEDIA Front Monitor (Audio/Navigation), A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Telematics Unit, Audio
21 7.5A START Transaxle Range Switch, PCM
7 57
Maintenance
22 20A SUNROOF Panorama Sunroof
23 10A TRUNK Trunk Lid Relay, Fuel Filler Door & Trunk Lid Switch
24 20A S/HEATER RR Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH
25 10A DRV P/SEAT -
26 25A P/ WDW LH Driver Safety Window Module, Rear Power Window Switch LH
27 25A AMP AMP
28 25A PASS P/SEAT Passenger Reclining Limit Switch, Power Seat Relay Box RH
29 25A P/WDW RH Passenger Safety Window Module, Rear Power Window Switch RH
30 25A SMART KEY Smart Key Control Module
31 15A P/HANDLE Sport Mode Switch, Steering Tilt & Telescopic Module
32 20A S/HEATER FRT Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module, Driver/Passenger CCS Control Module
33 20A DR LOCK Door Lock/Unlock Relay, ICM Relay Box (Two Turn Unlock Relay)
7 58
Maintenance
OHG070023
Engine compartment fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you
can find the fuse/relay label describing
fuse/relay name and capacity.
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer OHG076047N
to the fuse panel label.
7 59
Maintenance
Engine compartment main fuse panel

Smart Junction Box (P/HANDLE 15A, SUNROOF 20A, DRV P/SEAT 10A, PASS P/SEAT 25A,
1 60A B+2
IPS 2, ARISU-LT 1)
Smart Junction Box (P/WDW 25A, P/WDW RH 25A, S/HEATER FRT 10A, TRUNK 10A,
2 60A B+3
P/OUTLET 1 20A)
3 40A IG1 PDM 1 (ACC) Relay, PDM 2 (IG1) Relay
4 40A ESC1 ESC Module

MULTI
FUSE
5 40A RR HTD RR HTD Relay
6 40A BLOWER Blower Relay
Smart Junction Block (STOP LAMP 10A, S/HEATER RR 20A, IPS 3/4, ARISU-LT 2, AMP 25A,
7 60A B+4
P/OUTLET 2 20A)
8 80A MDPS MDPS Unit
9 10A A/CON A/C Control Module
FUSE 10 10A B/UP LAMP Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, Electro Chromic Mirror, Audio, Front Monitor
11 10A ECU 4 PCM, IDB(Injector Driver Box)
7 60
Maintenance
12 10A ECU 5 Multipurpose Check Connector
13 30A EPB 2 Electronic Parking Brake Module
14 40A IG 2 Start Relay, PDM 3 (IG2) Relay
15 30A EPB 1 Electronic Parking Brake Module
16 40A B+5 EMS Block (ECU 3 15A, ECU 1 30A, F/PUMP 20A, HORN 15A)
FUSE 17 40A ESC 2 ESC Module
18 50A C/FAN C/Fan Relay
19 20A DIAGNOSIS Multipurpose Check Connector
20 10A AMS Battery Sensor
21 10A CRUISE Smart Cruise Control Radar
22 15A STOP LAMP Stop Signal Electronic Module
7 61
Maintenance
23 20A DEICER Deicer Relay
Driver Lumbar Support Limit Switch, Driver IMS Module,

24 30A DRV P/SEAT
Power Seat Relay Box LH, Driver Reclining Limit Switch
Smart Junction Box (DR LOCK 20A, SMART KEY 1 25A,
25 40A B+1 Leak Current Autocut Device (Leak Current Autocut Relay,
Leak Current Autocut Switch, IPS 5))
26 20A IGN COIL Ignition Coil #1~#6, Condenser #1/#2
IDB (Injector Driver Box), PCM, Purge Control Solenoid Valve,

27 10A SENSOR 2 Oil Control Valve #1 ~ #4, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve #1, #2, Canister Close Valve,
E/R Junction (C/FAN Relay)
FUSE 28 10A ECU 2 IDB (Injector Driver Box)
29 10A INJECTOR PCM, EMS Box (F/Pump Relay)
30 15A SENSOR 1 PCM, Oxygen Sensor #1~#4
31 15A ECU 3 PCM, IDB (Injector Driver Box)
32 20A F/PUMP EMS Block (F/Pump Relay)
33 15A HORN EMS Block (Horn Relay), ICM Relay Box(Burglar Horn Relay)
34 30A ECU 1 EMS Block (Engine Control Relay)
7 62
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
If you do not have necessary tools,
WARNING - Lights the correct bulbs and the expertise,
Prior to working on the light, consult an authorized HYUNDAI
firmly apply the parking brake, dealer. In many cases, it is difficult to
ensure that the ignition switch is replace vehicle light bulbs because
changed to the OFF position other parts of the vehicle must be
and turn off the lights to avoid removed before you can get to the
sudden movement of the vehicle bulb. This is especially true if you
and burning your fingers or have to remove the headlight assem-
receiving an electric shock. bly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlight
assembly can result in damage to OHG075025N
Use only the bulbs of the specified the vehicle.
wattage. Headlight, position light, turn
signal light, front fog light bulb
✽ NOTICE replacement
CAUTION - Light After driving in rain or washing the (1) Headlight (High) /
replacement vehicle, the headlight and taillight DRL (Daytime running light)
lenses could appear frosty. This con-
Be sure to replace the burned- dition is caused by the temperature (2) Headlight (Low)
out bulb with one of the same difference between the lamp inside (3) Front turn signal light
wattage rating. Otherwise, it and outside. This is similar to the
may cause damage to the fuse (4) Position (Parking) light
condensation on your windows (5) Front side marker
or electric wiring system. inside your vehicle during the rain
and doesn’t indicate a problem with (6) Front fog light
your vehicle. If the water leaks into
the lamp bulb circuitry, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
7 63
Maintenance
• Always handle them carefully, and Headlight (HID type)

avoid scratches and abrasions. If If the light bulb does not operate,
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with have the vehicle checked by an
liquids. authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Never touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause the WARNING
bulb to overheat and burst when lit. - HID Headlight low beam
• A bulb should be operated only Do not attempt to replace or
when installed in a headlight. inspect the low beam (XENON
• If a bulb becomes damaged or bulb) due to electric shock dan-
cracked, replace it immediately ger. If the low beam (XENON
OHD076046
and carefully dispose of it. bulb) is not working, have your
vehicle checked by an author-
WARNING - Halogen ized HYUNDAI Dealer.
bulbs
• Handle halogen bulbs with
care. Halogen bulbs contain CAUTION
pressurized gas that will pro- If your vehicle is equipped with
duce flying pieces of glass that High Intensity Discharge (HID)
could cause injuries if broken. headlights, these headlights
• Wear eye protection when contain mercury. So if you need
changing a bulb. Allow the to have your vehicle disposed,
bulb to cool down before han- you should remove the HID
dling it. Headlights before disposal. The
removed HID headlights should
be recycled, re-used or dis-
posed as hazardous waste.
7 64
Maintenance
HID lamps have superior perform- ■ High beam 5. Remove the bulb from the head-
ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps light assembly.
are estimated by the manufacturer to 6. Install a new headlight bulb.
last twice as long or longer than
halogen bulbs depending on their 7. Connect the headlight bulb socket
frequency of use. They will probably connector.
require replacement at some point in 8. Install the headlight bulb cover by
the life of the vehicle. Cycling the turning it clockwise.
headlamps on and off more than typ-
ical use will shorten HID lamps life. If the headlight aiming adjustment is
HID lamps do not fail in the same OHG070045
necessary after the headlight assem-
manner as halogen incandescent ■ Low beam
bly is reinstalled, consult an author-
lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a ized HYUNDAI dealer.
period of operation but will immedi-
ately relight when the headlamp
switch is cycled it is likely the HID
lamp needs to be replaced. HID light-
ing components are more complex
than conventional halogen bulbs and
thus have higher replacement cost.
OHG070044
Headlight (bulb type)
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the headlight bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the headlight bulb
socket connector.
7 65
Maintenance
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it Position (Parking) light, front fog

into the socket and rotating it until light and front side marker
it locks into place. If the light bulb does not operate,
6. Install the socket in the assembly have the vehicle checked by an
by aligning the tabs on the socket authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly ✽ NOTICE
and turn the socket clockwise. A skilled technician should check or
repair the position, front fog lights
and front side marker. Otherwise, it
may damage related parts of the
OHG070042
vehicle.
Turn signal light
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
7 66
Maintenance
Stop/tail light and rear side marker

If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
✽ NOTICE
A skilled technician should check or
repair the stop/tail light and rear
side marker. Otherwise, it may dam-
age related parts of the vehicle.
OHG070026 OHG075027
Side repeater light bulb Rear combination light bulb

replacement replacement
If the light bulb does not operate, (1) Stop and tail light
have the vehicle checked by an (2) Rear turn signal light
(3) Backup light
(4) Rear side marker
✽ NOTICE
repair the side repeater light.
Otherwise, it may damage related
parts of the vehicle.
7 67
Maintenance

assembly by turning the socket
the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
OHG070028
socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it OHG070030
into the socket and rotating it until Backup light
it locks into place. 1. Turn off the engine.
7. Install the socket in the assembly 2. Open the trunk.
by aligning the tabs on the socket
3. Loosen the retaining screw of the
with the slots in the assembly.
trunk lid cover and then remove
Push the socket into the assembly
the cover.
and turn the socket clockwise.
8. Install the service cover by putting
OHG070029 assembly by turning the socket
it into the service hole.
counter clockwise until the tabs on
Rear turn signal light
1. Turn off the engine. the assembly.
2. Open the trunk.
3. Remove the service cover by
pulling out the service cover.
7 68
Maintenance
OHG070040 OHG070031 OHG070039

5. Remove the bulb by pulling it High mounted stop light License plate light bulb
straight out. replacement replacement
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it If the light bulb does not operate, have 1. Turn off the engine.
into the socket and rotating it until the vehicle be checked by an author- 2. Loosen the retaining screws with a
it locks into place. ized HYUNDAI dealer. philips head screwdriver.
7. Install the socket into the assem- 3. Remove the bulb assembly by
bly by aligning the tabs on the ✽ NOTICE turning it counterclockwise.
socket with the slots in the assem- A skilled technician should check or
bly. Push the socket into the 4. Remove the bulb by pulling it
repair the high mounted stop light. straight out.
assembly and turn the socket Otherwise, it may affect the per-
clockwise. 5. Install a new bulb.
formance of the curtain airbags or
8. Reinstall the trunk lid cover by damage related interior parts of the 6. Reinstall the bulb assembly
pushing in the screw. vehicle. securely with the retaining screws.
7 69
Maintenance
■ Glove box lamp Interior light bulb replacement ■ Map lamp
Glove box lamp and luggage room

lamp
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interi-
or light housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
■ Luggage room lamp

WARNING - Interior lights
Prior to working on the Interior ■ Door courtesy lamp
lights, ensure that the lights are
off to avoid burning your fingers
or receiving an electric shock.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.

4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
OHG070033/OHG070034
OHG045029/OHG070036
7 70
Maintenance
■ Room lamp ■ Vanity mirror lamp
Type A
OHG071052A
Type B
Map lamp, room lamp, door cour-
tesy lamp and vanity mirror lamp
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
✽ NOTICE
repair the interior lights. Otherwise,
it may damage related parts of the
vehicle.
OHG070037/OHG070038
7 71
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care Finish maintenance
Exterior general caution Washing CAUTION
It is very important to follow the label To help protect your vehicle’s finish • Do not use strong soap, chem-
directions when using any chemical from rust and deterioration, wash it ical detergents or hot water,
cleaner or polish. Read all warning thoroughly and frequently at least and do not wash the vehicle in
and caution statements that appear once a month with lukewarm or cold direct sunlight or when the
on the label. water. body of the vehicle is warm.
If you use your vehicle for off-road • Be careful when washing the
driving, you should wash it after each side windows of your vehicle.
High-pressure washing off-road trip. Pay special attention to Especially, with high-pressure
• When using high-pressure wash- the removal of any accumulation of water, water may leak through
ers, make sure to maintain suffi- salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign mate- the windows and wet the inte-
cient distance from the vehicle. rials. Make sure the drain holes in the rior.
Insufficient clearance or excessive lower edges of the doors and rocker • To prevent damage to the
pressure can lead to component panels are kept clear and clean. plastic parts and lamps, do
damage or water penetration. not clean with chemical sol-
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
• Do not spray the camera, sensors industrial pollution and similar vents or strong detergents.
or its surrounding area directly with deposits can damage your vehicle’s
a high pressure washer. Shock finish if not removed immediately.
applied from high pressure water WARNING - Wet brakes
may cause the device to not oper- Even prompt washing with plain water
ate normally. may not completely remove all these After washing the vehicle, test
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on the brakes while driving slowly
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to painted surfaces, may be used. to see if they have been affected
boots (rubber or plastic covers)or by water. If braking performance
connectors as they may be dam- After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water. is impaired, dry the brakes by
aged if they come into contact with applying them lightly while main-
high pressure water. Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.
taining a slow forward speed.
7 72
Maintenance
Waxing
A good coat of wax is a barrier CAUTION - Drying vehicle
between your paint and contaminate. • Wiping dust or dirt off the
Keeping a good coat of wax on your body with a dry cloth will
vehicle will help protect it. scratch the finish.
Wax the vehicle when water will no • Do not use steel wool, abra-
longer bead on the paint. sive cleaners, or strong deter-
Always wash and dry the vehicle gents containing highly alka-
before waxing. Use a good quality line or caustic agents on
liquid or paste wax, and follow the chrome-plated or anodized
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all aluminum parts. This may
OJB037800 metal trim to protect it and to main- result in damage to the protec-
tain its luster. tive coating and cause discol-
CAUTION - Wetting engine oration or paint deterioration.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
• Water washing in the engine als with a spot remover will usually
compartment including high strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
pressure water washing may to re-wax these areas even if the rest
cause the failure of electrical of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
circuits located in the engine ing.
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
7 73
Maintenance
Finish damage repair Bright-metal maintenance Underbody maintenance

Deep scratches or stone chips in the • To remove road tar and insects, Corrosive materials used for ice and
painted surface must be repaired use a tar remover, not a scraper or snow removal and dust control may
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly other sharp object. collect on the underbody. If these
rust and may develop into a major • To protect the surfaces of bright- materials are not removed, acceler-
repair expense. metal parts from corrosion, apply a ated rusting can occur on underbody
coating of wax or chrome preser- parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
vative and rub to a high luster. floor pan and exhaust system, even
If your vehicle is damaged and requires though they have been treated with
any metal repair or replacement, be • During winter weather or in coastal rust protection.
sure the body shop applies anti-cor- areas, cover the bright metal parts
rosion materials to the parts repaired with a heavier coating of wax or Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
or replaced. preservative. If necessary, coat the body and wheel openings with luke-
parts with non-corrosive petroleum warm or cold water once a month,
jelly or other protective compound. after off-road driving and at the end of
each winter. Pay special attention to
these areas because it is difficult to
see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down the
road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels,
and frame members have drain holes
that should not be allowed to clog with
dirt; trapped water in these areas can
cause rusting.
7 74
Maintenance
Aluminum wheel maintenance Corrosion protection High-corrosion areas

The aluminum wheels are coated Protecting your vehicle from corrosion If you live in an area where your vehi-
with a clear protective finish. By using the most advanced design cle is regularly exposed to corrosive
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, and construction practices to combat materials, corrosion protection is par-
polishing compound, solvent, or corrosion, we produce vehicles of the ticularly important. Some of the com-
wire brushes on aluminum wheels. highest quality. However, this is only mon causes of accelerated corrosion
They may scratch or damage the part of the job. To achieve the long- are road salts, dust control chemicals,
finish. term corrosion resistance your vehi- ocean air and industrial pollution.
• Clean the wheels when it has cle can deliver, the owner's coopera-
cooled. tion and assistance is also required. Moisture breeds corrosion
• Use only a mild soap or neutral Moisture creates the conditions in
detergent, and rinse thoroughly Common causes of corrosion which corrosion is most likely to occur.
with water. Also, be sure to clean The most common causes of corro- For example, corrosion is accelerated
the wheels after driving on salted sion on your vehicle are: by high humidity, particularly when
roads. This helps prevent corrosion. • Road salt, dirt and moisture that is temperatures are just above freezing.
allowed to accumulate underneath In such conditions, the corrosive mate-
• Avoid washing the wheels with
the vehicle. rial is kept in contact with the vehicle
high-speed car wash brushes.
surfaces by moisture that is slow to
• Do not use any acid detergent. It • Removal of paint or protective evaporate.
may damage and corrode the alu- coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents Mud is particularly corrosive because it
minum wheels coated with a clear
which leave unprotected metal is slow to dry and holds moisture in
protective finish.
exposed to corrosion. contact with the vehicle. Although the
mud appears to be dry, it can still retain
the moisture and promote corrosion.
7 75
Maintenance
High temperatures can also acceler- Keep your vehicle clean • When cleaning lower door panels,
ate corrosion of parts that are not The best way to prevent corrosion is rocker panels and frame members,
properly ventilated so the moisture to keep your vehicle clean and free be sure that drain holes are kept
can be dispersed. For all these rea- of corrosive materials. Attention to open so that moisture can escape
sons, it is particularly important to the underside of the vehicle is partic- and not be trapped inside to accel-
keep your vehicle clean and free of ularly important. erate corrosion.
mud or accumulations of other mate-
rials. This applies not only to the vis- • If you live in a high-corrosion area
ible surfaces but particularly to the — where road salts are used, near
underside of the vehicle. the ocean, areas with industrial pol-
lution, acid rain, etc.—, you should
take extra care to prevent corrosion.
To help prevent corrosion In winter, hose off the underside of
You can help prevent corrosion from your vehicle at least once a month
getting started by observing the fol- and be sure to clean the underside
lowing: thoroughly when winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, give particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
7 76
Maintenance
Keep your garage dry Keep paint and trim in good con- Do not neglect the interior
Do not park your vehicle in a damp, dition Moisture can collect under the floor
poorly ventilated garage. This creates Scratches or chips in the finish mats and carpeting to cause corro-
a favorable environment for corrosion. should be covered with "touch-up" sion. Check under the mats periodi-
This is particularly true if you wash paint as soon as possible to reduce cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.
your vehicle in the garage or drive it the possibility of corrosion. If bare Use particular care if you carry fertil-
into the garage when it is still wet or metal is showing through, the atten- izers, cleaning materials or chemi-
covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a tion of a qualified body and paint cals in the vehicle.
heated garage can contribute to cor- shop is recommended. These should be carried only in
rosion unless it is well ventilated so proper containers and any spills or
moisture is dispersed. leaks should be cleaned up, flushed
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage with clean water and thoroughly
painted surfaces in just a few hours. dried.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
7 77
Maintenance
Interior care Cleaning the upholstery and inte- Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
Interior general precautions rior trim webbing
Prevent chemicals such as perfume, Vinyl Clean the belt webbing with any mild
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean- Remove dust and loose dirt from soap solution recommended for
er, and air freshener from contacting vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the interior parts because they may cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a the instructions provided with the
cause damage or discoloration. If they vinyl cleaner. soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
do contact the interior parts, wipe webbing because this may weaken it.
them off immediately. See the instruc- Fabric
tions for the proper way to clean vinyl. Remove dust and loose dirt from fab- Cleaning the interior window glass
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum If the interior glass surfaces of the
CAUTION - Electrical cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu- vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
componants tion recommended for upholstery or ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
Never allow water or other liquids carpets. Remove fresh spots imme- film), they should be cleaned with
to come in contact with electrical/ diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If glass cleaner. Follow the directions
electronic components inside the fresh spots do not receive immediate on the glass cleaner container.
vehicle as this may damage them. attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be CAUTION - Rear windows
reduced if the material is not proper- Do not scrape or scratch the
CAUTION - Leather ly maintained. inside of the rear window. This
When cleaning leather products Using anything but recommended may result in damage to the rear
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use cleaners and procedures may affect window defroster grid.
neutral detergents or low alco- the fabric’s appearance and fire-
hol content solutions. If you use resistant properties.
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.
7 78
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

The emission control system of your Caution for the Inspection and 1. Crankcase emission control
vehicle is covered by a written limited Maintenance Test (With Electronic system
warranty. Please see the warranty Stability Control (ESC) system) The positive crankcase ventilation
information contained in the Owner’s • To prevent the vehicle from mis- system is employed to prevent air
Handbook & Warranty Information firing during dynamometer test- pollution caused by blow-by gases
booklet in your vehicle. ing, turn the Electronic Stability being emitted from the crankcase.
Your vehicle is equipped with an Control (ESC) system off by This system supplies fresh filtered air
emission control system to meet all pressing the ESC switch. to the crankcase through the air
applicable emission regulations. • After dynamometer testing is intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
There are three emission control completed, turn the ESC system the fresh air mixes with blow-by
systems, as follows. back on by pressing the ESC gases, which then pass through the
switch again. PCV valve into the induction system.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem 2. Evaporative emission con-
(2) Evaporative emission control sys- trol (including ORVR:
tem Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery) system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
In order to assure the proper function vapors from escaping into the atmos-
of the emission control systems, it is phere.
recommended that you have your (The ORVR system is designed to
vehicle inspected and maintained by allow the vapors from the fuel tank to
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in be loaded into a canister while refu-
accordance with the maintenance eling at the gas station, preventing
schedule in this manual. the escape of fuel vapors into the
atmosphere.)
7 79
Maintenance
Canister 3. Exhaust emission control Engine exhaust gas precautions

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel system (carbon monoxide)
tank are absorbed and stored in the The Exhaust Emission Control • Carbon monoxide can be present
onboard canister. When the engine is System is a highly effective system with other exhaust fumes. Therefore,
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in which controls exhaust emissions if you smell exhaust fumes of any
the canister are drawn into the surge while maintaining good vehicle per- kind inside your vehicle, have it
tank through the purge control sole- formance. inspected and repaired immediately.
noid valve. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes
Vehicle modifications are coming into your vehicle, drive it
Purge Control Solenoid Valve only with all the windows fully open.
This vehicle should not be modified. Have your vehicle checked and
(PCSV) Modification of your vehicle could repaired immediately.
The purge control solenoid valve is affect its performance, safety or dura-
controlled by the Engine Control bility and may even violate governmen-
Module (ECM); when the engine tal safety and emissions regulations. WARNING - Exhaust
coolant temperature is low during In addition, damage or performance Engine exhaust gases contain
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap- problems resulting from any modifi- carbon monoxide (CO). Though
orated fuel is not taken into the cation may not be covered under colorless and odorless, it is
engine. After the engine warms-up warranty. dangerous and could be lethal if
during ordinary driving, the PCSV inhaled. Follow the instructions
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to • If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to on this page to avoid CO poi-
the engine. soning.
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
7 80
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in con- Operating precautions for catalytic

CALIFORNIA PROPO- fined or closed areas (such as converters (if equipped)
SITION 65 WARNING garages) any more than what is
Engine exhaust and a wide vari- necessary to move the vehicle in or WARNING - Fire
ety of automobile components out of the area.
• Do not park, idle or drive the
and parts, including compo- • When the vehicle is stopped in an vehicle over or near flamma-
nents found in the interior fur- open area for more than a short ble objects, such as grass,
nishings in a vehicle, contain or time with the engine running, adjust vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
emit chemicals known to the the ventilation system (as needed) A hot exhaust system can
State of California to cause can- to draw outside air into the vehicle. ignite flammable items under
cer and birth defects and repro- • Never sit in a parked or stopped your vehicle.
ductive harm. In addition, cer- vehicle for any extended time with
tain fluids contained in vehicles • Also, do not remove the heat
the engine running. sink around the exhaust sys-
and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain or emit chem- • When the engine stalls or fails to tem, do not seal the bottom of
icals known to the State of start, excessive attempts to restart the vehicle or do not coat the
California to cause cancer and the engine may cause damage to vehicle for corrosion control.
birth defects or other reproduc- the emission control system. It may present a fire risk under
tive harm. certain conditions.
WARNING - Catalytic
converter
Keep away from the catalytic
converter and exhaust system
while the vehicle is running or
immediately thereafter. The
exhaust and catalytic systems
are very hot and may burn you.
7 81
Maintenance
CALIFORNIA PERCHLO-
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalyt- Failure to observe these precautions RATE NOTICE
ic converter emission control device. could result in damage to the Perchlorate Material-special handling
Therefore, the following precautions catalytic converter and to your vehi- may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz-
must be observed: cle. Additionally, such actions could ardouswaste/perchlorate.
void your warranties.
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engines. Notice to California Vehicle
• Do not operate the vehicle when Dismantlers: Perchlorate containing
there are signs of engine malfunc- materials, such as air bag inflators,
tion, such as misfire or a noticeable seatbelt pretensioners and keyless
loss of performance. remote entry batteries, must be dis-
• Do not misuse or abuse the posed of according to Title 22
engine. Examples of misuse are California Code of Regulations
coasting with the ignition off and Section 67384.10 (a).
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission con-
trol system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
• Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, dam-
aging the catalytic converter.
7 82
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Bulb wattage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Tires and wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Weight and volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Air conditioning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 8-5
• Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Vehicle certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Engine number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Consumer information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8
ENGINE BULB WATTAGE

Item Gasoline 3.3L
Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Displacement cu. in 203.9
(cc) (3342) 55 or 35
Headlights (Low) H7 or D1S
Bore x Stroke in 3.62 x 3.30 (HID)
(mm) (92 x 83.8) Headlights (High)/DRL*1 55 H7
Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6 Front turn signal light 21 HY21W
Front Position light LED LED
No. of cylinders 6, V-type
Side repeater light LED LED
Type A 51 HB4
Front fog light
Type B LED LED
Front side marker LED LED
DIMENSIONS Stop light LED LED
Item in (mm) Tail light LED LED
Overall length 193.7 (4920) Rear turn signal light 27 PY27W
Overall width 73.2 (1860) Rear Back-up light 16 W16W
Overall height 57.9 (1471) High mounted stop light LED LED
License plate light 5 W5W
P 245/45 R18 63.2 (1606)
Front tread Rear side marker LED LED
P 245/40 R19 63.1 (1602)
Map lamp LED LED
P 245/45 R18 63.3 (1607) Room lamp LED LED
Rear tread
P 245/40 R19 63.1 (1603) Interior Luggage lamp 5 FESTOON
Wheelbase 112.0 (2845) Glove box lamp 5 FESTOON
Vanity mirror lamp LED LED
*1 DRL : Daytime Running Light
8 2
TIRES AND WHEELS

Inflation pressure bar psi (kPa) Wheel lug nut
Item Tire size Wheel size Normal load *1 Maximum load torque lbf·ft
Front Rear Front Rear (kgf·m, N·m)
P245/45R18 7.5Jx18 33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230)

Full size tire
P245/40R19 8.0Jx19 33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230) 65~79
(9~11, 88~107)
Compact
T135/80D17 4.0Tx17 60 (420) 60 (420) 60 (420) 60 (420)
spare tire
*1: Normal load : Up to 3 persons
✽ NOTICE
• It is permissible to add 3psi to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon.
Tires typically loose 1psi for every 12°F temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expected, re-
check your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level. Thus, if you plan to
drive a high-altitude area, check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a proper level. (Air
inflation per altitude : +2.4 psi/1 mile)
8 3
WEIGHT AND VOLUME

Item Gasoline 3.3L
Gross vehicle weight
4806 (2180)
lbs (kg)
Luggage volume
16.0 (454)
cu ft (l)
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

Item Weight of volume Classification
Refrigerant 650±25g R-134a
Compressor oil 100±10cc PAG (FD46 X G)
8 4
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil * * (drain and refill)
1 2
Recommends API Service SM*3,

6.02 US qt. (5.7 l) ILSAC GF-4 or above,
ACEA A5
MICHANG ATF SP-4, SK ATF SP-4

NOCA ATF SP-4, HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-4 or
Automatic transaxle fluid 8.24 US qt. (7.8 l)
other brands meeting the above specification
approved by HYUNDAI Motor Co.,
Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene glycol

Coolant 8.88 US qt. (8.4 l)
base coolant for aluminum radiator)
Brake fluid 0.7~0.8 US qt. (0.7~0.8 l) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Fuel 18.49 US gal. (70 l ) Unleaded gasoline
*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3 If the API service SM or ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL or ACEA A3.
8 5
Recommended SAE viscosity Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has When choosing an oil, consider the
number an effect on fuel economy and cold range of temperature your vehicle
weather operating (engine start and will be operated in before the next oil
Always be sure to clean the area
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosi- change. Proceed to select the rec-
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
ty engine oils can provide better fuel ommended oil viscosity from the
dipstick before checking or draining
economy and cold weather perform- chart.
any lubricant. This is especially
ance, however, higher viscosity
important in dusty or sandy areas
engine oils are required for satisfac-
and when the vehicle is used on
tory lubrication in hot weather. Using
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
oils of any viscosity other than those
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
recommended could result in engine
and grit from entering the engine and
damage.
other mechanisms that could be
damaged. Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
°C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature
(°F) -10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Gasoline 10W-30
Engine Oil *1 5W-30
*1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a vis-
cosity grade SAE 5W-30 (API Service SM / ILSAC GF-4 / ACEA A5).
However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper
engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
8 6
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) VEHICLE CERTIFICATION

LABEL
■ Type A VIN label
OHG080001
■ Type B
OBH088005N OHG080007L
The VIN is also on a plate attached The vehicle certification label
to the top of the dashboard. The attached on the driver’s (or front pas-
number on the plate can easily be senger’s) side center pillar gives the
seen through the windshield from vehicle identification number (VIN).
outside.
OVG089001
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your car and in all legal matters
pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the
engine compartment bulkhead or on
the floor under the front passenger’s
seat.
8 7
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND ENGINE NUMBER REFRIGERANT LABEL

PRESSURE LABEL
OHG073053A
OHG050081L OHG080004
The refrigerant label is located on
The tires supplied on your new vehi- The engine number is stamped on the underside of the hood.
cle are chosen to provide the best the engine block as shown in the The label contains the following infor-
performance for normal driving. drawing. mation:
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres- • Type of refrigerant
sures recommended for your car. • Amount of refrigerant
8 8
CONSUMER INFORMATION
This consumer information has been Eastern Region: Connecticut, Central Region: Illinois, Indiana,
prepared in accordance with regula- Delaware, Maine, Massachusetts, New lowa, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota,
tions issued by the National Highway Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Nebraska, North Dakota, South
Traffic Safety Administration of the Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont. Dakota, Ohio, Wisconsin, Kansas,
U.S. Department of Transportation. Missouri.
Your Hyundai dealer will help answer Eastern Region
any questions you may have as you Central Region
read this information. 1122 Cranbury South River Road
Jamesburg, NJ 08831 1705 Sequoia Drive
(800) 633-5151 Aurora, Illinois 60506
Hyundai motor vehicles are designed
and manufactured to meet or exceed (800) 633-5151
all applicable safety standards. Southern Region: Florida, Georgia,
Maryland, North Carolina, South Western Region: Alaska, Arizona,
Carolina, Virginia, West Virginia. California Colorado, Hawaii, ldaho,
For your safety, however, we strongly
urge you to read and follow all direc- Montana, Nevada, Oregon, Utah,
tions in this Owner's Manual, particu- Southern Region Washington, Wyoming.
larly the information under the head- 3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway
ings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066 Western Region
"WARNING". (800) 633-5151 10550 Talbert Avenue
P.O.Box 20850
If, after reading this manual, you South Central Region: Alabama, Fountain Valley,
have any questions regarding the Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, New California 92728-0850
operation of your vehicle, please Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas.
contact your nearest Hyundai Motor (800) 633-5151
America Regional Office as listed in South Central Region
the following:
1421 South Beltline Road,
Suite 400 Coppell, TX 75019
(800) 633-5151
8 9
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR
AMERICA. If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE West
Building Washington, DC 20590. You
can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
8 10
Index
I
Index
Automatic transaxle ......................................................5-10
A Manual shift mode ....................................................5-12
Active ECO system........................................................5-56 Shift lock system ......................................................5-14
Air bag warning label ....................................................3-60 Aux, USB and iPod® port ..........................................4-147
Air bag warning light ....................................................3-39
Air bags..........................................................................3-36
Air bag warning label................................................3-60
B
Air bag warning light ................................................3-39 Base curb weight ..........................................................5-87
Curtain air bag ..........................................................3-51 Battery............................................................................7-34
Driver's and passenger's front air bag ......................3-47 Battery replacement (Smart key) ..................................4-10
Occupant classification system ................................3-42 Battery saver function..................................................4-100
Side impact air bag....................................................3-50 Before driving ..................................................................5-3
SRS components and functions ................................3-39 Blind spot detection system (BSD) ..............................5-57
Air cleaner ....................................................................7-29 BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
Air ventilation seat (front) ............................................3-10 LCA (Lane Change Assist) ....................................5-58
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ......................................5-28 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ..............................5-61
Appearance care ............................................................7-72 Bluetooth® Wireless Technology ................................4-147
Exterior care ..............................................................7-72 Bottle holders, see cup holders....................................4-139
Interior care ..............................................................7-78 Brake fluid ....................................................................7-27
Armrest (rear) ................................................................3-14 Brake system..................................................................5-16
Ashtray ........................................................................4-139 Electronic parking brake (EPB) ................................5-19
Audio system ..............................................................4-147 Auto hold ..................................................................5-25
Automatic climate control system....................4-113, 4-124 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)..................................5-28
Air conditioning ..........................................4-120, 4-131 Electronic stability control (ESC) ............................5-30
Automatic heating and air conditioning ......4-114, 4-125 Hill-start assist control (HAC) ..................................5-35
Climate control air filter ..............................4-123, 4-133 Parking brake ............................................................5-18
Manual heating and air conditioning ..........4-115, 4-126 Power brakes ............................................................5-16
Vehicle stability management (VSM) ......................5-34
I 2
Index
Bulb replacement, see light bulbs..................................7-63 Clothes hanger ............................................................4-143
Bulb wattage ....................................................................8-2 Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ..............4-58
Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button ................5-5 Compact spare tire ........................................................6-18
Compact spare tire replacement ....................................7-41
C Coolant ..........................................................................7-24
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant ..................................7-24
California perchlorate notice ........................................7-82 Crankcase emission control system ..............................7-79
Capacities (Lubricants)....................................................8-5 Cruise control system ....................................................5-38
Care Cup holder ..................................................................4-139
Exterior care ..............................................................7-72 Cup holder (rear) ..........................................................3-15
Interior care ..............................................................7-78 Curtain air bag ..............................................................3-51
Tire care ....................................................................7-37
Cargo capacity ..............................................................5-84 D
Cargo weight..................................................................5-87
Center console storage ................................................4-137 Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
Central door lock switch................................................4-17 illumination ................................................................4-59
Certification label ..................................................5-85, 8-7 Dashboard, see instrument cluster ................................4-58
Chains Daytime running light (DRL) ......................................4-101
Tire chains ................................................................5-79 Defogging (Windshield) ..............................................4-135
Changing tires................................................................6-14 Defogging logic (Windshield) ....................................4-137
Checking tire inflation pressure ....................................7-38 Defroster (Rear window) ............................................4-112
Child restraint system ....................................................3-28 Defrosting (Windshield) ..............................................4-136
Lower anchor ............................................................3-34 Digital clock ................................................................4-142
Seat belt ....................................................................3-30 Dimensions ......................................................................8-2
Tether anchor system ................................................3-33 Display illumination, see instrument panel
Child-protector rear door lock ......................................4-18 illumination ................................................................4-59
Climate control air filter ..................................4-123, 4-133 Displays, see instrument cluster ....................................4-58
Climate control air filter replacement............................7-30 Door courtesy lamp ....................................................4-111
Clock (Digital) ............................................................4-142
I 3
Index
Door locks......................................................................4-15 Emission control system................................................7-79
Central door lock switch ..........................................4-17 Crankcase emission control system ..........................7-79
Child-protector rear door lock ..................................4-18 Evaporative emission control system........................7-79
Drinks holders, see cup holders ..................................4-139 Exhaust emission control system ..............................7-80
Driver position memory system ..................................4-41 Engine (Specification) ....................................................8-2
Easy access function ................................................4-42 Engine compartment ................................................2-6, 7-3
Driver's 3-point seat belt................................................3-19 Engine compartment fuse replacement ........................7-53
Driver's and passenger's front air bag............................3-47 Engine coolant ..............................................................7-24
Driving at night..............................................................5-76 Engine coolant temperature gauge ................................4-60
Driving in flooded areas ................................................5-77 Engine number ................................................................8-8
Driving in the rain..........................................................5-77 Engine oil ......................................................................7-23
Engine overheat ..............................................................6-7
E Engine start/stop button ..................................................5-5
Engine will not start ........................................................6-4
Economical operation ....................................................5-73 Evaporative emission control system ............................7-79
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with Exhaust emission control system ..................................7-80
HomeLink® system and compass ..............................4-46 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ..............7-20
Electronic power steering (EPS)....................................4-43 Exterior care ..................................................................7-72
Electronic parking brake (EPB) ....................................5-19 Exterior overview (front) ................................................2-2
Electronic stability control (ESC) ................................5-30 Exterior overview (rear) ..................................................2-3
Emergency starting ..........................................................6-5
Jump starting ..............................................................6-5 F
Push starting ................................................................6-6
Emergency towing ........................................................6-22 Flat tire ..........................................................................6-13
Emergency trunk safety release ....................................4-20 Changing tires ..........................................................6-14
Emergency while driving ................................................6-3 Compact spare tire ....................................................6-18
Jack and tools ............................................................6-13
Removing and storing the spare tire ........................6-14
I 4
Index
Floor mat anchor(s) ....................................................4-143
Fluid
G
Brake fluid ................................................................7-27 Gauge
Washer fluid ..............................................................7-28 Engine coolant temperature gauge............................4-52
Folding the rear seat ......................................................3-15 Fuel gauge ................................................................4-52
Foward collision warning system (FCWS) ..................5-69 GAW (Gross axle weight) ............................................5-87
Front passenger and rear seat belt ................................3-21 GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) ................................5-87
Front seat adjustment ......................................................3-4 Glass antenna ..............................................................4-145
Cushion extension ......................................................3-6 Glassroof, see panorama sunroof ................................4-35
Forward and rearward ................................................3-5 Glove box ....................................................................4-138
Lumber support ..........................................................3-6 Glove box lamp............................................................4-111
Seat cushion height ....................................................3-5 GVW (Gross vehicle weight) ........................................5-87
Seatback angle ............................................................3-5 GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) ..........................5-87
Fuel filler lid ..................................................................4-31
Emergency fuel filler lid release ..............................4-34 H
Fuel gauge......................................................................4-60
Fuel requirements ............................................................1-3 Hazard warning flasher ........................................4-100, 6-2
Fuse switch ....................................................................7-53 Hazardous driving conditions ........................................5-75
Fuse/relay panel description ..........................................7-55 Headlight (Headlamp) escort function ........................4-101
Fuses ..............................................................................7-51 Headlight (Headlamp) welcome function ..................4-101
Instrument panel fuse replacement ..........................7-52 Headrest (front)................................................................3-6
Engine compartment fuse replacement ....................7-53 Headrest (rear) ..............................................................3-12
Fuse switch................................................................7-53 Height adjustment (Seat belt) ........................................3-20
Fuse/relay panel description......................................7-55 Highway driving ............................................................5-78
Main fuse ..................................................................7-54 Hill-start assist control (HAC) ......................................5-35
Multi fuse ..................................................................7-54 Hood ..............................................................................4-29
Horn ..............................................................................4-45
How to use this manual ..................................................1-2
I 5
Index
Floor mat anchor(s) ................................................4-143
I Power outlet ............................................................4-141
Immobilizer system ........................................................4-4 Rear curtain ............................................................4-144
Indicators and warnings ................................................4-77 Side curtain..............................................................4-145
Inside rearview mirror ..................................................4-46 Sunvisor ..................................................................4-141
Instrument cluster ..........................................................4-58 Interior light ................................................................4-109
Engine coolant temperature gauge............................4-60 Door courtesy lamp ................................................4-111
Fuel gauge ................................................................4-60 Glove box lamp ......................................................4-111
Instrument panel illumination ..................................4-59 Map lamp ................................................................4-109
LCD display ..............................................................4-63 Mood lamp ..............................................................4-110
LCD display warnings and indicators ......................4-77 Room lamp ..............................................................4-110
Odometer ..................................................................4-61 Trunk room lamp ....................................................4-110
Speedometer ..............................................................4-59 Vanity mirror lamp ..................................................4-111
Tachometer ................................................................4-59 Interior overview..............................................................2-4
Trip computer mode ..................................................4-64
User settings mode ....................................................4-68 J
Warning and indicators ............................................4-77
Instrument panel fuse replacement ................................7-52 Jack and tools ................................................................6-13
Instrument panel illumination........................................4-59 Jump starting....................................................................6-5
Instrument panel overview ..............................................2-5
Interior care....................................................................7-78 K
Interior features............................................................4-140
Ashtray ....................................................................4-140 Keys ................................................................................4-3
Clothes hanger ........................................................4-143
Cup holder ..............................................................4-140
Digital clock ............................................................4-142
I 6
Index
Lighting........................................................................4-100
L Battery saver function ............................................4-100
Label Auto light position ..................................................4-103
Air bag warning label................................................3-60 Daytime running light (DRL) ................................4-101
Refrigerant label..........................................................8-8 Front fog light ........................................................4-106
Tire sidewall labeling ................................................7-43 Lighting control
Tire specification and pressure label ..........................8-8 Headlight (Headlamp) escort function....................4-101
Vehicle certification label............................................8-7 Headlight (Headlamp) welcome function ..............4-101
Jack label ..................................................................6-20 Headlight position ..................................................4-102
Lane departure warning system (LDWS)......................5-65 High beam operation ..............................................4-103
LCD display ..................................................................4-63 Parking light position ..............................................4-102
LCD modes ..............................................................4-63 Smart High Beam....................................................4-104
Trip computer mode ..................................................4-64 Turn signals and lane change signals......................4-105
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode........................................4-65 Lower anchor ................................................................3-34
LDWS Mode ............................................................4-65 Lubricants and capacities ................................................8-5
A/V mode ..................................................................4-65
Information mode......................................................4-66 M
LCD display warnings and indicators ..........................4-77
Light bulbs ....................................................................7-63 Maintenance
Headlight, position light, turn signal light, Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ..........7-20
front fog light bulb replacement ............................7-63 Maintenance services ..................................................7-4
High mounted stop light replacement ......................7-69 Maintenance under severe usage conditions ............7-19
Interior light bulb replacement..................................7-70 Normal maintenance schedule ....................................7-9
License plate light bulb replacement ........................7-69 Owner maintenance ....................................................7-6
Rear combination light bulb replacement ................7-67 Scheduled maintenance service ..................................7-8
Side repeater light bulb replacement ........................7-67 Tire maintenance ......................................................7-42
I 7
Index
Maintenance schedule......................................................7-8
Maintenance under severe usage conditions ............7-19
O
Normal maintenance schedule ....................................7-9 Occupant classification system......................................3-42
Main fuse ......................................................................7-54 Odometer ......................................................................4-61
Manual shift mode ........................................................5-12 Oil (Engine) ..................................................................7-23
Map lamp ....................................................................4-109 Overheat (Engine)............................................................6-7
Mirrors ..........................................................................4-46 Owner maintenance ........................................................7-6
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with
HomeLink® system and compass..........................4-46 P
Inside rearview mirror ..............................................4-46
Side view mirrors ......................................................4-54 Panoramic sunroof ........................................................4-35
Reverse parking aid ..................................................4-57 Parking brake........................................................5-18, 7-28
Mood lamp ..................................................................4-110 Power brakes..................................................................5-16
Moonroof, see panoramic sunroof ................................4-35 Power outlet ................................................................4-141
Multi fuse ......................................................................7-54 Power window lock button ............................................4-28
Multimedia system ......................................................4-145 Pre-tensioner seat belt....................................................3-22
Audio system ..........................................................4-147 Push starting ....................................................................6-6
Aux, USB and iPod® port ......................................4-147
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology ............................4-147 R
Glass antenna ..........................................................4-145
Navigation system ..................................................4-147 Rear curtain..................................................................4-144
Shark fin antenna ....................................................4-145 Rear parking assist system ..........................................4-95
Steering wheel audio control ..................................4-146 Rear seat ........................................................................3-12
Rearveiw camera............................................................4-99
N Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ..................7-37
Navigation system........................................................4-147
I 8
Index
Recommended lubricants and capacities ........................8-5 Seats ................................................................................3-2
Recommended SAE viscosity number........................8-6 Air ventilation seat (front) ........................................3-10
Refrigerant label ..............................................................8-8 Armrest (rear)............................................................3-14
Remote keyless entry system ..........................................4-8 Cup holder (rear) ......................................................3-15
Removable towing hook ..............................................6-22 Folding the rear seat..................................................3-15
Replacement light bulb, see light bulbs ........................7-63 Front seat adjustment ..................................................3-4
Reverse parking aid function ........................................4-57 Headrest (front) ..........................................................3-6
Road warning ..................................................................6-2 Headrest (rear) ..........................................................3-12
Rocking the vehicle ......................................................5-75 Rear seat ....................................................................3-12
Room lamp ..................................................................4-110 Seat warmer (front) ....................................................3-9
Seat warmer (rear) ....................................................3-13
S Seatback pocket ........................................................3-11
Shift lock system ..........................................................5-14
Scheduled maintenance service ......................................7-8 Side curtain ..................................................................4-145
Normal maintenance schedule ....................................7-9 Side impact air bag ........................................................3-50
Maintenance under severe usage conditions ............7-19 Side view mirrors ..........................................................4-54
Seat belt warning ..........................................................3-18 Smart cruise control system ..........................................5-42
Seat belts........................................................................3-17 Smart high beam..........................................................4-104
Height adjustment ....................................................3-20 Smart key ........................................................................4-6
Pre-tensioner seat belt ..............................................3-22 Battery replacement ................................................4-10
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system ............................3-19 Remote keyless entry system ......................................4-8
Seat belt warning ......................................................3-18 Smart trunk ....................................................................4-21
Seat belts - Front passenger and rear seat ................3-21 Smooth cornering ..........................................................5-75
Seat warmer (front)..........................................................3-9 Snow tires ......................................................................5-79
Seat warmer (rear) ........................................................3-13 Spare tire
Seatback pocket ............................................................3-11 Compact spare tire ....................................................6-18
Seating capacity ............................................................5-83 Compact spare tire replacement................................7-41
Removing and storing the spare tire ........................6-14
I 9
Index
Special driving conditions ............................................5-75
Driving at night ........................................................5-76
T
Driving in flooded areas............................................5-77 Tachometer ....................................................................4-59
Driving in the rain ....................................................5-77 Tether anchor system ....................................................3-33
Hazardous driving conditions ..................................5-75 Theft-alarm system ........................................................4-12
Highway driving........................................................5-78 Tie-down hook ..............................................................6-24
Rocking the vehicle ..................................................5-75 Tilt and telescopic steering ............................................4-44
Smooth cornering ......................................................5-76 Tire and loading information label ................................5-83
Speedometer ..................................................................4-59 Tire chains......................................................................5-80
SRS components and functions ....................................3-38 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ......................6-8
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start ..................6-4 Tire specification and pressure label ..............................8-8
Steering wheel ..............................................................4-43 Tires and wheels ............................................................7-37
Electronic power steering (EPS) ..............................4-43 Checking tire inflation pressure ................................7-38
Horn ..........................................................................4-45 Compact spare tire replacement................................7-41
Tilt and telescopic steering........................................4-44 Low aspect ratio tire..................................................7-46
Steering wheel audio control ......................................4-146 Recommended cold tire inflation pressures..............7-37
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit ..................5-84 Tire care ....................................................................7-37
Storage compartment ..................................................4-138 Tire maintenance ......................................................7-42
Center console storage ............................................4-138 Tire replacement ................................................7-40, 8-3
Glove box ................................................................4-139 Tire rotation ..............................................................7-39
Sunglass holder ......................................................4-139 Tire sidewall labeling ................................................7-43
Sunglass holder............................................................4-138 Tire traction ..............................................................7-42
Sunroof, see panoramic sunroof ..................................4-35 Wheel alignment and tire balance ............................7-40
Sunvisor ......................................................................4-140 Wheel replacement ............................................7-42, 8-3
Sunvisor lamp, see vanity mirror lamp........................4-111
I 10
Index
Towing ..........................................................................6-21
Emergency towing ....................................................6-22
V
Removable towing hook ..........................................6-22 Vanity mirror lamp ......................................................4-111
Tie-down hook ..........................................................6-24 Vehicle break-in process ..................................................1-6
Towing capacity ............................................................5-60 Vehicle capacity weight ................................................5-84
Trailer towing ................................................................5-64 Vehicle certification label ................................................8-7
Transaxle Vehicle curb weight ......................................................5-87
Automatic transaxle ..................................................5-10 Vehicle data collection and event data recorders ............1-7
Trip computer ................................................................4-73 Vehicle identification number (VIN) ..............................8-7
Trunk..............................................................................4-19 Vehicle load limit ..........................................................5-83
Emergency trunk safety release ................................4-20 Cargo capacity ..........................................................5-84
Trunk room lamp ........................................................4-110 Certification label......................................................5-86
Turn signals and lane change signals ..........................4-105 Seating capacity ........................................................5-84
One-touch turn signal..............................................4-106 Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit ..............5-84
Tire and loading information label............................5-84
U Towing capacity ........................................................5-84
Vehicle capacity weight ............................................5-84
User settings mode (LCD display) ................................4-68 Vehicle stability management (VSM) ..........................5-34
Vehicle weight
Base curb weight ......................................................5-87
Cargo weight ............................................................5-87
GAW (Gross axle weight) ........................................5-87
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)............................5-87
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)....................................5-87
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) ......................5-87
Vehicle curb weight ..................................................5-87
I 11
Index
W
Warning and indicators ..................................................4-77
Warnings and indicators (LCD display) ........................4-63
Washer fluid ..................................................................7-28
Weight and volume ..........................................................8-4
Wheel alignment and tire balance ................................7-40
Wheel replacement ........................................................7-42
Windows ........................................................................4-25
Auto up/down window ..............................................4-27
Power window lock button........................................4-28
Windshield defrosting and defogging..........................4-136
Defogging logic ......................................................4-137
Winter driving ................................................................5-79
Snow tires..................................................................5-79
Tire chains ................................................................5-80
Wiper blades ..................................................................7-32
Wipers and washers ....................................................4-107
I 12

2017 Hyundai Azera OM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2017 Hyundai Azera OM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OWNER'S MANUAL

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of pub-

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELE-

Hyundai Customer Care

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

Your vehicle at a glance 2

Safety features of your vehicle 3

Features of your vehicle

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 8

How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Gasoline containing MMT Fuel Additives Operation in foreign countries

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

Exterior overview I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-23

Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system . 3-36

Front passenger’s seat

WARNING - Loose objects WARNING WARNING - Driver’s seat

OHG030007 OHG030008 OHG030009

OHG030010 OHG030012 OMG038400

For maximum effectiveness in case

■ Type A During mild weather or under condi-

■ Type A When the operation of the air ventila-

CAUTION - Seat damage WARNING

Also adjust the headrest as close to

• Each time you press the button,

CAUTION WARNING - Seat warmer

Folding the rear seat

5. To use the rear seat, lift and push

Driver's side (1) Front passenger’s side (2)

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up

Seat belts - Front passenger and It automatically adjusts to the proper

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or

Both the driver's and front passen-

• Because the sensor that activates ✽ NOTICE Seat belt precautions

Infant or small child ✽ NOTICE Larger children

If the shoulder belt portion slightly Pregnant women Injured person

Care of seat belts Periodic inspection When to replace seat belts

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

■ Rearward-facing child restraint system

Using a child restraint system

For safety reasons, we recommend

OEN036101 OEN036102 OEN036103

The lap/shoulder belt automatically When the seat belt is allowed to

WARNING - Tether strap

OHG031033A OHG031034A WARNING

Follow the child seat manufacturer’s

AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

WARNING - Seat belts

Noise and smoke

WARNING - Air bag

OHM039103N OHM039104N B240B05L

✽ NOTICE Main components of occupant

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classifica-

OVQ036013N 1KMN3663 1KMN3665

OHG031073A 1KMN3662 1KMN3664

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” ✽ NOTICE

■ Rear impact ■ Front Your vehicle is equipped with a side